FCC ID: HFLTMU925 UHF DTV ATSC 1KW TO 2.5 KW TRANSMITTER FAMILY

 

R&S TMU9 Transmitter System System Manual

(J0G2) 2600.5423.02 01 g n i t s a c d a o r B l a u n a M m e t s y S 2012 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG Muehldorfstr. 15, 81671 Munich, Germany Phone: +49 89 41 29 - 0 Fax: +49 89 41 29 12 164 E-mail: info@rohde-schwarz.com Internet: http://www.rohde-schwarz.com Printed in Germany Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding. R&S is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG. Trade names are trademarks of the owners. The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual: R&SXYZ1234 is abbreviated as R&S XYZ1234 KONFORMITTSERKLRUNG gem dem Gesetz ber Funkanlagen und Telekommunikationsendeinrichtungen (FTEG) und der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG (R&TTE) Anhang V, zertifiziert durch die Benannte Stelle CETECOM ICT Services GmbH, Kennnummer 0682. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY in accordance with the Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Act (FTEG) and Directive 1999/5/EC (R&TTE Directive) Annex V, certified by the Notified Body CETECOM ICT Services GmbH Germany, Identif. No. 0682. Zertifikat-Nr.: / Certificate No.: 2012-55 Hiermit wird in alleiniger Verantwortung bescheinigt, dass die Funkanlage We herewith certify under our sole responsibility that the radio equipment Gertetyp Equipment Type TMU9 Mittelleistungssender / Medium Power Benennung Designation Transmitter 0 0

. 1 0 I

/

5 0

. 5 1 0 7

. 3 7 5 3 c o d

. 9 U M T _ 5 5 _ 2 1 0 2

:

e g a l r o V Gerteklasse: / Equipment class: 2.10 (Broadcast transmitter) bei bestimmungsgemer Verwendung den grundlegenden Anforderungen des 3 und den brigen einschlgigen Bestimmungen des FTEG (Artikel 3 der R&TTE) entspricht. complies with the essential requirements of 3 and the other relevant provisions of the FTEG (Article 3 of the R&TTE Directive), when used for its intended purpose. Gesundheit und Sicherheit gem 3 (1) 1, (Artikel 3 (1) a)) Health and safety requirements pursuant to 3 (1) 1, (Article 3(1) a)) Schutzanforderungen in Bezug auf die elektromagn. Vertrglichkeit 3 (1) 2, (Artikel 3 (1) b)) Protection requirements concerning electromagnetic compatibility 3(1)(2), (Article 3(1)(b)) Manahmen zur effizienten Nutzung des Funkfrequenzspektrums 3 (2), (Artikel 3(2)) Measures for the efficient use of the radio frequency spectrum 3 (2), (Article 3(2)) Luftschnittstelle bei Funkanlagen gem 3(3), (Artikel 3(3)) Air interface of the radio systems pursuant to 3(3), (Article 3(3)) Angewendete harmonisierte Normen:

Harmonized standards applied:

EN 60950-1: 2006 ETSI EN 301489-1 V1.9.2 (2011-09) ETSI EN 301489-14 V1.2.1 (2003-05) ETSI EN 302296 V1.1.1 (2005-01) EN 61000-3-2: 2006 +A1 +A2 EN 61000-3-3: 2008 Reg TP SSB RU 005 Rec.1999/519/EG;

26. BImSchV Einhaltung der grundlegenden Anforderungen auf andere Art und Weise (hierzu verwendete Standards/Spezifikationen):

Other means of proving conformity with the essential requirements

(standards/specifications used):

ROHDE & SCHWARZ GmbH & Co. KG Mhldorfstr. 15, D-81671 Mnchen Mnchen, den 26. Oktober 2012 Zentrales Qualittsmanagement GF-QP / Radde Munich, 2012-10-26 Central Quality Management GF-QP / Radde CE D/E-1 KONFORMITTSERKLRUNG gem dem Gesetz ber Funkanlagen und Telekommunikationsendeinrichtungen (FTEG) und der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG (R&TTE) Anhang V, zertifiziert durch die Benannte Stelle CETECOM ICT Services GmbH, Kennnummer 0682. DCLARATION DE CONFORMIT selon la loi sur les quipements radio et les quipements terminaux de tlcommunications (FTEG) ainsi que selon la Directive 1999/5/CE (Directive R&TTE) Annexe V, certifi par l'Organisme Notifi CETECOM ICT Services GmbH Allemagne, numro d'identification 0682. Zertifikat-Nr.: / Certificat N : 2012-55 Hiermit wird in alleiniger Verantwortung bescheinigt, dass die Funkanlage Par la prsente, nous certifions sous notre responsabilit exclusive que l'quipement radio Gertetyp Equipment Type TMU9 Benennung Designation Mittelleistungssender / metteur moyenne puissance Gerteklasse: / Classe d'quipement : 2.10 bei bestimmungsgemer Verwendung den grundlegenden Anforderungen des 3 und den brigen einschlgigen Bestimmungen des FTEG (Artikel 3 der R&TTE) entspricht. est conforme aux prescriptions fondamentales du paragraphe 3 et aux autres prescriptions applicables de la loi susmentionne (Article 3 de la Directive R&TTE), condition qu'il soit utilis dans les conditions stipules. Gesundheit und Sicherheit gem 3 (1) 1, (Artikel 3 (1) a)) Prescriptions en matire de scurit et de sant selon le paragraphe 3 (1) 1, (Article 3 (1) a)) Schutzanforderungen in Bezug auf die elektromagn. Vertrglichkeit 3 (1) 2, (Artikel 3 (1) b)) Prescriptions en matire de protection relative la compatibilit lectromagntique selon le paragraphe 3 (1) (2) (Article 3 (1) b)) Manahmen zur effizienten Nutzung des Funkfrequenzspektrums 3 (2), (Artikel 3(2)) Mesures pour l'utilisation efficace du spectre radiolectrique le paragraphe 3 (2), (Article 3(2)) Luftschnittstelle bei Funkanlagen gem 3(3), (Artikel 3(3)) Interface radio des quipements radio selon le paragraphe 3 (3) (Article 3 (3)) Angewendete harmonisierte Normen:

Normes harmonises utilises :

0 0

. 1 0 I

/

5 0

. 5 1 0 7

. 3 7 5 3 c o d

. 9 U M T _ 5 5 _ 2 1 0 2

:

e g a l r o V EN 60950-1: 2006 ETSI EN 301489-1 V1.9.2 (2011-09) ETSI EN 301489-14 V1.2.1 (2003-05) ETSI EN 302296 V1.1.1 (2005-01) EN 61000-3-2: 2006 +A1 +A2 EN 61000-3-3: 2008 Reg TP SSB RU 005 Rec.1999/519/EG;

26. BImSchV Einhaltung der grundlegenden Anforderungen auf andere Art und Weise (hierzu verwendete Standards/Spezifikationen):

Autres moyens servant tablir la conformit aux prescriptions fondamentales (normes/spcifications utilises) :

ROHDE & SCHWARZ GmbH & Co. KG Mhldorfstr. 15, D-81671 Mnchen Mnchen, den 26. Oktober 2012 Zentrales Qualittsmanagement GF-QP / Radde Munich, le 2012-10-26 Gestion centrale de la qualit GF-QP / Radde CE D/F-1 Fr Betrieb im Europischen Wirtschaftsraum (EWR) und zivilem Einsatz. Hinweis gem dem Gesetz ber "Funkanlagen und Telekommunikationsend-

einrichtungen" (FTEG) und der Europischen Richtlinie 1999/5/EG:

Dieses Produkt darf innerhalb des EWR nicht uneingeschrnkt betrieben werden, da der verwendete Frequenzbereich auf nicht harmonisierten Bndern erfolgt. Nationale Vorschriften / Genehmigungen sind zu beachten. Das Gert ist 4 Wochen vor Inverkehrbringen bei der jeweils zustndigen nationalen Behrde fr die Frequenzhoheit zu notifizieren. Informationen hierzu im Internet unter folgender Adresse: http://europa.eu.int/comm/enterprise/rtte/spectr.htm For operation in the European Economic Area (EEA) and civil use. Note pursuant to the German Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equip-

ment Directive (FTEG) and the European R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC:

Operation of this product within the EEA is subject to restrictions since the frequency bands used are not harmonised. National provisions / authorizations shall be com-

plied with. The product shall be notified to the competent national frequency management authority four weeks before the product is put on the market. For more information refer to: http://europa.eu.int/comm/enterprise/rtte/spectr.htm Printed in Germany 2101.6093.54

- EU -

D/E-2 Quality management and environmental management Sehr geehrter Kunde, Sie haben sich fr den Kauf eines Rohde & Schwarz Produk-

tes entschieden. Sie erhalten damit ein nach modernsten Fer-

tigungsmethoden hergestelltes Produkt. Es wurde nach den Regeln unserer Qualitts- und Umweltmanagementsysteme entwickelt, gefertigt und geprft. Rohde & Schwarz ist unter ande-

rem nach den Managementsys-

temen ISO 9001 und ISO 14001 zertifiziert. Der Umwelt verpflichtet Energie-effiziente, RoHS-konforme Produkte Kontinuierliche Weiterentwicklung nachhaltiger Umweltkonzepte ISO 14001-zertifiziertes Umweltmanagementsystem Dear customer, You have decided to buy a Rohde & Schwarz product. This product has been manufactured using the most advanced meth-

ods. It was developed, manufac-

tured and tested in compliance with our quality management and environmental manage-

ment systems. Rohde & Schwarz has been certified, for exam-

ple, according to the ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 management systems. Environmental commitment Energy-efficient products Continuous improvement in environmental sustainability ISO 14001-certified environmental management system Certified Quality System ISO 9001 Certified Environmental System ISO 14001 Cher client, Vous avez choisi dacheter un produit Rohde & Schwarz. Vous disposez donc dun produit fabriqu daprs les mthodes les plus avances. Le dvelop-

pement, la fabrication et les tests de ce produit ont t effec-

tus selon nos systmes de management de qualit et de management environnemental. La socit Rohde & Schwarz a t homologue, entre autres, conformment aux systmes de management ISO 9001 et ISO 14001. Engagement cologique Produits efficience nergtique Amlioration continue de la durabilit environnementale Systme de management environnemental certifi selon ISO 14001 1 0

. 5 0 V 1 1

. 0 0 2 0

. 1 7 1 1 1 1 0 0 2 0 1 7 1 1 ISO-Qualitaets-Zertifikat_1171-0200-11_A4.indd 1 28.09.2012 10:25:08 Customer Support Technical support where and when you need it For quick, expert help with any Rohde & Schwarz equipment, contact one of our Customer Support Centers. A team of highly qualified engineers provides telephone support and will work with you to find a solution to your query on any aspect of the operation, programming or applications of Rohde & Schwarz equipment. Up-to-date information and upgrades To keep your instrument up-to-date and to be informed about new application notes related to your instrument, please send an e-mail to the Customer Support Center stating your instrument and your wish. We will take care that you will get the right information. Europe, Africa, Middle East Phone +49 89 4129 12345 customersupport@rohde-schwarz.com Phone 1-888-TEST-RSA (1-888-837-8772) customer.support@rsa.rohde-schwarz.com Phone +1-410-910-7988 customersupport.la@rohde-schwarz.com Phone +65 65 13 04 88 customersupport.asia@rohde-schwarz.com Phone +86-800-810-8228 /

+86-400-650-5896 customersupport.china@rohde-schwarz.com North America Latin America Asia/Pacific China 1171.0200.22-06.00 R&S TMU9 Contents Contents 1 Information about this Manual..............................................................9 2 Safety Instructions...............................................................................11 2.1 Safety Instructions for Transmitter Systems and Equipment................................11 2.2 General Safety Instructions.......................................................................................12 2.2.1 Safety Instructions.........................................................................................................12 2.3 Special Hazard Information........................................................................................19 2.3.1 Hazards from AC Supply Voltage.................................................................................19 2.3.1.1 AC Power Supply..........................................................................................................19 2.3.1.2 Changing Fuses............................................................................................................19 2.3.2 Hazards from HighEnergy Electric Circuits..................................................................19 2.3.3 Hazards from RF Radiation...........................................................................................20 2.3.3.1 Obligation to Instruct Personnel....................................................................................20 2.3.3.2 RF Shielding..................................................................................................................20 2.3.3.3 Rules When Operating an Amplifier..............................................................................20 2.3.3.4 Rules When Working on an Open Amplifier..................................................................21 3 Transmitter System R&S TMU9..........................................................23 3.1 Design and Function R&S TMU9...............................................................................23 3.1.1 Rack Design..................................................................................................................23 3.1.2 Arrangement of the R&S TCE900 Instruments and System Components....................23 3.1.3 Redundancy Concepts..................................................................................................25 3.1.4 Applications...................................................................................................................28 3.1.5 Overview of Modules and Devices................................................................................30 3.1.5.1 Mains Distribution Unit..................................................................................................30 3.1.5.2 Transmitter Control Unit................................................................................................31 3.1.5.3 TSP900 (Transmitter Status Panel)..............................................................................32 3.1.5.4 Exciter and System Components..................................................................................34 3.1.5.5 Output Stage Unit..........................................................................................................34 3.1.5.6 OSKAR Coupler Module...............................................................................................35 3.1.5.7 External Directional Coupler (GD901/902)....................................................................35 3.1.5.8 Bandpass Filter.............................................................................................................35 3.1.5.9 RF Connector................................................................................................................36 System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 3 R&S TMU9 Contents 3.2 3.1.5.10 Parallel Remote Control Interface.................................................................................36 3.1.5.11 Exhaust Kit (optional)....................................................................................................39 3.1.6 Performance Features..................................................................................................40 3.1.7 Power Display and Reflection Monitor..........................................................................41 3.1.8 Specifications................................................................................................................42 3.1.8.1 Transmitter System, General DTV.............................................................................42 3.1.8.2 Requirements for the Output Bandpass Filter...............................................................46 3.1.8.3 Parallel Remote Control Interface.................................................................................50 Installation R&S TMU9................................................................................................50 3.2.1 Equipment Supplied......................................................................................................50 3.2.1.1 Integrated Transmitter Components.............................................................................50 3.2.1.2 Transmitter Components Supplied Separately.............................................................50 3.2.2 Overview of Transmitter Installation..............................................................................51 3.2.2.1 Required Tools..............................................................................................................51 3.2.3 Setting Up the Transmitter............................................................................................52 3.2.3.1 Preparatory Work..........................................................................................................52 3.2.3.2 Setting Up the Transmitter Rack...................................................................................53 3.2.3.3 Aligning the Transmitter Rack.......................................................................................53 3.2.3.4 Bolting the Transmitter Rack to the Floor......................................................................53 3.2.3.5 Removing the Front Panels...........................................................................................53 3.2.3.6 Unpacking the Components..........................................................................................54 Installing the UHF Channel Bandpass Filter.................................................................54 Installing the Amplifier...................................................................................................55 Installing the Power Supply...........................................................................................56 3.2.6.1 General.........................................................................................................................56 3.2.6.2 Connecting the Transmitter Ground..............................................................................57 3.2.6.3 Connecting the Power Cable........................................................................................57 Installing the RF output.................................................................................................59 3.2.7.1 Connecting the Antenna................................................................................................59 3.2.7.2 Connecting the Dummy Antenna..................................................................................59 Installing R&S TCE900 Customer Interfaces................................................................60 Installing the RF Loop...................................................................................................62 3.2.9.1 Single Drive (CAN Bus Adapter)...................................................................................62 3.2.4 3.2.5 3.2.6 3.2.8 3.2.9 3.2.7 System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 4 R&S TMU9 Contents 3.2.9.2 Dual Drive (RF Switch)..................................................................................................63 3.2.10 Installing the TM9-C1 Exhaust Kit.................................................................................63 3.3 Commissioning R&S TMU9........................................................................................65 4 Exciter/Transmitter Control R&S TCE900..........................................67 4.1 Design and Function R&S TCE900............................................................................67 4.1.1 R&S TCE900 General Design.......................................................................................67 4.1.2 R&S TCE900 Functions................................................................................................71 5 Amplifier R&S PMU901........................................................................73 5.1 Design and Function R&S PMU901...........................................................................73 5.1.1 Device Purpose and Overview......................................................................................73 5.1.2 Mechanical Design........................................................................................................74 5.1.3 Display Elements and Interfaces...................................................................................77 5.1.3.1 LEDs and Test Point Front Panel...............................................................................77 5.1.3.2 Connectors Rear Panel..............................................................................................79 5.1.4 Circuit Descriptions.......................................................................................................81 5.1.4.1 Block Diagram...............................................................................................................81 5.1.4.2 Signal Gain in Preamplifier and Driver..........................................................................81 5.1.4.3 Signal Gain in Doherty-Capable Output Stage.............................................................82 5.1.4.4 Power Control...............................................................................................................83 5.1.4.5 SelfProtection Mechanisms..........................................................................................84 5.1.4.6 Emergency Shutdown...................................................................................................86 5.1.5 Specifications................................................................................................................86 5.1.5.1 General Data.................................................................................................................86 5.1.5.2 Digital TV (DTV)............................................................................................................87 5.1.5.3 Analog TV (ATV Combined)..........................................................................................88 5.1.5.4 CW Mode......................................................................................................................88 A R&S TMU9 Interface Description........................................................91 A.1 External Transmitter Interfaces.................................................................................91 A.1.1 Transmitter Input AC.....................................................................................................91 A.1.2 Input Signals (TS, RF, Reference)................................................................................91 A.1.3 Transmitter Output........................................................................................................94 A.1.4 Monitoring Signals (TS, RF, Reference).......................................................................94 System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 5 R&S TMU9 Contents A.1.5 Remote interfaces.........................................................................................................95 Internal Transmitter Interfaces..................................................................................95 A.2 Internal RF Interfaces....................................................................................................95 A.2.1 A.2.2 Internal Ethernet Interfaces...........................................................................................97 A.2.3 Transmitter Control Bus (CAN bus)..............................................................................98 A.2.4 RF Loops.......................................................................................................................98 A.2.5 TSP900 Display Interface..........................................................................................98 A.2.6 TDU900 Display Interfaces (Optional).......................................................................99 A.2.7 Air Cooling Interface (Optional).....................................................................................99 B.1.3 B R&S TCE900 Interface Description...................................................101 Interfaces of Base Unit ............................................................................................101 B.1 B.1.1 X1: MAINS..................................................................................................................101 Interfaces of Main Computer IPS1..............................................................................101 B.1.2 B.1.2.1 X2 LAN REMOTE.......................................................................................................101 B.1.2.2 X14 USB 1..................................................................................................................101 B.1.2.3 X15 USB 2..................................................................................................................102 B.1.2.4 X11 DVI.......................................................................................................................102 Interfaces of System Connection Boards (SCB).........................................................103 B.1.3.1 X3 LAN LOCAL FRONT..............................................................................................103 B.1.3.2 X7 LAN LOCAL REAR................................................................................................103 B.1.3.3 X66 GPS ANTENNA...................................................................................................104 B.1.3.4 X12 TERMINAL SUPPLY...........................................................................................104 B.1.3.5 X6 TX..........................................................................................................................105 B.2 Module Slots..............................................................................................................105 B.2.1 Coder Board................................................................................................................105 B.2.1.1 X30 TS LAN 1.............................................................................................................105 B.2.1.2 X31 TS LAN 2.............................................................................................................106 B.2.1.3 X23 1PPS IN...............................................................................................................106 B.2.1.4 X24 REF MONITOR....................................................................................................106 B.2.1.5 X20 TS1 IN..................................................................................................................107 B.2.1.6 X21 TS2 IN..................................................................................................................107 B.2.1.7 X22 TS MONITOR OUT..............................................................................................107 B.2.2 RF Board.....................................................................................................................107 System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 6 R&S TMU9 Contents B.2.2.1 X64 REF IN.................................................................................................................107 B.2.2.2 X60 RF OUT...............................................................................................................108 B.2.2.3 X61 RF MONITOR OUT.............................................................................................108 B.2.2.4 X67 RF DOWNCONVERTER 1 IN.............................................................................108 B.2.2.5 X68 RF DOWNCONVERTER 2 IN.............................................................................108 B.2.3 Tx Interface.................................................................................................................109 B.2.3.1 X40 LAN 1...................................................................................................................109 B.2.3.2 X41 LAN 2...................................................................................................................109 B.2.3.3 X42 LAN 3...................................................................................................................110 B.2.3.4 X43 LAN 4...................................................................................................................110 B.2.3.5 X44 Power Distributor.................................................................................................111 B.2.3.6 X45 Rf Switch PAR IO................................................................................................112 B.2.4 Cooling Interface (CIF)................................................................................................113 B.2.4.1 X46 Pump...................................................................................................................113 B.2.4.2 X47 HEX.....................................................................................................................114 B.2.5 Air Cooling Interface (Optional)...................................................................................116 B.2.5.1 Connection to Exhaust Fan, Differential Pressure Sensor, X46 FAN1.......................116 B.2.5.2 Connection to Exhaust Fan, Differential Pressure Sensor, X47 FAN2.......................116 C R&S PMU901 Interface Description..................................................119 C.1 X1: Supply Input; Schaltbau M3 connector............................................................119 C.2 X2: RF Output 7/16 - Socket (Rear)..........................................................................120 C.3 X3: RF Test Socket; SMA Female (Front)...............................................................120 C.4 X10: RF Input SMA Female (Rear)...........................................................................120 C.5 X13: Second RF Test Socket for ADE; SMA Female (Rear)..................................121 C.6 X22: Fan Connection 1; 4-pin Molex Connector....................................................121 C.7 X23: Fan Connection 2; 4-pin Molex Connector....................................................121 C.8 X11: Amplifier Control Unit; 15-pin D-Sub connector (rear).................................122 System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 7 R&S TMU9 Contents System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 8 R&S TMU9 Information about this Manual 1 Information about this Manual This manual is part of the documentation for the R&S TMU9 transmitter family from Rohde & Schwarz. The individual manuals for the transmitter family have a modular structure and complement each other. Structure The system manual, which is the central and overarching part of the overall documen-

tation, describes all the steps involved in installing a transmitter. Operation of the transmitter system after installation and the steps required to put the system into operation are described in the operating manual. The service manual describes all maintenance, troubleshooting and service tasks that customers can carry out themselves. At certain points in the transmitter manual, the reader is referred to the appropriate operating manual or service manual. Contents The manuals for the transmitter family describe all activities required for installation, startup, operation, maintenance, troubleshooting and servicing of the transmitter and its component parts. The appendix contains the interface descriptions and the technical documentation. Safety All skilled personnel working with a transmitter or its components have a duty to read the associated manuals and to follow the safety measures described in the section "Safety"

and given at appropriate points in the manual. It must be ensured that the transmitter and the individual components of the transmitter are used only for their intended purpose. All activities connected with the transmitter or individual transmitter components must be carried out by skilled personnel. If activities require additional skills and qualifications, this is indicated at the appropriate points in the manual. Symbols and notation The warning triangle symbol refers the reader to potential hazards. The degree of danger is indicated by different signal words next to the warning symbol. Instructions are given in numbered steps. All other formatting options are intended to improve clarity and are selfexplanatory. System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 9 R&S TMU9 Information about this Manual System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 10 R&S TMU9 Safety Instructions for Transmitter Systems and Equipment Safety Instructions 2 Safety Instructions 2.1 Safety Instructions for Transmitter Systems and Equip-

ment Compliance with safety regulations The safety regulations specified in this manual must always be complied with. The following points require special attention:

Only qualified technicians are allowed to install and wire the electrical equipment. National and international safety rules and regulations must be observed when equipping operating facilities and during the assembly and operation of electrical systems. These include, for example:

Protective measures to prevent accidents Protection against overvoltage Isolation of electrical systems Grounding of electrical systems Physical properties and laying of electrical lines and cables Regulations that apply to factories, work areas and special systems When installing transmitter racks, it is important to observe national accident pre-

vention regulations, for example, with regard to:

Crushing hazard when working beneath suspended loads Fall hazards when working on ladders Risk of injury when lifting heavy loads Personal protective equipment (PPE) must be used when installation or repair work is being carried out. Depending on the type of work, it may be necessary to wear protective clothing such as hard hats, safety gloves, eye protection, etc. Instruments and systems must not be operated unless their cabinets are closed. Observe the appropriate safety instructions when opening cabinets for maintenance or repair work. Isolate all poles when disconnecting instruments and systems from the AC supply. In addition, disconnect all external sources of power, i.e. all measuring cables, exten-

sion cables and multipoint connectors (except for special service connectors). Then wait approx. 5 minutes to ensure that the capacitors in the system are sufficiently discharged. Additional information on liquidcooled transmitters: When installing the cooling sys-

tem and filling it with coolant (pump and heat exchanger), the applicable regulations System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 11 R&S TMU9 Safety Instructions General Safety Instructions on working with hazardous products (coolant) must be observed; see the section

"Material Safety Data Sheets" under "EC Safety Data Sheet Antifrogen". 2.2 General Safety Instructions This section contains general safety instructions applying to all products manufactured or sold by Rohde & Schwarz. In accordance with IEC215 or EN60215, transmitter systems and their add-on equipment must be operated under the responsibility of qualified technicians only. The minimum requirements for qualified electricians are also defined in the standard "Safety require-

ments for radio transmitting equipment". Compliance with all legal and regulatory requirements is a precondition for operating radio equipment and systems. The operator or the operator's authorized representative is responsible for ensuring compliance with these requirements. They must additionally ensure that the training of the operating personnel satisfies the country-specific require-

ments. This includes any periodic training that is necessary. 2.2.1 Safety Instructions It is essential to read and observe the following instructions and safety informa-

tion. All factories and sites of the Rohde & Schwarz company group continuously strive to ensure that our products meet the very latest safety standards and that our customers are provided with the highest possible degree of safety. Our products and any additional equipment that they require are manufactured and tested in accordance with the appli-

cable safety regulations. Our quality assurance department regularly checks if these standards are met. This product has been manufactured and tested in accordance with the enclosed EC Certificate of Conformity and left the factory in a condition fully complying with the relevant safety standards. In order to keep the product in this condition and to ensure that it operates safely, the user must observe all information, warnings and instructions. Please do not hesitate to contact the Rohde & Schwarz company group if you have any queries regarding these safety instructions. Additionally, it is the responsibility of the user to ensure that the product is operated in the appropriate manner. The product is intended for industrial and laboratory use only and, if expressly authorized, also for use in the field, and must never be used in such a way that may result in injury to personnel or damage to property. The user shall be held responsible if the product is used for purposes other than those specified or in such a way that disregards the instructions from the manufacturer. The manufacturer shall not be liable for any consequences resulting from the product being used for purposes other than those for which it is intended. Use of the product for its intended purpose is assumed if the product is used in accord-

ance with the specifications given in the associated product documentation and within its performance limits (see the data sheet, documentation and the following safety instruc-

System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 12 R&S TMU9 Safety Instructions General Safety Instructions tions). Use of the product requires specialist knowledge and, in part, knowledge of the English language. It is therefore important to ensure that the product is operated only by specialist personnel and persons with the appropriate skills who have received detailed instruction in how to operate the product. If personnel protective equipment is required for the operation of Rohde & Schwarz products, this is indicated at the appropriate point in the product documentation. Keep the basic safety instructions and product documen-

tation in a safe place and pass them on to subsequent users of the product. Observance of the safety instructions is intended to prevent injury or damage resulting from hazards of all types. It is therefore necessary that intended users carefully read and understand the following safety instructions before and during use of the product. It is also essential to observe all other safety instructions (e.g. relating to personnel protection) which are given at appropriate points in the product documentation. In these safety instructions, the term "product" refers to all articles sold and marketed by the Rohde & Schwarz company group; these include instruments, installations and all acces-

sory items. Signal words and their meaning The following signal words are used in the product documentation to warn of risks and hazards. indicates an immediate high-risk hazard which will result in death or serious injury if it is not avoided. indicates a potential medium-risk hazard which can result in death or (serious) injury if it is not avoided. indicates a low-risk hazard which could result in minor or medium injury if it is not avoided. indicates possible incorrect operation which could result in damage to the product. These signal words correspond to the definitions customary in the European Economic Area for civil applications. In addition to this definition, there may also be varying defini-

tions used in other economic areas or for military applications. It is therefore important to note that the signal words described here are used only in connection with the associated product documentation and the associated product. The use of signal words in connection System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 13 R&S TMU9 Safety Instructions General Safety Instructions with non-associated products or non-associated documentation can lead to incorrect interpretation and thus result in injury and damage. Operating conditions, positions and locations The product should only be operated in the operating conditions, positions and locations specified by the manufacturer such that ventilation is not obstructed. Non-observance of the manufacturer specifications can result in electric shock, fire and/or serious or (under certain circumstances) fatal injury. All work must be performed in compliance with the local or country-specific safety and accident prevention regulations. 1. Unless otherwise agreed, the following points apply for Rohde & Schwarz products:

a) Operating position: housing base at bottom b) IP degree of protection: 2 x USB 2.0 for connecting an external mouse, keyboard, USB stick, etc. c) Degree of soiling: 2 d) Overvoltage category: 2 e) For indoor use only f) Operation up to 2000 m above sea level g) Transport up to 4500 m above sea level h) Tolerance for nominal voltage: 10 %

i) Tolerance for nominal frequency: 5 %

2. Do not stand the product on surfaces, vehicles, shelves or tables that are not suitable for weight or stability reasons. When mounting and securing the product on/to objects or structures (e.g. walls and shelves), always follow the installation instructions from the manufacturer. Persons can be injured or even killed if installation is not performed in the way described in the product documentation. 3. Do not place the product on appliances that generate heat (e.g. radiators and fan heaters). The ambient temperature must not exceed the maximum temperature specified in the product documentation or in the data sheet. Overheating of the prod-

uct can result in electric shock, fire and/or serious or (under certain circumstances) fatal injury. Electrical safety Non-observance or inadequate observance of the instructions concerning electrical safety can result in electric shock, fire and/or serious or (under certain circumstances) fatal injury. 1. Before switching on the product, always make sure that the nominal voltage set at the product matches the nominal AC voltage of power supply network. If it is neces-

sary to change the voltage setting, it may also be necessary to change the associated AC supply fuse of the product. 2. In the case of products of protection class I with movable power supply line and plug connector, operation is only permitted at sockets with protective contact and con-

nected PE conductor. System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 14 R&S TMU9 Safety Instructions General Safety Instructions 3. Any deliberate interruption of the PE conductor (both along the feed line and at the product itself) is not permitted. This can result in a potential shock hazard at the product. If extension cables or multipoint connectors are used, it must be ensured that their safety is checked at regular intervals. 4. If the product is not equipped with a power switch to disconnect it from the power supply, the plug on the connecting cable must be used to disconnect the power sup-

ply. In such cases, it must be ensured that the power plug is easily reachable and accessible at all times (length of connecting cable approx. 2 m). Function switches or electronic switches are not suitable for disconnecting the product from the power supply. If products without power switch are integrated in racks or systems, the dis-

connecting device must be provided at system level. 5. Never use the product if the power cable is damaged. Check at regular intervals that the power cable is in perfect condition. Take suitable precautions and use suitable cable installation methods to ensure that the power cable cannot be damaged and personnel cannot be injured (e.g. as a result of electric shock or tripping over cables). 6. Operation is only permitted in TN/TT supply networks which are fuse-protected with max. 16 A (higher fuse ratings should only be used after consultation with the Rohde & Schwarz company group). 7. Do not insert the plug into dusty or dirty sockets. Insert the plug firmly and completely into the sockets provided. Disregard of these points can lead to sparks, fire and/or injury. 8. Do not overload the sockets, extension cables or multipoint connectors as this can 9. cause fire or electric shocks. In the case of measurements in electrical circuits with voltages Urms > 30 V, appro-

priate measures must be taken to avoid all hazards (e.g. suitable measuring equip-

ment, fuse protection, current limiting, electrical separation, insulation, etc.). 10. In the case of connections to IT equipment (e.g. PCs or industrial computers), it must be ensured that such connections satisfy the applicable IEC609501/EN609501 or IEC610101/EN610101. 11. Unless explicitly permitted, never remove the cover or any part of the housing while the product is in operation. Electrical lines and components will otherwise be exposed, which can lead to injury, fire or damage to the product. 12. If the product is connected at a fixed location, the connection between the onsite PE conductor connection and the instrument PE conductor must be set up before any other connections are made. Installation and connection should only be performed by an electrician. 13. In the case of permanently installed equipment without builtin fuses, circuit breakers or similar protective devices, the supply circuit must be fused in such a way that personnel who have access to the product, as well as the product itself, are ade-

quately protected. System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 15 R&S TMU9 Safety Instructions General Safety Instructions 14. Every product must be protected against overvoltage (e.g. as a result of a lightning strike) by means of appropriate overvoltage protection. The operating personnel are otherwise at risk of electric shock. 15. Foreign objects must not be inserted into the openings of the housing. This can cause short circuits in the product and/or electric shocks, fire or injury. 16. Unless otherwise specified, products are not protected against the penetration of fluids; see also the section "Operating conditions, positions and locations", point 1. The instruments must therefore be protected against the penetration of fluids. If this point is disregarded, there is a risk of electric shock for the user or of damage to the product, which in turn can also endanger personnel. 17. Do not use the product under conditions in which condensation could occur (or may already have occurred) in or on the product, e.g. if the product has been moved from a cold environment into a warm environment. Water penetration increases the risk of electric shock. 18. Before cleaning the product, fully disconnect it from the power supply (e.g. power supply network or battery). Clean instruments using a soft, lint-free dust cloth. Never use chemical cleaning agents such as alcohol, acetone or cellulose thinner. Operation 1. Use of the product requires special instruction and full concentration during use. It must be ensured that persons who operate the product are fit to do so from a physical, intellectual and mental viewpoint, otherwise there is a risk of injury or damage. It is the responsibility of the employer/operator to select suitable personnel to use the product. 2. Before moving or transporting the product, read and observe the information in the section "Transport" on page 18. 3. As with all industrially manufactured goods, it is not possible to completely rule out the use of materials which cause allergies, i.e. "allergens" (e.g. nickel). If, when using Rohde & Schwarz products, allergic reactions occur (e.g. skin rash, frequent sneez-

ing, red eyes or respiratory problems), consult a doctor immediately in order to deter-

mine the cause and to prevent health problems. 4. Before mechanically and/or thermally processing or dismantling the product, it is essential to refer to the section "Disposal" on page 18, point 1. 5. Owing to the inherent functional design of certain products (e.g. RF radio systems), increased electromagnetic radiation may be produced. In order to protect unborn life, pregnant women must be protected by means of suitable measures. Electromagnetic radiation also poses a risk to persons with pacemakers. The employer/operator is obliged to assess and identify workplaces where there is a particular risk of exposure to radiation, and to take precautions to prevent potential hazards. System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 16 R&S TMU9 Safety Instructions General Safety Instructions 6. 7. In the event of fire, toxic substances (gases, fluids, etc.) can be discharged from the product and damage the health of personnel. If a fire occurs, appropriate measures must therefore be taken (e.g. breathing masks and protective clothing). If a laser product is integrated in an Rohde & Schwarz product (e.g. CD/DVD drive), no settings or functions other than those described in the product documentation should be used in order to prevent injury (e.g. from the laser beam). Repair and servicing 1. The product should be opened by authorized specialist personnel only. Before any work is performed on the product or before the product is opened, it must be discon-

nected from the supply voltage, otherwise there is a risk of electric shock. 2. Any adjustments, part replacements, maintenance or repairs should be carried out only by authorized Rohde & Schwarz electricians. If safetyrelevant parts (e.g. power switches, power transformers or fuses) are to be changed, they must always be replaced with original parts. A safety check must be performed after safetyrelevant parts have been replaced (visual inspection, PE conductor test, insulation resistance measurement, leaking current measurement, functional check). This ensures that the product remains safe to use. Batteries and rechargeable batteries/cells Non-observance or inadequate observance of the instructions concerning electrical safety can result in electric shock, fire and/or serious or (under certain circumstances) fatal injury.Batteries and rechargeable batteries with alkaline electrolyte (e.g. lithium cells) must be handled in line with EN62133. 1. Cells must not be disassembled, opened or crushed. 2. Lithium batteries must not be exposed to high temperatures or fire. Do not store or place batteries in direct sunlight. Keep cells and batteries clean and dry. Clean dirty terminals using a dry, clean cloth. 3. Cells and batteries must not be short-circuited. Cells and batteries must not be stored in a potentially hazardous manner in a box or drawer where they can short-circuit each other or can be short-circuited by other conductive materials. A cell or battery should only be taken out of its original packaging when it is to be used. 4. Keep cells and batteries out of the reach of children. If a cell or battery has been swallowed, seek medical assistance immediately. 5. Do not subject cells and batteries to severe mechanical jolts or impacts. 6. If a cell is leaking, do not allow the fluid to come into contact with the skin or eyes. If the fluid does come into contact with the skin or eyes, wash the affected area with plenty of water and seek medical assistance. 7. There is a risk of explosion if cells or batteries containing alkaline electrolyte (e.g. lithium cells) are replaced or charged incorrectly. To ensure that the product remains System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 17 R&S TMU9 Safety Instructions General Safety Instructions safe to use, always replace cells or batteries with the appropriate R&S type (see the replacement parts list). 8. Cells or batteries must be recycled and must not be disposed of with residual waste. Rechargeable batteries or batteries containing lead, mercury or cadmium must be disposed of as special waste. Observe the countryspecific disposal and recycling regulations. Transport 1. The product can be extremely heavy. It must therefore be moved and transported carefully and, if necessary, using suitable lifting gear (e.g. lift truck) in order to prevent injuries to the back and other parts of the body. 2. Handles on the products are handling aids which are only intended for persons trans-

porting the product. The handles are not to be used for securing the product to or on transport equipment (e.g. cranes, forklift trucks, carts, etc.). It is your responsibility to ensure that the products are attached securely to or on suitable transport or lifting equipment. Observe the safety regulations from the manufacturer of the used trans-

port or lifting equipment in order prevent injury to personnel and damage to the prod-

uct. 3. If you use the product in a vehicle, it is the responsibility of the driver to drive the vehicle in a safe and appropriate manner. The manufacturer shall not be liable for accidents or collisions. Never use the product in moving vehicle if there is a risk that this could distract the vehicle driver. Make sure that the product is adequately secured in order to prevent injury or further damage in the event of an accident. Disposal 1. 2. If products or their components are processed mechanically and/or thermally beyond the scope of the operating conditions for which they were intended, hazardous mate-

rials (dust containing heavy metals such as lead, beryllium, nickel) can be released. The product should therefore be dismantled by specially trained personnel only. Incorrect dismantling can cause damage to health. The national regulations con-

cerning disposal must be observed. If, when handling the product, hazardous materials or operating fluids are encoun-

tered which must be disposed of separately (e.g. coolant or engine oils that have to be changed at regular intervals), the safety instructions from the manufacturer of these hazardous materials and operating fluids, and the applicable local disposal regulations must be observed. Also observe any additional relevant safety instruc-

tions in the product documentation. Incorrect disposal of hazardous materials or operating fluids can result in damage to health and the environment. System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 18 R&S TMU9 Safety Instructions Special Hazard Information 2.3 Special Hazard Information 2.3.1 Hazards from AC Supply Voltage All voltages of Urms > 30 V AC or U > 60 V DC must be regarded as constituting a shock hazard. When working with voltages that constitute a shock hazard, appropriate meas-

ures must be taken to prevent exposure to danger. Never work on live components. Work on live parts should only be performed in exceptional cases and only if special safety precautions are taken. 2.3.1.1 AC Power Supply Before connecting the AC power supply, it is important to ensure that the power sup-

ply specifications given for the system or instruments match the nominal specifica-

tions for the local power supply network. The power supply circuit must be protected by means of fuses in order to prevent overloads and short circuits. Miniature modules have neutral conductor fuses. As a result, the power supply may still be connected even after interruption of the circuit by a fuse. 2.3.1.2 Changing Fuses Fuses which are accessible to the operator should only be changed after the instru-

ments have been disconnected from the power supply. They must always be replaced with fuses that have the same electrical rating, tripping characteristics and breaking capacity. Motor protection switches and automatic line fuses in those parts of a transmitter system that can be accessed by users must be tripped. If their response range is adjustable, the exfactory setting must not be altered. If settings are changed inad-

vertently, the correct values specified in this documentation must be set. 2.3.2 Hazards from HighEnergy Electric Circuits The instruments contain low-voltage circuits that can be fed from a voltage source with an extremely low impedance (e.g. amplifier operating voltage). These circuits carry dan-

gerously high levels of energy. At Rohde & Schwarz, we treat these circuits in the same way as circuits with hazardous contact voltages. Normally, these circuits are protected by covers to prevent unintentional contact. The cover has a warning label. In practice it has been repeatedly shown that short circuits caused by small metallic tools result in severe burns. For safety reasons, any highenergy electric circuits in areas of the equipment that can be accessed by users are concealed by protective covers. Exercise the same amount of caution for measurements on lowimpedance voltages

(e.g. for repair purposes) that you would when performing measurements on oper-

ating voltages which constitute a shock hazard. Wear suitable protective gear when necessary. System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 19 R&S TMU9 Safety Instructions Special Hazard Information Before opening any equipment or removing a particular cover, turn off the power supply and wait 5 minutes to ensure that capacitors have discharged sufficiently. Do not discharge capacitors by shortcircuiting them. 2.3.3 Hazards from RF Radiation 2.3.3.1 Obligation to Instruct Personnel The operator must train all personnel in the operation of this transmitter or instrument in line with EN60215 and/or IEC215. It is essential that these regular training sessions emphasize the dangers related to high frequency that exist at the respective trans-

mitter or instrument. Operating personnel are only authorized to adjust and operate the equipment after they have completed the respective training sessions and their participation has been documented. Highenergy RF circuits inside the transmitter or instrument are routed via conventional removable RF connectors (e.g. type N). Depending on the output power, the output ports of the transmitter and instrument are equipped with screw-type or plug-in RF lines or ducts. If RF lines or modules carry high power, the connection point or the entire module is tagged with the general danger warning label (yellow triangle with a black exclamation mark). 2.3.3.2 RF Shielding Transmitters and instruments from Rohde & Schwarz are shielded so that even in the immediate vicinity there is no danger from RF radiation when all RF lines are connected. This applies to statutory provisions in Germany, i.e. the regulation concerning electro-

magnetic fields:

Limits for electrical and magnetic field strengths of highfrequency installations are defined in the 26th ordinance of the German Federal Government's Emission Control Act of December 16, 1996 (26. BImSchV). 2.3.3.3 Rules When Operating an Amplifier Disconnecting RF lines that are in operation can result in arcs. These can cause burns and eye injuries. Operation of the amplifier is only permitted if a main or dummy antenna is connected Never disconnect RF lines when the amplifier is in operation Never open the amplifier or modules when the amplifier is in operation Never operate the amplifier if RF lines are exposed System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 20 R&S TMU9 Safety Instructions Special Hazard Information 2.3.3.4 Rules When Working on an Open Amplifier Operation with RF power is not permitted if the instrument has been opened or covers have been removed. System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 21 R&S TMU9 Safety Instructions Special Hazard Information System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 22 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Design and Function R&S TMU9 3 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 3.1 Design and Function R&S TMU9 The TV transmitters of the R&S TMU9 transmitter family support the following standards. With DTV operation:

DVB-T/H DVBT2 ATSC/ATSC Mobile ISDBTB This manual describes the TV transmitters of the R&S TMU9 transmitter family, which support the DVB-T/H, DVB-T2, ATSC and ISDBTB standards. 3.1.1 Rack Design The air-cooled transmitters of the R&S TMU9 series are designed as rack transmitters. The exciters (TCE900 exciter) and the transmitter control units (TCE900 SystemControl for MultiTx, N+1, and dual drive) are each installed horizontally above their associated output stages. When partially and fully equipped, the power distribution with main switches is on the bottom of the front. Installing customer instruments in the upper part of the rack is an option, depending on the transmitter configuration. A maximum of 6 power amplifiers (3.5 RU) can be installed in a rack, depending on the configuration. The output stage of a single transmitter can contain up to 5 power ampli-

fiers. 3.1.2 Arrangement of the R&S TCE900 Instruments and System Compo-

nents The R&S TCE900 instruments are always arranged according to the same rules for all applications. On top of the rack there are 1 to 3 optional customer rackmounts (depending on the configuration), followed by the TCE900-SystemControl or the TDU900 display unit.. The rackmounts for the TCE900 units and the amplifiers of a transmitter are under the TDU900 display unit (required for MultiTx and N+1 transmitter systems, otherwise optional). One to three TCE900 units per transmitter are required, depending on the system (single drive, dual drive, backup drive). System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 23 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Design and Function R&S TMU9 In the following, different examples of transmitters with maximum configuration are dis-

played. Fig. 3-1: TMU 9 Multi Tx single drive with six transmitters. System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 24 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Design and Function R&S TMU9 Fig. 3-2: TMU9 Multi Tx dual drive with five transmitters. 3.1.3 Redundancy Concepts Single transmitter (single drive) This simplest variant for medium-power transmitters consists of an exciter (R&S TCE900-

Exciter) and an output stage. The redundancy in this transmitter type is exclusively in the output stage, which can consist of n amplifiers (n = max. of 5 per rack). System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 25 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Design and Function R&S TMU9 Fig. 3-3: Single Drive - block diagram. Dual drive This variant of a dual-drive transmitter consists of a transmitter control unit (R&S TCE900-

SystemControl), two exciters (R&S TCE900 exciter), an exciter switch, and an output stage. If one of the exciters fails, the transmitter control unit uses the exciter switch auto-

matic to switch to the second exciter via moving the exciter switch. The redundancy properties of the output stage correspond to those of a single transmitter. One rack from the R&S TMU9 series offers space for a maximum of five transmitters as a dual-drive solution. System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 26 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Design and Function R&S TMU9 Fig. 3-4: Dual Drive - block diagram Backup drive This variant of a dual-drive transmitter consists of 2 exciters (R&S TCE900 exciter) with various functions, an exciter switch, and an output stage. In contrast to the dual-drive solution, with the backup drive a TCE900-System Control is not necessary. By default, the program exciter (R&S TCE900 program exciter) is connected to the output stage and supplies the modulation signal. The control exciter (R&S TCE900 control exciter) moni-

tors the program exciter and switches to the output stage if the program exciter fails. A rack of the R&S TMU9 series offers space for a maximum of 5 transmitters as a backup drive solution. System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 27 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Design and Function R&S TMU9 Fig. 3-5: Backup drive block diagram. 3.1.4 Applications MultiTx transmitters can be combined with any kind of redundancy. Consequently, how-

ever, the possible maximum number of transmitters in a rack decreases. Theoretically possible structure in the rack:

Transmitter type Single transmitter Dual drive N+1 per rack 6 single transmitters (with one amplifier for each transmitter) 5 transmitters with dual drive (with one amplifier for each transmitter) 4 + 1 system (with one amplifier for each transmitter) A rack of the R&S TMU9 series offers space for a maximum of 6 single transmitters, each with one amplifier. Transmitter constellation with MultiTx systems The MultiTx application presupposes a combination of similar transmitters. In this case, there are different options:

MultiTx transmitter with 1 amplifier / Tx System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 28 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Design and Function R&S TMU9 Up to 6 single transmitters can be integrated for each rack. Up to 5 dual drives can be installed for each rack. MultiTx transmitters each with 2 amplifiers / Tx Up to 3 single transmitters can be integrated for each rack. Up to 3 dual drives can be installed for each rack. Fig. 3-6: MultiTx transmitters, each with 2 amplifiers per transmitter.

= Transmitters 1 to 3 Tx Amp x = Amplifiers 1 to 2 per transmitter MultiTx transmitters each with 3 amplifiers / Tx Up to 2 single transmitters can be integrated for each rack. Up to 2 dual drives can be installed for each rack. Fig. 3-7: MultiTx transmitters, each with 3 amplifiers per transmitter.

= Transmitters 1 to 2 Tx Amp x = Amplifiers 1 to 3 per transmitter MultiTx transmitters each with 4 or 5 amplifiers / Tx A single drive transmitter, dual drive transmitter system, or backup drive transmitter sys-

tem can be installed. System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 29 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Design and Function R&S TMU9 Fig. 3-8: MultiTx transmitters each with 4 or 5 amplifiers per transmitter.

= Transmitter 1 Tx Amp x = Amplifiers 1 to 4 or 5 per transmitter 3.1.5 Overview of Modules and Devices 3.1.5.1 Mains Distribution Unit Design The R&S ZR900Z10 mains distribution unit is designed as a 19" rackmount and serves to provide power and safeguard various devices such as amplifiers, transmitter control units, etc. The mains distribution unit consists of the following modules or components:

Main switch Q1 Circuit breakers F1 to F20 Overvoltage protection A101 Network access terminal X1 4 terminals for auxiliary contacts (optional) Network output terminal X2 Characteristics The variant of the ZR900Z10 mains distribution unit implemented until now is Var. 21. Characteristics Supply voltage Main switch Q1 designed for Protective contacts (optional) designed for Protection Var. 21

(2600.1370.21) 230 V: L1, L2, or L3 to N max. 63 A max. 10 A Single-pole circuit breakers F1 to F6: 20 A Single-pole circuit breakers F7 to F20: 6 A System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 30 R&S TMU9 Characteristics Overvoltage protection A101 Connectors for Function See circuit diagram 2600.1370.01 S. Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Design and Function R&S TMU9 Var. 21

(2600.1370.21) One overvoltage arrester for each of L1, L2, L3, and N max. 20 devices The supply voltage is routed to network access terminal X1 with three phases (L1, L2, L3, N). As an option, the two-pin switches can also be connected with the auxiliary con-

tacts (each 1 phase and N). The individual phases are routed from X1 to main switch Q1 via cable W1E. Q1 enables the total load to be switched on and off at all poles. The voltage is routed with three phases from Q1 to overvoltage protection A101, which contains one overvoltage arrester for each phase. Any overvoltage is diverted via W1T and X1.PE to PE. Via W1T, the individual phases L1, L2, and L3 are each routed to circuit breakers F1 to F20, so that 230 V are present there with respect to N. The outputs of the circuit breakers are connected to output terminal strip X2 via cables W2A, W3A, and W3B. A max. of 20 loads are connected to X2. Thus each load is protected against overcurrent by a circuit breaker. Circuit breakers F1 to F6 trigger at 20 A and serve to protect the amplifiers. Circuit breakers F7 to F20 trigger at 6 A and serve to protect the TCEs, the fans of an exhaust kit (optional), or any customer instruments. Standby power supply (with amplifiers) If an optional standby power supply is installed for an amplifier, the main and standby power supplies operate in parallel, each at half power. If one of the two power supplies drops out, the functional one operates as the power supply at full power. Amplifiers not including a standby power supply are connected to L, N, and PE (network output terminal X2) using a 3-wire cable. When using a standby power supply, a 5-wire cable is used to connect to L1, L2, N1, N2, and PL1, since now the main and standby power supplies are protected by a separate circuit breaker. 3.1.5.2 Transmitter Control Unit The transmitter control unit contains the following components:

R&S TCE900 SysCtrl The transmitter control unit is responsible for both internal and external communications, including all control functions. System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 31 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Design and Function R&S TMU9 The current status of the transmitter system can optionally be shown on a straightforward color display via the R&S TDU900. 3.1.5.3 TSP900 (Transmitter Status Panel) The TSP900 allows local operation of a transmitter. One TSP900 is allocated to each transmitter (single drive, dual drive, backup drive) and is fastened to the front panel of the respective transmitter. Fig. 3-9: TSP900 (Transmitter Status Panel) For single drive, dual drive, and backup drive transmitters with optional TDU900, the TSP900 (keys and LEDs) are active in parallel with the TDU900. For N+1 and MultiTx transmitters, each individual transmitter has a separate TSP900, which enables local operation of the single transmitter. Meaning of the LEDs OK (green) Warning (orange) Fault (red) Input Single drive Backup drive Dual drive Transmitter all OK Transmitter all OK Transmitter all OK Warning for trans-

mitter Warning for transmitter Warning for trans-

mitter Fault for transmit-

ter Fault for transmit-

ter Fault for transmit-

ter OK W F Sum input status of the exciter is OK Sum input status of the active exciter is OK [2]

Sum input status of the active exciter is OK [2]

Sum input status of the exciter has a Warning Sum input status of the active exciter has a Warning [2]

Sum input status of the active exciter has a Warning [2]

Sum input status of the exciter has a Fail Sum input status of the active exciter has a Fail

[2]

Sum input status of the active exciter has a Fail

[2]

System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 32 R&S TMU9 Reference RF Local On OK W F Off OK W F Off Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Design and Function R&S TMU9 Sum reference of the exciter is OK Sum reference of the active exciter is OK [3]

Sum reference of the active exciter is OK [3]

Sum reference of the exciter has a Warning Sum reference of the active exciter has a Warning [3]

Sum reference of the active exciter has a Warning [3]

Sum reference of the exciter has a Fail Sum reference of the active exciter has a Fail [3]

Sum reference of the active exciter has a Fail [3]

Reference signal

(10 MHz/ PPS/

GPS) is not present and is not required, since frequency regula-

tion source is set to "Manual"

Reference signal

(10 MHz/ PPS/

GPS) for the active exciter is not present and is not required, since frequency regulation source is set to "Manual"

Reference signal

(10 MHz/ PPS/

GPS) for the active exciter is not present and is not required, since frequency regula-

tion source is set to "Manual"

Transmitter RF OK Transmitter RF OK Transmitter RF OK Transmitter RF Warning Transmitter RF Warning Transmitter RF Warning Transmitter RF Fail [1]

Transmitter RF Fail [1]

Transmitter RF Fail [1]

Transmitter pro-

gram off Transmitter pro-

gram off Transmitter pro-

gram off Transmitter Local/Remote LED shows the Local status (yel-

low) Transmitter On

(ON/OFF com-

mand accepted by the transmit-

ter) Transmitter Local/Remote

(applies for pro-

gram and control exciter) LED shows the Local status (yel-

low) Transmitter On

(ON/OFF com-

mand accepted by the transmit-

ter) Transmitter Local/

Remote (applies for Tx control, exciter A and exciter B) LED shows the Local status (yel-

low) Transmitter On

(ON/OFF com-

mand accepted by the transmitter)

[1] Special case: Saved RF Fail for (switched over and) switched off transmitter

[2] If an exciter switchover called up by an incorrect input feed already took place, the faulty input feed to the switched-over exciter cannot be identified by the input LED. Instead, only a transmitter sum warning is displayed for the exciter automatic switchover function.

[3] If an exciter switchover called up by an incorrect reference feed already took place, the faulty reference feed to the switched-over exciter cannot be identified by the REF-

System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 33 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Design and Function R&S TMU9 ERENCE LED. Instead, only a transmitter sum warning is displayed for the exciter auto-

matic switchover function. 3.1.5.4 Exciter and System Components The exciter consists of the following components:

Exciter Exciter switch (for exciter standby only) CAN bus adapter (for single drive only) TS distributor (optional) Exciter The R&S TCE900 exciter performs all signal processing from the audio/video input signal or transport stream signal up to an RF output signal that complies with the relevant standards. For additional information, refer to the TCE900 instrument manual. Exciter Switch With dual-drive transmitters (dual drive), the exciter switch switches to the standby exciter in the following cases:

If the main exciter malfunctions If there is a manual switchover via the R&S TCE900 SysCtrl The exciter switch is controlled by the exciter switch automatic, which is operating on both TCE900-Exciters redundant, CAN Bus Adapter The CAN adapter is required for communication between the individual system compo-

nents (output stage and CAN bus-capable test point) and the transmitter control unit (for single drive only). TS Distributor The transport stream (TS) distributor distributes the input signal to the respective exciter

(for dual drive only). 3.1.5.5 Output Stage Unit The air-cooled R&S PMU901 amplifier is a broadband unit that operates as a power amplifier in the frequency range from 470 MHz to 862 MHz with the following TV stand-

ards:

Digital (DTV) standards: DVB-T/H, DVB-T2, ATSC, ATSC Mobile, ISDBTB Analog (ATV) standards: ATVc (combined) B/G, D/K, K1, I, I1 System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 34 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Design and Function R&S TMU9 For additional information, refer to chapter 5.1, "Design and Function R&S PMU901", on page 73. 3.1.5.6 OSKAR Coupler Module The acronym OSKAR stands for harmonics filter, splitter, coupler, absorber, and direc-

tional coupler (Oberwellenfilter, Splitter, Koppler, Absorber, Richtkoppler). The OSKAR coupler module is a complete functional unit with the following functions:

RF signal distribution (splitter) RF signal combination (coupler) Cooling system of the coupler and the load compensation resistors by arranging the coupler in the exhaust air flow of the amplifier Integrated harmonics filter for either band IV or band V Three directional coupler test points as separate sensors:

CAN bus-capable test point (forward/reflected power), frequency response-com-

pensated ADE test point (forward/reflected power) Free test point (forward/reflected power, optional) The directivity of the test points is at 34 dB. Depending on how many amplifier output signals are to be combined, the following four different coupler versions can be used. 2-way coupler/splitter for an output stage with 2 power amplifiers 3-way coupler/splitter for an output stage with 3 power amplifiers 4-way coupler/splitter for an output stage with 4 power amplifiers 5-way coupler/splitter for an output stage with 5 power amplifiers 3.1.5.7 External Directional Coupler (GD901/902) An external directional coupler can be used to measure the transmitter output power for transmitters with an amplifier. You can select either the GD901 or the GD902 with one or two measurement connections for the forward and reflected power (connection to main line 7-16). 3.1.5.8 Bandpass Filter A UHF channel bandpass filter is provided downstream of the amplifiers to reduce out-

of-band interference. In the signal path, the bandpass filter is located before the har-

monics filter. System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 35 R&S TMU9 3.1.5.9 RF Connector Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Design and Function R&S TMU9 The RF connector (EIA flange) is on the transmitter roof (alternatively, it can also be located at the base of the transmitter). The size (diameter) of the RF connector is 1 5/8". 3.1.5.10 Parallel Remote Control Interface The parallel remote control interface is used to operate the transmitter from a remote location via parallel wire connections (not a computer interface). You can use a remote operator position to issue commands (ON, OFF, etc.) or to receive messages from the transmitter, such as status messages (TRANSMITTER ON). Custom Interfaces No. X101A X101B Designation Type Connection Remarks Commands to transmitter 25-pin D-Sub socket Command line X201A X201B Messages from transmitter 25-pin D-Sub plug Relay outputs The module has optocoupler inputs floating with respect to 0 V. 0V floating is applied to pin 24 and 25. (as per command line) Commands 1 to 16 to X101A pin 1 to 16 Commands 17 to 32 to X101B pin 1 to 16 The module has normally-open (NO) contacts or double-

throw (DT) contacts for messages. Messages 1 to 9 and 76 are applied to X201A. Messages 10 to 18 and 77 are applied to X201B. NO contacts are available for mes-

sage 1 to 6 and 10 to 15; all others have DT contacts. System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 36 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Design and Function R&S TMU9 No. X203A X203B X205A X205B Designation Type Connection Remarks Messages from transmitter 25-pin D-Sub plug Relay outputs Messages 25-pin D-Sub plug Relay outputs X207A X207B Messages 25-pin D-Sub plug Relay outputs The module has normally-open (NO) contacts or double-

throw (DT) contacts for messages. Messages 19 to 24 and 78 are applied to X203A. Messages 28 to 33 and 79 are applied to X203B. NO contacts are available for mes-

sage 19 to 24 and 28 to 33; all others have DT contacts. The module has normally-open (NO) contacts or double-

throw (DT) contacts for messages. Messages 37 to 46 are applied to X205A. Messages 47 to 56 are applied to X205B. NO contacts are available for mes-

sage 37 to 42 and 47 to 52; all others have DT contacts. The module has normally-open (NO) contacts or double-

throw (DT) contacts for messages. Messages 57 to 66 are applied to X207A. Messages 67 to 80 are applied to X205B. NO contacts are available for mes-

sage 57 to 66 and 67 to 72; all others have DT contacts. Connectors for Connecting Remote Control Equipment Special "D-Sub tandem connectors" are used. Possible designations for an X201 con-

nector are X201A and X201B. System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 37 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Design and Function R&S TMU9 The designation of the connector pin indicates the respective half of the tandem con-

nector. Example: Command 1 is applied to connector X101, pin 1A. The command can be input at connector pin 1 of connector 101A. Command Inputs All command inputs are operated via optocouplers with a floating supply voltage that is generated on the module. A command input becomes active by means of a connection to the common command line. Both continuous signals and pulse signals are permitted. With pulse signals, a minimum pulse length of 100 ms must be ensured. With continuous operation, the signal which became active last is rejected in the case of mutually exclusive signals. Example: The TRANSMITTER ON command is valid and the TRANSMITTER OFF com-

mand is issued. The TRANSMITTER OFF command stays invalid for as long as the first ON command is active. The command inputs are distributed between two 25-pin D-Sub sockets (X101A, X101B). Message Outputs All message outputs are implemented by means of floating relay contacts. A message is valid when the contact is in its closed state. Normally-open (NO) contacts and, to a limited extent, normally-closed (NC) contacts are available for this purpose. Relays with bistable switching characteristics are reserved for the local/remote messages of the correspond-

ing function groups. The module can be used universally for FM, DAB, and TV transmitters. It contains the consecutively numbered commands COMMAND1 to COMMAND32 and the consec-

utively numbered message outputs MESSAGE1 to MESSAGE80. Assignment to Transmitter Functions The messages or commands are assigned to the transmitter functions according to the used configuration via a routing program stored in the higher-level control unit. During the configuration phase, this program assigns the command inputs and message outputs their logical meaning according to the functional use of the module. Communication between Remote Control Interface and Transmitter Data is exchanged with the R&S TCE900 SysCtrl unit via an internal CAN bus. The transmitter control unit also provides the operating voltage for the remote control inter-

face. CAN Bus The remote control interface has an internal 9-pin CAN bus D-Sub plug X1 and a 9-pin CAN bus D-Sub socket X11. The module receives its power supply (+12V) via the CAN bus plug X1. System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 38 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Design and Function R&S TMU9 Single Transmitter and Standby System In a single transmitter, the remote control interface is directly connected to the TCE900 SysCtrl via the CAN bus plug X1. The X11 socket remains free. In standby systems, the CAN bus is connected to further n+1 modules via X11. 3.1.5.11 Exhaust Kit (optional) The exhaust kit allows the transmitter to be connected to a central ventillation system at the transmitter station or for the hot air from the transmitter to be vented directly outside. Two differential pressure sensors (1) are used to measure the pressure inside the frame enclosure with reference to the outside air pressure. Through the ACIF of the TCF, the RPM of the two fans (2) are regulated with the aim of maintaining normal air pressure within the enclosed frame. Fig. 3-10: Mutli Tx transmitter with exhaust kit 1 = Differential pressure sensors 2 = Fans System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 39 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Design and Function R&S TMU9 This option cannot be ordered separately and subsequently installed in the transmitter system, since some modules or components have to be preassembled at the factory. The cooling system consists of the following modules or components:

Exhaust kit TM9-C1 Fans E1, E2 Differential pressure sensors S1, S2 Temperature sensor B2 Exhaust air transfer duct Air cooling interface (ACIF) (option to the TCE900 TxControl transmitter control unit) The air cooling interface (ACIF) is used to establish the connection from the TM9-C1 exhaust kit to the TCE900 SysCtrl unit. The ACIF serves in part to control speed and monitor the fans and, where appropriate, to send error messages to the TCE900 SysCtrl. Pressure sensors S1 and S2 measure the pressure inside and outside of the rack. Thus, a pressure-neutral environment can be configured in the rack. Temperature sensor B2 measures the exhaust air temperature in the vicinity of the exhaust air transfer duct. Mains distribution unit ZR900Z10 protects fan E1 via circuit breaker F7 and fan E2 via circuit breaker F8. 3.1.6 Performance Features Efficiency The efficiency of a transmitter is correctable. This readjustment of the transmitter effi-

ciency is done by modifying the DC supply of the power amplifier. To get an idea for transmitters that are not operated at the nominal power, the following estimation is permitted. Unew=(Pnew/Pnom)*Unom Here, a linearity precorrection found at nominal power does not yet have to be adapted. Uninterruptible power supply To bridge extended power supply faults, the control and signal processing components present in the transmitter are equipped with a separate supply. The following options are available for an uninterruptible power supply:

The "external UPS feed" option The external supply can be switched off via the main switch and supplies the trans-

mitter control unit components and the exciters. Alternatively, one or more UPS devi-

ces can be installed in the option section of the rack. The UPS devices are 19" rack-

mounts with 1 HU. The "internal UPS" option The "internal UPS" option uses a UPS (additional purchase part) as a 19" instrument rackmount with 1 HU. The 3 free rack units (option section) are intended as the System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 40 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Design and Function R&S TMU9 defined installation location. This means it is not possible to equip all exciters and the transmitter control unit with an independent UPS for MultiTx in the full configuration. The "redundant voltage supply for the transmitter control unit (TCE900 CTRL)" option The transmitter control unit (TCE900 CTRL) has an optional "external supply" rack-

mount for an "+12 V external" supply. Emergency mode If the transmitter control unit has failed or communication with the transmitter components has been interrupted, the system is in emergency mode. This means the last operating states in all system components are saved to nonvolatile memory, with exception of the power amplifiers, for which the operation settings are saved only until the next restart. When restarted, the amplifiers are re-commanded by the active exciter. The system components maintain this operating state until other states are commanded by a new/repaired/replaced transmitter control unit. 3.1.7 Power Display and Reflection Monitor Displays The displays of the transmitter show the forward and reflected power of the transmitter output. The forward and reflected power is displayed with an accuracy better than 5 %

of the nominal value. RF forward monitoring and messages For nominal power up until the warning level, the transmitter sends the messages RF ON and RF OK. If the configurable warning threshold (0 dB to -20 dB) is undershot, the transmitter sends the RF ON message and an additional warning message (RF WARNING). The RF OK message is canceled. If the configurable fault threshold (0 dB to -20 dB) is undershot, the transmitter cancels the RF ON message right away and issues an RF fault (RF FAIL) after a configurable waiting period (1 s to 20 s). Reflection warning A warning threshold is set to generate a reflection warning. The warning threshold lies between -18 dB and -28 dB and is the return loss in dB. Reflection fault The transmitter is switched off when the return loss is 17 dB to -14 dB (configurable)

(corresponds to 1/50 to 1/20 of the forward power). It can be switched off by blocking the RF (RF carrier loop). System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 41 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Design and Function R&S TMU9 Within one minute after it has been switched off the first time, three attempts at switching it back on will be made. If there is still reflection after the last attempt to switch it on, the transmitter is permanently switched off (Output Stage will be switched off) and a "Reflec-

tion" fault message is generated. 3.1.8 Specifications 3.1.8.1 Transmitter System, General DTV General DVB-T/-H DVB-T2 ISDB-T ATSC 6 MHz FCC Doc. A/53 Frequency range 470 MHz to 862 MHz UHF band IV/V:(step size 1 Hz) Frequency range Doh-

erty 470 MHz to 790 MHz Channel bandwidth 5/6/7/8 MHz 1.7/5/6/7/8 MHz 6/7/8MHz Standards EN 300744 EN 302304 (opt.) EN 302755 SFN / DTx function TS 101191 EMC EN 302296 EN 301489-1 / -14 With channel bandpass filter Max. installation alti-

tude 2000 m (sea level); up to 3000 m on request Operating temperature

(operation room)

+1 C to +45 C ARIB STD-B31 ABNT NBR 15601 ARIB STD-B31 ABNT NBR 15601 ARIB STD-B31 ABNT NBR 15601 Part 1 Maximum relative humidity Environmental class 95 % non-condensing (interior) ETSI EN 300-019-1-3 Interior, in acc. with 3.2, with limited temperature range, non-condensing Voltage supply 3W+N+PE (Y) 230 V AC/400 V AC 15 %

AC supply frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz Power factor per phase 0.95 Circuit feedback EN 61000-3-2 fulfilled for transmitters with 3 amplifiers EN 61000-3-12 fulfilled for transmitters with 4 amplifiers System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 42 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Design and Function R&S TMU9 DVB-T/-H DVB-T2 ISDB-T ATSC Immunity --> to fast transients and bursts

(in acc. with EN 61000-4-4)

< 2kV (mains)

< 1 kV (signals) Immunity to surges -->

(in accordance with EN 61000-4-5)

< 1kV (symmetric)

< 2kV (non-symmetric) Noise level Interior: < 60 dBA Permitted VSWR s 1.33 at the transmitter level optionally at s > 1:1.33 shutoff (standard) or s > 1:1.45 (configurable) RF connector EIA 1 5/8"

Inputs DVB-T/-H Input signals ASI DVB-T2 ASI TS over IP ISDB-T ASI Data rate inputs 3 Mbps to 30 Mbps 3 Mbps to 50 Mbps 32,507937 Mbps 2 x ASI (HP/LP) BNC 75 2 x ASI BNC 75 2 x ASI BNC 75 RJ-45, TCP/IP Modulator interface

- - -

T2-MI ETSI TS 102773 Reference frequency 10 MHz; 0.1 to 5 Vpp or TTL, BNC 50 Reference pulse 1 pps, TTL, BNC 50 Monitoring Current data rate, input signal present, TS synchronization present, ATSC ASI SMTPE310M 19.39 Mbps 2 x SMPTE310 or 2 x ASI BNC 75

- - -

204/188 Byte 207 byte/187 byte Packet length 204 byte/188 byte Fixed packet length

(188 byte) Generic cont. stream >

64 kbit Generic fixed packe-

tized streams (<

64 kbit) Generic encapsulated streams (TS 102606) High efficiency mode Modulation modes QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM, 256QAM DQPSK QPSK 16 QAM 64 QAM 8 VSB System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 43 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Design and Function R&S TMU9 DVB-T/-H DVB-T2 IFFT modes

(bandwidth specifica-

tions for 8 MHz chan-

nel) 2k, 8k opt. 4k for DVB-H bandwidth 7.61 MHz Extended carrier mode

- - -

Symbol period 224 s (2k) 448 s (4k) 896 s (8k) 1k, 2k, 4k, 8k, 16k, 32k bandwidth 7.61 MHz ISDB-T Mode 1 2k Mode 2 4k Mode 3 8k 8k, 16k, 32k bandwidth 7.77 MHz 252s (2k) 504s (4k) 1008s (8k) 112 s (1k) 224 s (2k) 448 s (4k) 896 s (8k) 1792 s (16k) 3584 s (32k) Guard interval 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32 Code rate 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6 ,7/8 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32, 19/128, 19/256, 1/128 1/2, 3/5, 2/3, 3/4, 4/5, 5/6 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6 ,7/8 Trellis coding

- - -

Hierarchical coding supported PAPR Rot. constellation DVB-T2 modes

- - -

- - -

- - -

- - -

- - -

Yes Yes Single PLP Multi PLP

- - -

- - -

- - -

- - -

- - -

ATSC

- - -

- - -

- - -

- - -

- - -

2/3

- - -

- - -

- - -

- - -

Delay correction Max. 1000 ms, automatic and manual setting Precorrection ADE (adaptive digital equalization) ADE (adaptive digital equalization) ADE (adaptive digital equali-

zation) adaptive digital equali-

zation (ADE) ext. group delay (opt.) Quality MER DVB-T/-H DVB-T2 ISDB-T 33 dB at Pnom 33 dB at Pnom 33dB at Pnom Frequency response

< 0.5 dB

< 0.5 dB

< 0.5dB Intermodulation sup-

pression 37 dB ( 12 MHz) 37 dB ( 12 MHz) 37dB ( 12MHz) ATSC 35 dB at Pnom

< 0.25 dB 47 dB ref. to mean power BW 8 MHz: 4.2 MHz BW 7 MHz: 3.7 MHz BW 6 MHz: 3.2 MHz Spectrum mask in line with ETSI EN 302296 with channel bandpass filter BW 6MHz: 3,15MHz ABNT NBR 15601 Part 1 with channel bandpass FCC DTV emission mask, with channel bandpass filter System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 44 R&S TMU9 Nonharmonics Harmonics Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Design and Function R&S TMU9 DVB-T/-H DVB-T2 ISDB-T ATSC

-60 dBc Without channel band-

pass filter

-60 dBc Without channel band-

pass filter

-70 dBc Without channel band-

pass filter

-60 dBc Without channel band-

pass filter

-60 dBc Without channel band-

pass filter

-60 dBc Without channel band-

pass filter Noise power density dBc / Hz 10 Hz 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz 1 MHz

> 70

> 90

> 93

> 103

> 112

> 130 Frequency stability 10-7 / year Operation RJ-45 Operation via PC using standard web browser

(opt. network management interface for SNMP) Parallel interface Contacts / optocoupler (opt.) Safeguarding and monitoring Transmitter Amplifier Mains Reflection Temperature RF out Mains Reflection Temperature Overvoltage Transistor Fail RF Input Level RF output level Transistor currents DC voltages System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 45 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Design and Function R&S TMU9 Standards ETSI EN62015 ETSI EN60950 ETSI EN 301489-14 ETSI EN302296 Safety requirements for radio transmission equipment

(VDE0866 / IEC 215) Safety of information technology equipment incl. elec-

trical business equipment (VDE0805 / IEC 950) Electromagnetic compatibility for radio spectrum mat-

ters (ERM) Electromagnetic compatibility for radio equipment and service (EMC); Part 14: Specific conditions for analog and digital terrestrial TV broadcasting service transmitters Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters (ERM); Transmitting equipment for the digital television broadcast service, terrestrial (DVB-T) 3.1.8.2 Requirements for the Output Bandpass Filter A channel bandpass filter is required for maintaining the brand and nonharmonics requirements, which depend on standards. DVB-T The shoulder distance on the transmitter side, without filter, is presupposed to be at least 37 dB. Table 3-1: Specification of DVB-T Channel Bandpass Filter for Non-Critical Mask Frequency f0 3.805 MHz 4.2 MHz 6.0 MHz 12 MHz Default filter attenuation 0.3 dB to 0.4 dB 0.8 dB to 1.0 dB 5.0 dB 20.0 dB 40.0 dB Table 3-2: Specification of DVB-T Channel Bandpass Filter for Critical Mask Frequency f0 3.805 MHz 4.2 MHz 6.0 MHz 12 MHz Default filter attenuation 0.45 dB to 0.6 dB 1.0 dB to 1.5 dB 15.0 dB 27.0 dB 50.0 dB General specifications VSWR: 1.22 min in the range 3.805 MHz System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 46 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Design and Function R&S TMU9 Drift:: 2 kHz/K RF connector: 3 1/8" pipe connection DVB-T2 The shoulder distance on the transmitter side, without filter, is presupposed to be at least 37 dB. For DVB-T2, a new operating mode, "Extended carrier mode," was introduced in the standard. This mode can be activated at FFT sizes of 8k, 16k, and 32k and leads to a bandwidth extension of 80 kHz. The throughput range with DVB-T2 is at 3.885 MHz, the max. impedance matching has to be ensured in this range. The attenuation requirements in the stopband are identical as with DVB-T. ATSC The shoulder distance on the transmitter side, without filter, is presupposed to be at least 37 dB. Table 3-3: Specification of Channel Bandpass Filter for "Full Power FCC Mask"

Frequency f02.69 MHz 3.00 MHz 3.50 MHz 4.00 MHz 6.00 MHz 9.00 MHz Default filter attenuation 0.3 dB to 0.4 dB 0.5 dB 3.0 dB 8.0 dB 30.0 dB 65.0 dB Table 3-4: Specification of Channel Bandpass Filter for "Stringent Mask"

Default filter attenuation 0.3 dB to 0.4 dB 0.5 dB 3.0 dB 8.0 dB 30.0 dB 30.0 dB Frequency f02.69 MHz 3.00 MHz 3.50 MHz 4.00 MHz 6.00 MHz 9.00 MHz General specifications VSWR: 1.12 to 1.15 Drift:: 2 kHz/K System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 47 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Design and Function R&S TMU9 ATSC (Canada) The shoulder distance on the transmitter side, without filter, is presupposed to be at least 37 dB. Table 3-5: Specification of Channel Bandpass Filter for "Canadian Tight Mask"

Default filter attenuation 0.3 dB to 0.4 dB 0.5 dB 1 dB 6 dB 20 dB 30 dB Frequency f02.69 MHz 3.00 MHz 3.50 MHz 4.00 MHz 6.00 MHz 9.00 MHz General specifications VSWR: 1.12 to 1.15 Drift:: 2 kHz/K ISDB-T (Japan) The shoulder distance on the transmitter side, without filter, is presupposed to be at least 37 dB. Table 3-6: Specification of Channel Bandpass Filter for "Non-Critical Mask"

Frequency f02.79 MHz 3.15 MHz 4.50 MHz 9.00 MHz Default filter attenuation 0.3 dB to 0.4 dB 2 dB 20 dB 40 dB General specifications VSWR: 1.12 to 1.22 min. in the throughput range Drift:: 2 kHz/K ISDB-TB The shoulder distance on the transmitter side, without filter, is presupposed with at least 37 dB or 42 dB. System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 48 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Design and Function R&S TMU9 Table 3-7: Specification of Channel Bandpass Filter for "Non-Critical Mask"

Frequency f02.79 MHz 3.15 MHz 4.50 MHz 9.00 MHz Default filter attenuation

(SH 37 dB) Default filter attenuation

(SH 42 dB) 0.3 dB to 0.4 dB 0.2 dB to 0.4 dB 2 dB 20 dB 40 dB 0 dB 12 dB 35 dB Table 3-8: Specification of Channel Bandpass Filter for "Sub-Critical Mask"

Frequency f02.79 MHz 3.15 MHz 4.50 MHz 9.00 MHz Default filter attenuation

(SH 37 dB) Default filter attenuation

(SH 42 dB) 0.3 dB to 0.5 dB 0.3 dB to 0.4 dB 8 dB 23 dB 48 dB 3 dB 18 dB 40 dB Table 3-9: Specification of Channel Bandpass Filter for "Critical Mask"

Frequency f02.79 MHz 3.15 MHz 4.50 MHz 9.00 MHz Default filter attenuation

(SH 37 dB) Default filter attenuation

(SH 42 dB) 0.4 dB to 0.6 dB 0.4 dB to 0.6 dB 15 dB 30 dB 55 dB 10 dB 25 dB 50 dB General specifications VSWR: 1.12 to 1.22 min. in the throughput range Drift:: 2 kHz/K ATV With analog-only operation of the transmitter, a 4-circuit bandpass filter is sufficient for achieving the standards requirements. Table 3-10: Specification of Channel Bandpass Filter (Analog-Only Operation) Frequency Passband fB - fT fB + 2* fT Filter attenuation

< 0.2 dB (better 0.15 dB)

>30 dB

>30 dB System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 49 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Installation R&S TMU9 Filter attenuation 24 dB 24 dB Frequency fB - 2* fT fB + 3* fT General specifications VSWR: 1.06 to 1.10 Drift:: 2 kHz/K 3.1.8.3 Parallel Remote Control Interface Operating voltage Current drain CAN interface Number of command inputs Insulation voltage 12 V DC 1 A maximum CAN V2.0B at 1 Mbps 32 3000 Veff Maximum external line resistance 50 (referenced to common command line) Number of message outputs 80 (of which 5 have bistable character) Dielectric strength of contact/coil 1000 Veff 3.2 Installation R&S TMU9 3.2.1 Equipment Supplied 3.2.1.1 Integrated Transmitter Components TCE900 units System components 3.2.1.2 Transmitter Components Supplied Separately Amplifier Bandpass filter (optional, depending on transmitter configuration) Transmitter accessories System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 50 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Installation R&S TMU9 3.2.2 Overview of Transmitter Installation The transmitter can be installed by following the basic sequence given below:

Setting up the transmitter Checking the floor suitability Preparing openings required in the floor (only with inlets and outlets from below) Arranging the connections on the transmitter roof Setting up the transmitter rack Aligning the transmitter rack Removing the front panels Unpacking the components Installing UHF channel bandpass filter AC power supply Connecting the transmitter ground Connecting the power cable Connecting external units Amplifier Making preparations for installing the amplifiers Installing the amplifiers RF output Connecting the antenna Connecting the dummy antenna Connecting the modulation/reference signals Connecting the remote control system to the transmitter system 3.2.2.1 Required Tools You will need the following tools to install the transmitter:

Tool Screwdriver Screwdriver Screwdriver Screwdriver Screwdriver Hexagon socket Hexagon socket Open-end wrench Open-end wrench Spirit level Type Torx Torx Phillips Slotted Slotted Size No. 8 No. 20 No. 1 No. 1 No. 3 No. 5 No. 6 Width across flats 13mm (2pcs) Width across flats 10mm System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 51 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Installation R&S TMU9 The table lists the basic tools required for installation of the transmitter rack (not for floor openings, base frame, and so on). 3.2.3 Setting Up the Transmitter 3.2.3.1 Preparatory Work Before setting up and installing the transmitter, you must make the following preparations:

Checking the floor suitability Prepare openings required in the floor and set the screw holes in the floor for fixing the rack (optional) Arranging the connections on the transmitter roof Checking the floor suitability Before installing the transmitter, you must check whether the floor of the building in which the transmitter is to be operated has an adequate weight to floor area ratio. Depending on the type of system, a transmitter rack of the THU9/TMU9 family can have a total weight of up to 720 kg with the maximum number of rackmounts installed. A weight to floor-area ratio of at least 1200 kg / m2 is therefore required. The exact weight of your transmitter is given in the specifications. The installation surface should be flat (i.e. horizontal along all axes) and measure at least 600 mm x 1100 mm to accommodate the transmitter rack. During installation, the transmitter must be easily accessible from the front and rear. A clearance space of at least 1.2 m is necessary in order to install all components without difficulty. Preparing openings required in the floor (only with inlets and outlets from below) If cables (RF cables, control lines, etc.) are to be connected to the transmitter from below, you must make appropriate floor openings in the building in which the transmitter is to be operated. Further details and dimensions can be found in the corresponding drawing in the appen-

dix "Basic documentation":

System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 52 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Installation R&S TMU9 3.2.3.2 Setting Up the Transmitter Rack The transmitter rack can be set up using lifting equipment (crane). Lifting lugs are attached to the top of the rack for this purpose. Crushing Hazard Do not stand under suspended racks. Risk of Falling Take the relevant safety precautions when climbing ladders (not wobbly, suitable foot-

wear) 3.2.3.3 Aligning the Transmitter Rack The rack must be aligned vertically and horizontally in order to prevent distortion caused by shearing forces. Using the height-adjustable rack feet, align the rack such that it is vertical and hori-

zontal along all axes. Use a water level to align the rack. 3.2.3.4 Bolting the Transmitter Rack to the Floor If required, the transmitter rack can be screwed to the floor or a floor frame. Two 12 mm boreholes are provided in the lower crossbeam of the transmitter rack for this purpose. 3.2.3.5 Removing the Front Panels Before you start installing the individual units, make sure that you have easy access to all units, connectors, and interfaces needed. 1. Using a Torx screwdriver No.20, remove all front panels from the rack. 2. Open the rear door of the transmitter rack. Take care not to damage the ground connections when removing and fitting the front panels. System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 53 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Installation R&S TMU9 3.2.3.6 Unpacking the Components Each transmitter component is packaged separately. Remove the packaging and have all equipment ready for the installation. 3.2.4 Installing the UHF Channel Bandpass Filter An integrated bandpass filter is optionally available. High voltage Risk of fatal injury from touching voltages constituting a shock hazard. The transmitter rack must be completely de-energized before the following service work is performed, otherwise there is a risk of injury and death caused by electric shock. Plug in the RF components up to the respective markings. 1. Unscrew the lower front panel on the transmitter (Torx screwdriver No. 20). 2. Insert the filter into the filter trough from the front of the transmitter. 3. Align the filter brackets with the fastening holes in the filter trough and screw the filter brackets to the filter trough (hexagon socket No. 6). 4. Install the directional coupler in the correct installation direction with the connector bracket at the filter inlet/coupler output and fasten the directional coupler by tightening the clamps (hexagon socket No. 5). System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 54 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Installation R&S TMU9 1 = RF bracket on the channel bandpass filter outlet 2 = Retaining clamp of the harmonics filter 3 = EIA pipeline junction 4 = Roof mount of the directional coupler Install the RF connecting pipe at the upper bracket/filter outlet and fasten the RF connecting pipe with clamps (hexagon socket No. 5). 5. 3.2.5 Installing the Amplifier 1. With the aid of a second person, carefully slide the amplifier into the free slot until the automatic connectors engage. The front panel of the amplifier must be flush with the rack uprights. System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 55 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Installation R&S TMU9 Fig. 3-11: Slide the amplifier into the rack 2. Tighten the amplifier to the rack using the two screws on the front panel (Torx screw-

driver T25). 3. Switch on the amplifier via the power distribution unit in the transmitter rack (turn the appropriate protective switch to the "I/ON" position). If the installation was successful, the LINK LED flashes until the amplifier has been detected by the system and is illuminated continuously if the amplifier is logged on to the system. 3.2.6 Installing the Power Supply 3.2.6.1 General High Voltage Risk of fatal injury from touching dangerous voltages. To prevent injury and death from electric shock, always make sure that the power supply is disconnected before com-

mencing any work. System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 56 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Installation R&S TMU9 The ZR900Z10 mains distribution unit is installed in the transmitter rack at the factory. The mains distribution unit is connected to the power supply network of the transmitter station. 3.2.6.2 Connecting the Transmitter Ground Transmitter Ground The rack must be connected to the station's main ground terminal. The transmitter rack has two grounding bolts near the floor which are easily accessible from the rear. Connect a system ground conductor to the free grounding bolt. 3.2.6.3 Connecting the Power Cable Before connecting the power cable, remove the transparent protective cover of the ZR900Z10 mains distribution unit. Loosen the transparent protective cover at the rear of the mains distribution unit using a Torx screwdriver No. 10, as shown in the following figure, and remove the cover. Fig. 3-12: ZR900Z1 mains distribution unit, protective cover on the rear side Furthermore, determine which series fuses and cable cross-sections are required. The recommended values refer to a cable length of 20 m when routing in perforated cable System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 57

 

 

R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Installation R&S TMU9 trays. When routing in solid cable ducts, use the next largest cable cross-sections and fuse ratings. The fuse ratings apply for a maximum ambient temperature of 25 C and a minimum undervoltage of 197 V AC. Series fuses and cable cross-sections for a 3-phase power supply For a 230/400 V AC, 50 Hz power supply with L1, L2, L3, N, and PE, the following infor-

mation applies:

Number of amplifiers Series fuse pH gG Cable cross-section 1 2 3 4 5 6 3 x 40 A 3 x 40 A 3 x 40 A 3 x 40 A 3 x 40 A 3 x 40 A 5 x 6 mm2 5 x 6 mm2 5 x 6 mm2 5 x 6 mm2 5 x 6 mm2 5 x 6 mm2 Series fuses and cable cross-sections for a 1-phase power supply For a 230 V AC, 50 Hz power supply with L1, N, and PE, the following information applies:

Number of amplifiers Series fuse NH gG Cable cross-section 1 2 3 3 x 40 A 3 x 40 A 3 x 50 A 3 x 6 mm2 3 x 6 mm2 3 x 10 mm2 1. Run a power input cable of sufficient length to the series fuse. 2. Connect the cable to the series fuse. 3. Loosen the clamping screws at the strain relief (item 1 in the following figure). 4. Run a cable from the series fuse through the strain relief to the power input terminal X1 (item 3). 5. Remove the protective covers (item 2), open the respective terminals using a size 3 flat-head screwdriver, and connect the wires using the cable and terminal designa-

tions. 6. Check that the wires are secure and put the protective covers (item 2) back on. 7. Tighten the clamping screws of the strain relief. 8. Fasten the transparent protective cover to the rear of the mains distribution unit. System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 58 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Installation R&S TMU9 Fig. 3-13: Connecting the Power Input Cable 1 = Strain relief 2 = Protective covers 3 = Power input terminal X1 3.2.7 Installing the RF output The output to the main antenna is an EIA connector. It is on the left-hand side of the transmitter roof, next to the directional coupler and connection panel. 3.2.7.1 Connecting the Antenna Connect the antenna as follows, depending on the transmitter type:

Fasten the coaxial cable, which is preassembled to the station, to the EIA flange of the transmitter's RF output. To prevent the screw connection from loosening, secure it using a plain washer and spring lock washer. Use 4 screws M8, 35 mm (for EIA 1 5/8") In regions with high humidity, the supplied rubber ring can be inserted into the groove between the two EIA flanges. 3.2.7.2 Connecting the Dummy Antenna The dummy antenna is connected only when putting the system into operation or for maintenance and repair purposes. System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 59 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Installation R&S TMU9 With some dummy antennas that have coolant monitoring and overtemperature moni-

toring, the monitoring equipment can be connected to the transmitter. The main RF carrier loop X41.1 and X41.2 on the CAN bus adapter or exciter switch can be used here as a temporary measure (e.g. while the unit is being put into operation). 1. To connect the main RF carrier loop, use the inserted jumper plug and remove the jumper. 2. Connect the monitoring cable in place of the jumper. If you are using an RF patch panel that allows you to switch between the antenna and dummy antenna by means of an RF bridging link (permanent installation), attach the dummy antenna monitoring unit to the standby RF carrier loop (X41.1 and X41.2 with CAN bus adapter, X41.3 and X41.4 with exciter switch). For more details, see chap-

ter 3.2.9, "Installing the RF Loop", on page 62. 3.2.8 Installing R&S TCE900 Customer Interfaces The various versions of the TCE900 are already integrated into the rack with the delivery of a transmitter. Installation is limited to wiring at the device's customer interfaces. Which cables need to be connected depends on the transmitter configuration, the device version and the custom requirements. The cables used to provide ASI, 10MHz, PPS and GPS signals, should be double shiel-

ded. IP and Ethernet connections should use class CAT6 cables should be used. Please refer to the system circuit diagram for the system wiring applicable to your system. The following steps are required to install a R&S TCE900. 1. Insert the R&S TCE900 into the TCE pullout frame without canting it (only one run-

ner) and carefully push the unit back to the front stop. 2. Fasten the R&S TCE900 to the TCE pullout frame using the two knurled screws. 3. Connect the cable in accordance with the wiring diagram and target designation. 4. Complete the TCE pullout frame with the front panel a) To connect the Tx Control or Exciter A (for single drive) and TSP, plug the control cable into the mini USB socket on the TSP900. b) Hook the eyelets on the rear of the front panel into the hooks on the TCE pull-out frame and press the front panel down as far as it will go. c) Retighten the front panel to the sides of the TCE pull-out frame using four screws

(size 20 Torx screwdriver). 5. Slide the TCE pull-out frame into the rack. System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 60 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Installation R&S TMU9 a) Push the left safety lever outwards and press one of the two right safety levers downwards. Fig. 3-14: Releasing the safety lever (left side). 1 = Push the safety lever outward and hold it Fig. 3-15: Releasing the safety lever (right side). 2 = Press down and hold the first safety lever 3 = Push the TCE pull-out unit toward the rack 4 = Push the second safety lever downwards, hold it, and push the TCE pull-out unit in all the way b) First hold the two safety levers in this position and press the TCE pull-out frame toward the rack, until the safety lever retains its position on its own. c) Also push the second safety lever on the right side downwards now and slide the TCE pull-out unit into the rack. d) Retighten the four captive screws on the TCE pull-out frame. System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 61 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Installation R&S TMU9 3.2.9 Installing the RF Loop 3.2.9.1 Single Drive (CAN Bus Adapter) A RF loop plug is plugged onto the CAN bus adapter (in the system component frame) that may have to be wired depending on whether or not the RF loop is used. Fig. 3-16: RF loop plug X41 (LOOP), open and bypassed 1 = Pin 1 2 = Pin 2 Risk of RF Burns Interruptions to the RF sector during operation can lead to arc flashes and severe burns including shock that result from them. Before putting the transmitter into operation, ensure that the available RF interlock systems are connected correctly. The RF loop is not used Bridge pins 1 and 2 on RF loop plug X41 (LOOP) using a jumper. The RF loop is used Loop pins 1 and 2 from plug X41 (LOOP) into the RF loop connections coming from the RF sector (RF switch, switchover panel, etc.). System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 62 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Installation R&S TMU9 3.2.9.2 Dual Drive (RF Switch) A RF loop plug is plugged onto the RF switch (in the system component frame) that may have to be wired depending on whether or not the RF loop is used. Fig. 3-17: RF loop plug X41 (LOOP) - RF Switch Risk of RF Burns Interruptions to the RF sector during operation can lead to arc flashes and severe burns including shock that result from them. Before putting the transmitter into operation, ensure that the available RF interlock systems are connected correctly. In case of Dual Drive, the RF loop of the standby exciter is always bypassed via the exciter switch. This is not valid for Dual Drive with active dual output stage. The external RF loop is only used for the active exciter. 3.2.10 Installing the TM9-C1 Exhaust Kit The following modules and components of the cooling system or exhaust kit are preas-

sembled at the factory:

Air Cooling Interface ACIF as rackmount in the R&S TCE900-SystemControl unit Exhaust air transfer duct (item 1 in the following figure) on the rear part of the trans-

mitter roof Fans E1 and E2 in the rear door of the transmitter rack Pressure sensors S1 and S2 in the rear door of the transmitter rack Temperature sensors B1 and B2 in the rear door of the transmitter rack The rear door with the preassembled components is delivered in separate packaging. The following steps are required:

System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 63 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Installation R&S TMU9 1. Unpack the rear door and hang it on the door hinges (item 2 in the following figure) on the rear side of the rack. 2. Connect the potential equalization cable on the threaded bolt of the door (item 3) and on the left wall of the rack (Torx screw) Fig. 3-18: Exhaust Kit, Rear door of transmitter rack 1 = Exhaust air transfer duct, top 2 = Connection of temperature sensor B2 3 = Connection of potential equalization cable (Torx screw) 3. Attach the connecting cables for E1, E2, S1, S2, B1, and B2 to the connection panel at the bottom of the left wall of the rack as followed. Power cable W.1N for fan E1 to X.1N Control cable W.E1 for fan E1 to X.E1 Connection cable W.S1 for pressure sensor S1 to X.S1 Power cable W.2N for fan E2 to X.2N Control cable W.E2 for fan E2 to X.E2 Connection cable W.S2 for pressure sensor S2 to X.S2 Connection cable W.B2 for temperature sensor B2 to X.B2 System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 64 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Commissioning R&S TMU9 Fig. 3-19: Connection panel for exhaust kit. 1 = Power supply for fan E1 (X.1N) 2 = Connection of control line of Fan E1 (X.E1) 3 = Connection of pressure sensor S1 (X.S1) 4 = Power supply for fan E2 (X.2N) 5 = Connection of control line of Fan E2 (X.E2) 6 = Connection of pressure sensor S2 (X.S2) 3.3 Commissioning R&S TMU9 Commissioning of the transmitter system is described in the following document. R&S THU9/TMU9 Transmitter System Operating Manual, Mat. No. 2109.9110.02 System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 65 R&S TMU9 Transmitter System R&S TMU9 Commissioning R&S TMU9 System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 66 R&S TMU9 Exciter/Transmitter Control R&S TCE900 Design and Function R&S TCE900 4 Exciter/Transmitter Control R&S TCE900 4.1 Design and Function R&S TCE900 4.1.1 R&S TCE900 General Design The R&S TCE900 consists of a base module and various plug-in modules that enable the following versions of the R&S TCE900. R&S TCE900 SystemControl (TCE900 SysCtrl) R&S TCE900 Exciter (TCE900 Exc) R&S TCE900 The basic R&S TCE900 unit is the same for all versions and consists of the following modules:

Processor board (IPS1) The IPS1 processing unit has the following properties:

CR2032 (3 V) battery for supplying the realtime clock with power in the event of 1.6 GHz INTEL ATOM N processor 2 GB RAM a power failure. Linux-based R&S TCE900 software A 4GB flash disk is located on the processor board; the operating system and all of the system settings are saved on it. The following interfaces are on the rear of the IPS1 unit:

2 x USB 2.0 for connecting external devices (mouse, keyboard, USB stick) 1 x Gigabit Ethernet 1000BaseT for externally controlling the R&S TCE900 via SNMP, VNC or remote desktop 1 x DVI-D for connecting an external DVI-D monitor The IPS1 board also provides internal interfaces (via internal system connector #1). 3 x PCIe 1.0a, Port A is used in the R&S TCE900 for exchanging data (TS or IP) between the option module and the computer. The other two PCIe interfaces are not used. Furthermore, there are additional internal interfaces for special applications:

1 x SATA, interface (not used) 1 x +5 V, hard disk power supply (not used) 1 x mSATA socket for a 4GB flash disk (with operating system and system set-

tings) System connection board (SCB) System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 67 R&S TMU9 Exciter/Transmitter Control R&S TCE900 Design and Function R&S TCE900 The system connection board is the central board of the R&S TCE900 with a con-

nection socket to the IPS1 processing unit (X17). The connector plugs for the back-

plane (X50, X51) are opposite the IPS1 connection socket. The system connection board provides the following functions:

The +12 V open-circuit voltage of the power supply is connected to the system connection board via the X1, X2 and X3 interfaces. All modules of the R&S TCE900 are supplied with a voltage of 12 V from there. FPGA D34 with PCIe interface for the IPS1 processing unit. This is used for transferring central control tasks, e.g. fan control. PCIe switch D28 for distributing one IPS1 PCIe lane to the 5 modular units on the backplane. USB hub D42 for distributing one IPS1 USB channel to the 5 modular units on the backplane. Smart card adapter X12 with USB interface for managing options. Ethernet switch D25 for additional network interfaces in the instrument. GPS receiver K1 with USB interface. The antenna signals travel from the external SMA input socket, "GPS ANT", to the GPS receiver via a cable. The GPS receiver generates an internal 1 pps signal for monitoring DVB-T SFN networks. Power supply Fans R&S TCE900 SysCtrl Fig. 4-1: R&S TCE900 Control - rear view 1 = Tx interface 2 = Cooling Interface / Air Cooling Interface 3 = Ethernet switch (opt. for N+1 systems) In addition to the basic unit, the R&S TCE900 SysCtrl contains the following plug-in mod-

ules:

Tx interface The TxIF in the R&S TCE900 is used as an interface from the IPS1 processor board to the mains distribution unit and in specific systems to control an RF switch and to monitor a switch-over panel. Additionally, there is an ethernet switch available, which is used for the commumication to the exciters. The TxIF is connected to the backplane via connection X100 (90-pin Airmax con-

nector). The following connections are located on the rear panel:

X44: Interface for the mains distribution unit (15-pin) X40-X43: 4 Ethernet interfaces (Gbit) for connecting the transmitter system's devices X45: Interface to the RF switch and to a specific patch panel (15-pin) Air cooling interface (ACIF) The air cooling interface is an optional card for the R&S TCE900. System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 68 R&S TMU9 Exciter/Transmitter Control R&S TCE900 Design and Function R&S TCE900 For a medium-power transmitter, the connection from the exhaust kit to the trans-

mitter's control unit is established via the air cooling interface. This can be used to control 2 fans independently of each other using a 0 V to 10 V voltage signal. Simul-

taneously, 2 tachometer signals from the fans can be evaluated to determine their speed. Two differential pressure sensors (1) are used to measure the pressure inside the frame enclosure with reference to the outside air pressure. Through the ACIF of the R&S TCE900, the RPM of the two fans (2) are regulated with the aim of maintaining normal air pressure within the enclosed frame. Two examples for controlling of the normal air pressure in the rack:

For example, when the temperature of the air fed to the transmitter rises, the RPM of the amplifier cooling fan will increase accordingly in order to adequately cool the amplifier. As a result, the pressure within the enclosed frame will increase and the ACIF will increase the RPM of the fans in the exhaust kit. When the temperature of the air fed to the transmitter decreases, the RPM of the amplifier cooling fan will decrease. As a result, the pressure within the enclosed frame will decrease and also the RPM of the fans in the exhaust kit. During the initial commissioning of the system, a fallback RPM setting is configured. This setting ensures that adequate cooling of the transmitter is ensured, even if the ACIF goes off-line. The air cooling interface is connected to the R&S TCE900 via USB on the backplane. In addition to this, interrupt lines are also provided, which run as a signal line

(IRQSCB_OX, GPIO_OPTX_3) from the air cooling interface to the SCB/IPS1 and run as feedback lines (GPIO_OPTX_4, F0_1PPSSCB_OX) from the IPS1/SCB to the air cooling interface. The plug position of the air cooling interface can be determined in the R&S TCE900 using SLOT_IDX. LAN switch Additional Ethernet connections are provided using a LAN switch. In addition, connections for the R&S TDU900 display unit and additional external instru-

ments (e.g. parallel remote control interface) are located here. R&S TCE900 Exc Fig. 4-2: R&S TCE900 Exciter - rear view 1 = RF Board 2 = Coder board In addition to the basic unit, the R&S TCE900 Exc contains the following plug-in modules:

Coder board The coder board in the R&S TCE900 is used for the transport stream's (TS) baseband coding. Depending on the standard in use, there are different models distinguished by how the FPGAs are equipped. The coder board is connected to the backplane using three Airmax connectors, X1

(90-pin), X2 (90-pin) and X3 (54-pin). System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 69 R&S TMU9 Exciter/Transmitter Control R&S TCE900 Design and Function R&S TCE900 The following connections are located on the rear panel:

X30/X31: Ethernet interface for TS via LAN X20/X21: BNC connections for TS via ASI X22: BNC connection for TS monitoring output X23: BNC connection for feeding in an external 1 pps pulse X24: BNC connection for outputting a reference signal (1 pps or 10 MHz) RF board The RF board in the R&S TCE900 fulfills the following functions:

Converting baseband data from digital to analog and converting modulation to the final frequency (forward path). Adaptive precorrection and signal analysis of the baseband data extracted this way (backward path). Central creation and distribution of the system cycle. The RF board is connected to the backplane via connection X10 (90-pin Airmax con-

nector) and receives the digital baseband data from the coder over this connection. JTAG interface X2 is provided for diagnostic purposes. The following connections are located on the rear panel:

X60: RF output (QMA) X61: RF output monitor (SMA) X64: Input for reference frequency (BNC) X67/X68 RF traceability for precorrection (QMA) A GPS receiver can also be activated. The general block diagram for the R&S TCE900 unit is below. System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 70 R&S TMU9 Exciter/Transmitter Control R&S TCE900 Design and Function R&S TCE900 Fig. 4-3: R&S TCE900 block diagram 4.1.2 R&S TCE900 Functions The individual versions of the R&S TCE900 perform the following functions:

R&S TCE900 SysCtrl The R&S TCE900 SysCtrl takes over communications with the outside world and pro-

vides the connection to the R&S R&S TDU900. R&S TCE900 Exc The R&S TCE900 Exc takes over the tasks of an exciter, processes the data transport stream and encodes the extracted data packets. The DTV signal is then precorrected, modulated to the transmission frequency and forwarded to the transmitter output stage. System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 71 R&S TMU9 Exciter/Transmitter Control R&S TCE900 Design and Function R&S TCE900 System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 72 R&S TMU9 Amplifier R&S PMU901 Design and Function R&S PMU901 5 Amplifier R&S PMU901 5.1 Design and Function R&S PMU901 5.1.1 Device Purpose and Overview The R&S PMU901 amplifier is a broadband unit that operates as a power amplifier in the frequency range from 470 MHz to 862 MHz with the following TV standards:

digital (DTV) standards: DVBT/H, DVBT2, ATSC, ATSC Mobil, ISDBTB analog (ATV) standards: ATVc (combined) B/G, D/K, K1, M/N, I, I1 It is based on the BLF888 transistor from NXP. The entire RF circuitry is on the A2 module

(amplifier board). Broadband and Doherty mode (DTV only) Apart from conventional broadband mode, the amplifier can also be operated according to the Doherty principle in order to considerably improve AC efficiency (approx. 35 %). Whereas the amplifier in the classic operating mode (as a linear amplifier with class AB output stage) operates as a broadband unit without the need for adjustment across the entire UHF range at AC efficiency levels around 25 %, the amplifier in Doherty mode is bandlimited at efficiency levels > 35 %. The operating mode of the amplifier is set using a tuning unit ("tunit") which can be accessed from outside and is part of the top cover. With the tunit in its normal installation position, the R&S PMU901 operates in AB mode as a conventional broadband linear amplifier with 6 parallelconnected BLF888 units. When turned through 180, the tunit allows the output stage to operate according to the Doherty principle. Three BLF888 units then serve as the main amplifier and three as the auxiliary amplifier of the 6 dB Doherty system. The tuning of the tunit now determines the available frequency range. There are seven fixed tuning ranges or tunit variants for the entire UHF band (470 MHz to 862 MHz). One tuning range covers up to 12 channels. This special patented architecture of the R&S PMU901 means that the amplifier itself actually remains invariant. Different variants do not need to be made available as replace-

ment parts. Every amplifier can be used in every transmitter. If a (Doherty) amplifier needs to be replaced, the tunit is pulled out of the amplifier to be replaced and then inserted into the replacement amplifier. If the frequency of the entire transmitter has to be changed

(very rare), only the tunits have to be changed (not necessary in all cases). If in doubt, the amplifiers of a transmitter can of course always be configured to conventional broad-

band mode by turning the tunit. This operating mode is indispensable, especially in the case of replacement transmitters in N+1 systems. A control word is used to inform the amplifier control board of the installation position of the tunit and therefore the operating mode. In Doherty mode, the control word also informs the amplifier control board of the tuning range. If the tunit does not match the System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 73 R&S TMU9 Amplifier R&S PMU901 Design and Function R&S PMU901 frequency of the transmitter or the wrong operating mode is configured, the amplifier remains switched off and signals FREQ_FAIL. Control and monitoring The amplifier is operated via the transmitter control unit only. Module A1 (amplifier control board), which operates independently of power and frequency band and is also used in other TX9 amplifiers, is responsible for the monitoring and control functions as well as CAN bus connection. The interface for the amplifier control board is largely compatible with the VH8xxx amplifiers. This means that the amplifier can be operated using the control unit from the 8000 family and outside of the transmitter for test purposes using the GT800A1 test box. Power supply The amplifier has a 3 kW power supply unit (regular power supply unit 1) which delivers both the amplifier operating voltage and the 15 V auxiliary voltage. As an option, an identical power supply unit can be parallelconnected as an active standby. Both power supply units can be replaced without the amplifier needing to be switched off or removed from the transmitter. The standby power supply unit can be assigned to a separate phase on the system side. The permissible mains voltage range of the amplifier is 170 V to 264 V AC. At reduced output powers, the efficiency of the amplifier can be optimized by reducing the DC voltage of the power supply. 5.1.2 Mechanical Design The amplifier is fully enclosed in a 19" metal housing. The height of the cabinet is 3.5 HU

(156 mm). The housing consists of a mounting frame, top cover, front cover and rear panel. The two fans are attached to the rear panel. At the center of the housing is the amplifier board, under which is the heat sink and under that the power supply unit with power adaptor board. After the mains voltage has been disconnected (after the pretrip has been switched off), the amplifier can be removed from the rack without disconnecting any connectors while the transmitter is still in operation (self-engaging plugin connections). Although the R&S PMU901 amplifier is normally used in combination with a transmitter rack, it can also be operated as a standalone desktop unit together with the R&S TCE900 exciter. Modules The amplifier consists of the following modules:

A1: Amplifier control board A2: Amplifier board A3, A4: Power supply 1, power supply 2 (standby, optional) A5: Tunit (tuning unit) System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 74 R&S TMU9 Amplifier R&S PMU901 Design and Function R&S PMU901 A6, A7: Adaptor board 1, adaptor board 2 (standby) The entire amplifier unit is on the top side of the amplifier. Fig. 5-1: Amplifier board A2 (top cover removed) 1 = Preamplifier 2 = Driver amplifier 3 = Output stage with 6 transistors 4 = Amplifier control board A1 5 = RF detectors 6 = Tunit A5 (here in normal installation position for broadband mode) 7 = Fan 1 8 = Fan 2 One or two power supply units are in the lower part of the amplifier behind the front cover. System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 75 R&S TMU9 Amplifier R&S PMU901 Design and Function R&S PMU901 Fig. 5-2: Power supply unit and heat sink (front cover removed) 1 = Fins of heat sink 2 = Power supply 1 A3 3 = Installation compartment for power supply 2 A4 (option) One or two power adaptor boards are on the underside of the amplifier behind the PAB cover. Fig. 5-3: Power adaptor board (cover removed) 1 = Power adaptor board 1 A6 2 = Installation location for power adaptor board 2 A7 (option) 3 = Fan 1 4 = Fan 2 Cooling The amplifier is cooled by a highperformance copper heat sink and two dedicated ampli-

fier fans. The cooling system features the following:

The amplifier circuitry is cooled by means of thermal conduction to the heat sink which dissipates heat to the flow of cooling air inside the amplifier (no additional fans are used). System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 76 R&S TMU9 Amplifier R&S PMU901 Design and Function R&S PMU901 The power supply unit has its own heat sink which also dissipates heat from the power supply unit to the flow of cooling air inside the amplifier. Part of the cooling air also flows through the power supply unit circuitry in order to cool the components. Tunit The installation position of the tuning unit ("tunit") determines whether the two groups of three identical outputstage transistors are parallelconnected to form a classic broad-

band amplifier or whether they form a Doherty system with a main and auxiliary amplifier. With the tunit in its normal installation position ("BMode" on the top cover), the amplifier functions as a conventional linear amplifier with 6 parallelconnected out-

putstage transistors in AB mode. It thus operates as a broadband unit without the need for adjustment across the entire UHF range. When turned through 180 ("DMode" on the top cover), the tunit allows the output stage to operate according to the Doherty principle. Three outputstage transistors then serve as the main amplifier and three as the auxiliary amplifier of the 6 dB Doh-

erty system. In this operating mode, the two tuning elements of the tunit determine the operating frequency(-ies) of the amplifier. They are indicated on the tunit label and are only valid for as long as the calibration sticker is undamaged. The tunit is inserted from above into the cover of the amplifier section in the amplifier. It is therefore only accessible when the amplifier has been removed from the transmitter. The amplifier must be switched off before the tunit is removed! Removal while the ampli-

fier is still in operation can result in the transistors being irreparably damaged. 5.1.3 Display Elements and Interfaces 5.1.3.1 LEDs and Test Point Front Panel The following LEDs for indicating states and faults are on the front panel:

System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 77 R&S TMU9 Name AMPLIFIER ON No. H1 Signaling LED, green LINK H2 LED, green RF IN FAIL MUTE H3 H4 LED, yellow LED, yellow REFLECTION H5 LED, yellow RF POWER FAIL TEMP FAIL TRANSISTOR FAIL FAN FAIL H6 H7 H8 H9 LED, red LED, red LED, red LED, yellow Indication of other operating states:

H6 H8 flash Amplifier R&S PMU901 Design and Function R&S PMU901 Meaning The LED lights up when the amplifier is ready for operation, i.e. the supply voltage is present and the transmitter is in opera-

tion. Amplifier communication with the BUS. Flashing rapidly: No master Flashing slowly: Not opera-

tional but communication link present Permanently lit: Normal communication OFF: Processor is not being supplied with power (no V_AUX) The LED lights up if the RF input level (X10) is below the preset threshold. The RF output signal (X1) is sup-

pressed (caused by the SHUT_DOWN command, if the external power combiner over-

heats, with the RF_IN_FAIL mes-

sage or with the RF_MUTE sig-

nal). The LED lights up if the reflection at the RF output exceeds a threshold. The message is stored in a nonvolatile memory in the amplifier and can be reset at the transmitter control unit (Reset). The LED lights up if the RF output power is below half (-3 dB) of the nominal value. The LED lights up in the case of overtemperature in the amplifier unit. The message is stored in a nonvolatile memory in the CAN controller and can be reset at the transmitter control unit (Reset). The output power is suppressed for as long as overtemperature exists. The LED lights up if a transistor fails in the output stage or driver. The LED lights up if one or more fans fail. System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 78 R&S TMU9 Amplifier R&S PMU901 Design and Function R&S PMU901 A problem has occurred during initialization. Certain hardware conditions are not ful-

filled, e.g.:

The tunit installed in the transmitter does not correspond to that expected by the Internal operating voltages are missing. transmitter (returned FREQ_ID). No FREQ_ID has yet been returned by the transmitter. H3 H5 chaser light Bias adjustment is active (duration: approx. 2 min.). H1 to H8 flash for 10 s The command to detect an amplifier has been activated The generated status displays and measurement values are shown in the GUI of the transmitter control unit (R&S TDU900). Front RF test connector At the RF MONITOR test point (X3, SMA socket), part of the output signal from the amplifier circuitry is output via a directional coupler (1 V test point). This allows evaluation of the signal quality downstream of the amplifier. The coupling attenuation of the RF MONITOR test point has a frequency response of

-6 dB per octave. The attenuation at 650 MHz is stored and can be queried via the trans-

mitter control unit. The level at X3 changes slightly (approx. 0.1 dB) if a connection is disconnected or connected at X13 (ADE OUT, rear panel). 5.1.3.2 Connectors Rear Panel The following connectors are on the rear panel of the amplifier:

X1 Mains voltage feed for 1 or 2 power supply units X2 HF output RF OUT(7/16 female connector) X10 HF input RF IN(SMA female connector) X11 AMPLIFIER CONTROL interface to the amplifier control board with integrated connection to the CAN bus (DSub male connector, 15contact) X13 Second ADE OUT RF test connector for connecting the ADE demodulator for automatic digital precorrection upstream of the channel bandpass filter (with 1 ampli-

fier in the transmitter; SMA female connector) X22, X23 Connection for fan 1 and fan 2 (Molex male connector) 3 connection possibilities for the additional PE conductor (a second PE conductor is always required!) System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 79 R&S TMU9 Amplifier R&S PMU901 Design and Function R&S PMU901 Fig. 5-4: Rear panel of R&S PMU901 with connections for a second PE conductor 1 = Threaded hole (M6) for screwing on a ground cable with cable lug (alternative to 3) 2 = Multilam female connector for selfengaging connection of second PE conductor in transmitter rack 3 = Ground bolt (M5) for connection of second PE conductor at test station Amplifier control All control functions in the TX9 transmitters are executed by means of CAN commands via the X11 interface. System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 80 R&S TMU9 Amplifier R&S PMU901 Design and Function R&S PMU901 5.1.4 Circuit Descriptions 5.1.4.1 Block Diagram Fig. 5-5: Block diagram of R&S PMU901 5.1.4.2 Signal Gain in Preamplifier and Driver The entire signal gain process takes place on the amplifier board (module A2). It goes though the following steps in the preamplifier and driver. The RF input signal passes from the amplifier input X10 on the rear panel of the instrument along the RF line W10 and into the preamplifier, which is under an RFshielded cover. In the preamplifier, the signal passes through the following components in sequence:

Amplitude regulator Smallsignal amplifier Phase regulator This is followed by an LDMOS transistor stage (BLF642, singleended, A mode) as a preliminary driver. System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 81 R&S TMU9 Amplifier R&S PMU901 Design and Function R&S PMU901 The signal leaves the preamplifier and is fed to the input of the driver amplifier via the cable W145x. This input consists of two singleended LDMOS transistor stages which are interconnected by means of 90 jumpers. The two transistor halves of the BLF888B pushpull transistor are used for this purpose. The cable W145x is also used for phase adjustment (in the case of design modifica-

tions or for tolerance adjustment). It connects the connectors X301 and X400. The output signal of the driver is fed to the outputstage splitter via a harmonic filter. This filter is used especially at low frequencies to suppress the first harmonic. The cable W145x must not be removed and should only be replaced with a cable with the same R&S part number. Failure to observe this point can result in destruction of absorbers of the power combiner in the transmitter (if more than one amplifier is installed). 5.1.4.3 Signal Gain in Doherty-Capable Output Stage The output stage is divided into two groups, each with three transistors. In Doherty mode, one group forms the main amplifier (3 x BLF888B) and the other forms the auxiliary amplifier (3 x BLF888A). If the two groups have equal priority, however, they can also form a conventional output stage. The following steps take place in the output stage:

The output signal of the driver is fed via a 90 splitter to two outputstage groups each with three transistors. The two power streams are divided between the three transistors of each out-

putstage group via a 0 splitter. The outputstage group which forms the main ampli-

fier in Doherty mode uses BLF888B transistors, and the outputstage group for the auxiliary amplifier uses BLF888A transistors. Two 0 combiners combine each group of three partial power streams and make them available at the inputs of a 2way power combiner ready for addition. The tunit connected at the power combiner determines the operating mode of the amplifier:

Conventional broadband AB mode in the normal installation position Doherty mode if the tunit is turned through 180 Directional couplers upstream of the RF output of the amplifier (downstream of the 2way power combiner) detect forward and reflected power. Their signals are fed to RF detectors. A further directional coupler provides two free decoupled RF test points

(RF MONITOR, ADE OUT) via a small splitter. The operating points of the transistors of the main and auxiliary amplifier can be set separately. In Doherty mode, the main amplifier operates in AB mode and the auxiliary amplifier in C mode. When the amplifier operates as a conventional broadband amplifier, all of its outputstage transistors operate in AB mode. System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 82 R&S TMU9 5.1.4.4 Power Control Amplifier R&S PMU901 Design and Function R&S PMU901 To ensure that the required power is always present at the amplifier output, the level tolerances at the following points are adjusted by means of a power control circuit. at the amplifier output at the entire RF amplifier stage During power control, a control amplifier which is on the amplifier board (module A2, preamplifier section) is supplied with an actual voltage and a nominal voltage. The nom-

inal voltage is the VREF_PWR signal which is fed as a CAN command and is used to adjust the output power. Intelligent control brake In the case of the R&S PMU901 with the special outputstage architecture necessary for the Doherty operating mode, it is not possible to apply the control principle with transis-

torfailure tolerance which is traditionally used at Rohde & Schwarz and features two independent actual value detectors downstream of the subamplifiers with the same out-

put power. The PWR_OUT signal which is proportional to the sum output power is used as the actual value for control. In order to still retain tolerance with regard to transistor failures, the principle of the "intelligent control brake" is applied (IPLIM = Intelligent Power LIMiter). Here, the adjustment range of the control amplifier is simply limited adaptively in such a way that overloading of the intact transistors in the event of a transistor failure cannot result in their failure. The control brake therefore always adapts to the current conditions in the control circuit. This principle exploits the fact that changes in gain and input signal which are the result of temperature and aging take place only slowly. The manipulated variable (the regulating voltage of the PIN attenuator) is recorded at long intervals. The control brake (i.e. the maximum possible value for the regulating volt-

age) is derived from the measured value plus the difference which is not exceeded until the next measurement, provided that normal temperature and aging processes exist. This means that the control brake will also increase slowly if, for example, the gain drops with increasing temperature and the regulating voltage of the PIN attenuator increases in order to maintain the output power. In the case of dramatic changes resulting from transistor failure or dramatic changes in the input signal, adaptation of the control brake with respect to this is stopped and the control brake thus becomes fully effective. The amplifier control now analyzes the current situation without disturbance and responds according to the determined cause. If the cause is, for example, a transistor failure, the amplifier control adapts the nominal regulation value according to the remain-

ing performance of the amplifier. In this way, a stabilized condition is achieved, albeit with reduced output power. At power ON and if the nominal regulation value is changed, the control brake is of course stopped briefly. Reflected power test point In the case of reflection at the amplifier output, the forward power is reduced in order to protect the amplifier. For this purpose, the REFL_SAVE signal is acquired at the reflected power test point. This signal is superimposed on the actual value signal during power control by means of a diode. If the REFL_SAVE signal exceeds the voltage of the forward System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 83 R&S TMU9 Amplifier R&S PMU901 Design and Function R&S PMU901 power detector PWR_OUT, the reflected power test point takes over power control. The control amplifier supplies the control voltage V_REG as the output quantity and this volt-

age is fed to the amplitude regulator in the preamplifier. Additionally, the REFL_OUT signal is acquired at the reflected power test point. This signal together with the PWR_OUT signal (forward power) is used for VSWR indication at the amplifier output. 5.1.4.5 SelfProtection Mechanisms The amplifier has a series of selfprotection and monitoring mechanisms which protect it against irreparable damage in the case of impermissible operating conditions and enable transmission to continue for as long as possible. The following mechanisms are available. Power supply monitoring Input level monitoring Output power limitation Temperature monitoring incl. fan control Reflection monitoring Operating mode monitoring Power supply unit monitoring The power supply unit has the following selfprotection mechanisms:

Overtemperature shutdown for the duration of overtemperature Shortcircuit current limitation Input voltage monitor (enables shutdown to limit the input current in the case of undervoltage) Overvoltage limitation (on DC side) If no standby power supply unit is installed, failure of the power supply unit (/

DC_OK = high) will mean failure of the amplifier. If a standby power supply unit is installed, there will be no operational restrictions. The amplifier will however be completely deac-

tivated if both power supply units fail. The overtemperature shutdown in the power supply is intended purely as a selfprotection mechanism only and is not indicated by the front LED as the DC voltage is switched off. A temperature shutdown at the power supply is signaled only indirectly by the message /

DC_OK_x. The power supply unit has status LEDs for normal operation and fault indi-

cation. These LEDs are indirectly visible after removal of the front cover (and, where applicable, the air filter). Input level monitoring If the input level drops below a defined threshold (RF_IN_FAIL), power control is influ-

enced by the following measures:

The amplitude regulator for power control is switched to maximum attenuation The internal reference voltage for power control is suppressed System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 84 R&S TMU9 Amplifier R&S PMU901 Design and Function R&S PMU901 A soft start is performed as soon as the input signal returns. The selected threshold is such that the amplifier can be reliably operated across the entire temperature range in all permissible operating modes, even at the lower tolerance limit of the RF_IN input signal at X10. Output power limitation The output power is set by means of the VREF_PWR signal. The output power is limited such that the amplifier cannot be damaged at excessively high VREF_PWR values. In addition, the average output power of the amplifier is also limited by means of hardware. Excessive power if the forward power test point fails as well as subsequent failures if a transistor fails are countered by the intelligent control brake. Temperature monitoring and fan control The power supply units and amplifier circuit each have a dedicated hardware overtem-

perature shutdown mechanism. If a temperature threshold is exceeded, the amplifier is disabled (TEMP_FAIL message), whereby the threshold for the overtemperature shut-

down is above the permissible operating temperature. This ensures that the remaining overall power loss does not lead to overheating of the instrument, even with total failure of the cooling system. The fan has four different speed settings, whereby the second speed is the standard speed which has been optimized with regard to the average junction temperature of the output stage and to noise generation. To ensure that transmission can continue for as long as possible, the temperature and fan control functions work together as follows:

If the temperature rises in the amplifier circuit, the fan speed is first increased before the hardware shutdown threshold is reached. If this is not enough, at temperatures above 83 C the amplifier control begins to reduce the output power in steps of 1 dB (DTV only, REDUCED_PWR message). With ATV, the output power is not reduced at excessively high temperatures. Instead, the amplifier is shut down by means of software at 85 C. At temperatures above 90 C, the amplifier remains switched off by means of hard-

ware for as long as the overtemperature exists. Overtemperature on the amplifier board is indicated by means of the front TEMP FAIL LED (with ATV: at 85 C and higher). An appropriate hysteresis is integrated to prevent deactivation and activation from occurring too soon. A soft start is performed as soon as power returns. In addition, the inlet and outlet temperature is measured by means of two sensors (on the front and rear side of the amplifier board, thermally insulated from the rest of the printed board). This allows, for example, a fouled air filter to be detected and changed in good time (AIR_FILT_FAIL message). Reflection monitoring A distinction is made between the following types of reflection monitoring (REFLECTION message):

System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 85 R&S TMU9 Amplifier R&S PMU901 Design and Function R&S PMU901 With major reflection above reflection threshold 2 (s = 2), the power is briefly cut off completely first of all; a soft start is performed immediately afterwards. If any reflection remains, the amplifier protects itself by reducing the output power. The time constant selected for the shutdown is such that damage to the amplifier is prevented in the case of total reflection and at all phase angles of the reflection at X2. With weaker reflection above reflection threshold 1 (S = 1.5), the output power is reduced without preceding shutdown. When reflection no longer exists, the power reduction is canceled automatically. Operating mode monitoring Using a 5bit code (FREQ_ID), the transmitter notifies the amplifier of the expected oper-

ating mode and, in Doherty mode, the expected tuning variant (transmit frequency). If this code is not the same as the code of the tunit installed in the amplifier, the amplifier ignores the ON command and signals FREQ_FAIL. For conventional broadband operation, the FREQ_ID is 00000. If no tunit is installed, the amplifier signals FREQ_ID 11111. All other FREQ_IDs are reserved for Doherty mode. 5.1.4.6 Emergency Shutdown The amplifier can be disabled externally by means of the SHUT_DOWN signal at X11, for example to ensure selfprotection for the absorber of the power combiner in the trans-

mitter. The signal, which is immune to cable breaks, is fed via an optocoupler on CAN_GND and is therefore insulated from amplifier ground. The output power is sup-

pressed for as long as no connection to CAN_GND exists. To activate the amplifier when the R&S GT800A1 test box is being used, it is necessary to connect X20 (GND) to X21 on the test box. 5.1.5 Specifications 5.1.5.1 General Data Frequency range 470 MHz to 862 MHz (band 4 and 5) Power supply (3 separate phases)

- Nominal voltage range

- Tolerance range

- Nominal frequency range

- Tolerance range Power factor (cos) 200 V to 240 V 170 V to 264 V 50 Hz to 60 Hz 47 Hz to 63 Hz 0.98 at nominal power System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 86 R&S TMU9 Amplifier R&S PMU901 Design and Function R&S PMU901 Operating temperature range (Turoom) Inlet air temperature (Tinlet air) Storage and transport temperature range Setting range for amplifier phase (via CAN) Harmonics

- up to 550 MHz

- as of 550 MHz VSWR RF input (X10) VSWR RF output (X2)

- compliance with specifications

- reduction

+1 C to +45 C

+1 C to +45 C

-40 C to +85 C 12.5 to 17.5

-30 dBc

-50 dBc 1.4 1.3 as of 1.60.3 Overtemperature shutdown 90 C 4 K (sensor on heat sink) Permissible humidity Ambient conditions Maximum installation altitude above sea level Vibration, sinewave Vibration, random Shock 95 % at 40 C, noncyclical, noncondensing Complies with ETSI EN 30001913

(V2.3.2 200907) Class 3.2 with reduced ambient temperature and humidity range 2000 m (higher on request; power supply units up to 3000 m) 5 Hz to 150 Hz, max. 1.8 g at 55 Hz, max. 0.5 g at 55 Hz to 150 Hz in line with EN60068-2-6, EN61010-1 10 Hz to 300 Hz Acceleration 1.2 g (rms) Shock spectrum 40 g/11 ms to MILSTD 810E Method No. 516.4 Dimensions (depth, width, height) 550 mm, 153 mm, 19'' (3.5 HU) Weight

< 25 kg 5.1.5.2 Digital TV (DTV) Input power Pavgnominal (DVBT / ATSC) Maximum input power Pavg,in Control range (DVBT / ATSC) Detector setting (signal PEAK_AV, X11) 0 dBm / 1 dBm

+13 dBm

-6 dBm to +6 dBm / +5 dBm to +7 dBm Low (AV) Output power Pavgnominal (VREF_PWR = 4 V) 600 W System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 87 R&S TMU9 Amplifier R&S PMU901 Design and Function R&S PMU901 Setting range for output power referenced to Pavgnominal

-10 dB to +1.2 dB Output power DVBT, Pavg (nominal value / maximum value) Output power ATSC, Pavg (nominal value / maximum value) 600 W / 700 W; Doherty: 600 W / 650 W*

750 W / 750 W; Doherty: 600 W / 650 W*

Shoulder attenuation at Pavgnominal (without precor-

rection / with precorrection)

+26 dB / +37 dB MER with DVBT, Pavgnominal (shoulder precorrected

> 37 dB) 33 dB Power consumption:

- at 230 V, DVBT, 650 W

- at 230 V, ATSC, 750 W 3000 VA (Doherty: 2000 VA) 3000 VA

* Depends on MER and channel 5.1.5.3 Analog TV (ATV Combined) Input power Psyncnominal Maximum input power Pavg,in Control range Psync,in

+3.5 dBm

+13 dBm

-2.5 dBm to +9.5 dBm Detector setting (signal PEAK_AV, X11) High (PEAK) Output power Psyncnominal (VREF_PWR = 4 V) Output power Pavg,max Setting range for output power referenced to Psyncnominal Power consumption at 1000 W:

- at 230 V, APL = 0 % (allblack picture)

- at 230 V, APL = 50 % (gray picture) 1000 W 675 W

-10 dB to +0 dB 3000 VA 2400 VA 5.1.5.4 CW Mode Input power Pavgnominal Maximum input power Pavg,in Control range Pavg,in

+1 dBm

+13 dBm

-5 dBm to +7 dBm Detector setting (signal PEAK_AV, X11) Low (AV) System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 88 R&S TMU9 Amplifier R&S PMU901 Design and Function R&S PMU901 Output power Pavgnominal Power consumption: at 230 V, CW, 600 W 675 W 2500 VA System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 89 R&S TMU9 Amplifier R&S PMU901 Design and Function R&S PMU901 System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 90 R&S TMU9 R&S TMU9 Interface Description External Transmitter Interfaces A R&S TMU9 Interface Description A.1 External Transmitter Interfaces A.1.1 Transmitter Input AC Table 1-1: Q1: Supply input Signal Name/Description Line L1 Line L2 Line L3 Neutral N Direc-

tion Input Input Input Input Value range 230 V 15%

230 V 15%

230 V 15%

0 V Connection point Remarks Q1.2 Q1.4 Q1.6 Q1.8/N 230 V L-N 230 V L-N 230 V L-N Neutral conductor input N Table 1-2: Q1: Protective conductor terminal Signal Name/Description PROTECTION EARTH PE PROTECTION EARTH PE Direc-

tion Input Input Value range Connection point Remarks 0 V 0 V X.PE.1 X.PE PE terminal NVT Station PE The mains distribution unit designed for the TMU9 is limited to 230 V power supplies. AC power supply: 230 V; 2W + PE (L1/N/PE) AC power supply: 400 V / 230 V; 4W + PE (L1/L2/L3/N/PE) All other network configurations can be covered by the optional use of the R&S ZR800Z10 mains distribution unit:

AC power supply: 230 V; 2W + PE (L1/N/PE) AC power supply: 240 V; 2W + PE (L1/L2/PE) AC power supply: 400 V / 230 V; 4W + PE (L1/L2/L3/N/PE) AC power supply: 208 V Y; 3W + PE (L1/L2/L3/PE) AC power supply: 240 V Y; 3W + PE (L1/L2/L3/PE) AC power supply: 240 V delta; 3W + PE (L1/L2/L3/PE) A.1.2 Input Signals (TS, RF, Reference) The following interfaces are present again with each additional signal processing and therefore are listed only once at the transmitter level. System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 91 R&S TMU9 R&S TMU9 Interface Description External Transmitter Interfaces With dual drive, another TS splitter (dual drive) is put upstream of the signal pro-

cessing modules (TCE900 exciter). With N+1 systems, a TS splitter (N+1) is put upstream of the signal processing mod-

ule(s) (TCE900 exciter) of the transmitter(s) TxA, and another ASI routing switch is put upstream of the signal processing module(s) (TCE900 exciter) of the transmit-

ter(s) TxB. TS feed (ASI, IP) Table 1-3: X20 TS1 in: BNC jack 75 Direc-

Signal tion Name/Description Value range Connection point Remarks TS1 GND Input ASI / SMPTE310M Bidirec-

tional 0 V X20.1 X20.2 TS1 input exciter GND / shield Table 1-4: X21 TS2 in: BNC jack 75 Direc-

Signal tion Name/Description Value range Connection point Remarks TS2 GND Input ASI / SMPTE310M Bidirec-

tional 0 V X21.1 X21.2 TS2 Input Exciter GND / shield Table 1-5: X30 TS1 LAN: 8-pin RJ-45 socket Signal Name/Description Direc-

tion Value range Connection point Remarks TX+

TX-

RX+

RX-

Output Ethernet Output Ethernet Input Ethernet 75 termination 75 termination X32.5 Input Ethernet 75 termination 75 termination X32.8 Bidirec-

tional Bidirec-

tional Bidirec-

tional Bidirec-

tional X32.1 X32.2 X32.3 X32.4 X32.6 X32.7 Transmitting line Transmitting line Receiving line Receiving line System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 92 R&S TMU9 R&S TMU9 Interface Description External Transmitter Interfaces Table 1-6: X31 TS2 LAN: 8-pin RJ-45 socket Signal Name/Description Direc-

tion Value range Connection point Remarks TX+

TX-

RX+

RX-

Output Ethernet Output Ethernet Input Ethernet Bidirec-

tional Bidirec-

tional 75 termination 75 termination X33.5 X33.1 X33.2 X33.3 X33.4 Transmitting line Transmitting line Receiving line Input Ethernet Bidirec-

tional Bidirec-

tional 75 75 X33.6 X33.7 X33.8 Receiving line Receiver module (optional) Table 1-7: X69 RF IN DVB-T2 Receiver: BNC jack 50 Signal Name/Description Value range Direc-

tion ANTENNA 1 Input 30 MHz to 1 GHz

-92 dBm to 0 dBm 75 Connection point Remarks X69.1 RF input BNC jack GND Bidirec-

tional 0 V X69.2 Reference feed Table 1-8: X66 GPS ANTENNA: SMA socket 50 Signal Name/Description Direc-

tion Value range Connection point Remarks GPS ANT GND Input

-144 dBm to -5 dBm X66.1 50 SMA socket Bidirec-

tional 0 V X66.2 Table 1-9: X23 1PPS IN exciter: BNC jack 50 Signal Name/Description Direc-

tion Value range Connection point Remarks 1PPS_EXTERN Input TTL level (pos.edge) X23.1 Seconds pulse from external GPS receiver GND Bidirec-

tional 0 V X23.2 GND / shield System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 93 R&S TMU9 R&S TMU9 Interface Description External Transmitter Interfaces Table 1-10: X64 REF IN: BNC jack 50 Signal Name/Description Direc-

tion Value range Connection point Remarks REF IN GND Input

-5.0 dBm to 20 dBm or TTL X64.1 50 BNC jack Bidirec-

tional X64.2 GND / shield A.1.3 Transmitter Output Table 1-11: Transmitter RF output: Connection depending on transmitter output power Signal Name/Description Tx RF output Direc-

tion Output Value range Connection point Remarks RF DVB-T; ATSC PAVG = 200 W to 2.85 kW ATV PAVG = 400 W to 4.75 kW 470 MHz to 862 MHz RF output on the transmitter roof 1 5/8"

EIA upstream of channel filter GND Bidirec-

tional RF GND / shield A.1.4 Monitoring Signals (TS, RF, Reference) The monitoring signals for transport stream, reference frequency, 1PPS, and local oscil-

lator are directly implemented at the exciters. The RF test point is accessible at the direc-

tional coupler on the rear side of the rack. With the "Front test points" option, the moni-

toring interfaces are wired to the front of the transmitter. Table 1-12: X22 TS MONITOR OUT: BNC jack 75 Signal Name/Description Connection point Value range Direc-

tion Remarks TS MON OUT Output ASI / SMPTE310M GND Bidirec-

tional X22.1 X22.2 Ri = 75 GND / shield Table 1-13: X24 REF MONITOR: BNC jack 50 Signal Name/Description Direc-

tion Value range REF MON GND Output TTL level Bidirec-

tional 0 V Connection point Remarks X24.1 X24.2 Reference monitor-

ing exciter GND / shield System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 94 R&S TMU9 R&S TMU9 Interface Description Internal Transmitter Interfaces Table 1-14: X61 RF measurement output DTV exciter n: SMA socket 50 Signal Name/Description Connection point Value range Direc-

tion Remarks RF MONITOR OUT Output

-7 dBm 2 dB GND Bidirec-

tional X61.1 X61.2 RF OUT monitoring for exciter A GND / shield A.1.5 Remote interfaces Table 1-15: X2 LAN remote (1000BaseT): 8-pin RJ-45 socket Signal Name/Description Direc-

tion Value range Connection point Remarks TX+

TX-

RX+

RX-

Output Ethernet Output Ethernet Input Ethernet Bidirec-

tional Bidirec-

tional 75 termination 75 termination Input Ethernet Bidirec-

tional Bidirec-

tional 75 termination 75 termination X2.1 X2.2 X2.3 X2.4 X2.5 X2.6 X2.7 X2.8 Transmitting line Transmitting line Receiving line Receiving line A.2 Internal Transmitter Interfaces A.2.1 Internal RF Interfaces Table 1-16: Single transmitter with one amplifier Signal Name/Description W1160A Direc-

tion Value range 470 MHz to 862 MHz 4 dBm DTV 1 dBm Sync Peak ATV Connection point X60/X10 Remarks RF signal from the TCE900 to input of amplifier System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 95 R&S TMU9 R&S TMU9 Interface Description Internal Transmitter Interfaces Table 1-17: Backup exciter / dual drive with one amplifier Signal Name/Description W1160A W1160B W1160C Direc-

tion Value range 470 MHz to 862 MHz 4 dBm DTV 1 dBm Sync Peak ATV 470 MHz to 862 MHz 4 dBm DTV 1 dBm Sync Peak ATV 470 MHz to 862 MHz 3 dBm DTV 0 dBm Sync Peak ATV Table 1-18: Single transmitter with more than one amplifier Signal Name/Description W1160A W307A to E Wxx Direc-

tion Value range 470 MHz to 862 MHz 13 dBm DTV 14 dBm Sync Peak ATV 470 MHz to 862 MHz 3 dBm DTV 4 dBm Sync Peak ATV 470 MHz to 862 MHz PAVG 57.75 dBm 470 MHz to 862 MHz PAVG 2 amps =

60.57 dBm PAVG 3 amps =

62.33 dBm PAVG 4 amps =

63.58 dBm PAVG 5 amps =

64.55 dBm Connection point X60 / X60A X60 / X60B X60 / X10 Remarks RF signal from pro-

gram exciter / exciter A to input X60A of the exciter switch RF signal from con-

trol exciter / exciter B to input X60B of the exciter switch RF signal from output X60C of the exciter switch to RF input of the amplifier Connection point X60 / X.E Remarks RF signal from exciter to input of splitter X.A1 to A5 /

X10 RF signal from output of splitter to the inputs of 2 to 5 ampli-

fiers X2 / X.E1 to E5 RF signal from out-

puts of 2 to 5 amplifi-

ers to the coupler inputs X.A RF signal from cou-

pler output to antenna (optionally to bandpass filter) System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 96 R&S TMU9 R&S TMU9 Interface Description Internal Transmitter Interfaces Table 1-19: Backup exciter / dual drive with more than one amplifier Signal Name/Description W1160A W1160B W1160C W307A to E Connection point X60 / X60A X60 / X60B X60C / X.E X.A1 to A5 /

X10 Remarks RF signal from pro-

gram exciter / exciter A to input X60A of the exciter switch RF signal from con-

trol exciter / exciter B to input X60B of the exciter switch RF signal from output X60C of the exciter switch to input of the splitter RF signal from output of splitter to the inputs of 2 to 5 ampli-

fiers X2 / X.E1 to E5 RF signal from out-

puts of 2 to 5 amplifi-

ers to the coupler inputs X.A RF signal from cou-

pler output to antenna (optionally to bandpass filter) Direc-

tion Value range 470...862 MHz 13 dBm DTV 14 dBm Sync Peak ATV 470...862 MHz 13 dBm DTV 14 dBm Sync Peak ATV 470...862 MHz 12 dBm DTV 13 dBm Sync Peak ATV 470...862 MHz 3 dBm DTV 0 dBm Sync Peak ATV 470 MHz to 862 MHz Peff, nom 57.75 dBm 470 MHz to 862 MHz PAVG 2 amps =

60.57 dBm PAVG 3 amps =

62.33 dBm PAVG 4 amps =

63.58 dBm PAVG 5 amps =

64.55 dBm A.2.2 Internal Ethernet Interfaces Table 1-20: Dual Drive Signal Name/Description W1041 W1042 Direc-

tion Bidirec-

tional Bidirec-

tional Value range Connection point X41 / X7 X42 / X7 Remarks LAN LOCAL from system control to exciter A LAN LOCAL from system control to exciter B System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 97 R&S TMU9 R&S TMU9 Interface Description Internal Transmitter Interfaces A.2.3 Transmitter Control Bus (CAN bus) Table 1-21: X6 TX (CAN bus, 9-pin Sub-D socket) Signal Name/Description Direc-

tion Value range Connection point Remarks n.c. CAN_L CAN_GND n.c. CAN_SHLD GND CAN_H n.c. CAN_V+

Bidirec-

tional Bidirec-

tional Bidirec-

tional Bidirec-

tional Bidirec-

tional CAN-Level 0 V GND GND CAN+Level Bidirec-

tional 12 V 1 V X6.1 X6.2 X6.3 X6.4 X6.5 X6.6 X6.7 X6.8 X6.9 CAN bus signal CAN GND Shield GND CAN bus signal A.2.4 RF Loops Table 1-22: X41 RF loop:

Signal Name/Description MAIN TX LOOP LOOP COM (+) RESERVE TX LOOP LOOP COM (+) Direc-

tion Value range Connection point Remarks

+12 V 2 V

+12 V 2 V

+12 V 2 V

+12 V 2 V X41.1 X41.2 X41.3 X41.4

-12 V floating

+12 V floating

-12 V floating

+12 V floating A.2.5 TSP900 Display Interface Table 1-23: DVI interface Signal Name/Description W1014 Direc-

tion Value range Data lines Power supply GND Connection point Remarks X14/X3 USB interface to the TSP900 System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 98 R&S TMU9 R&S TMU9 Interface Description Internal Transmitter Interfaces A.2.6 TDU900 Display Interfaces (Optional) Table 1-24: DVI interface Signal Name/Description W1015 Table 1-25: Terminal supply Signal Name/Description W1012 Table 1-26: LAN LOCAL Signal Name/Description W1043 Table 1-27: USB 2.0 Signal Name/Description W1014 Direc-

tion Value range Data lines, clock lines Power supply Shielding, GND Connection point X15 / X1 Remarks DVI connecting cable between TCE (IPS board) and TDU900 display Direc-

tion Value range Power supply GND Connection point X12 / X1 Remarks 12 V power supply for the TDU900 Direc-

tion Value range Connection point Remarks Data lines X7 or X43 Direc-

tion Value range Data lines Power supply GND Connection point X14 / X3 Connection of the local Ethernet inter-

face at the front LAN connection of the TDU900 Remarks USB interface to the TDU900 and connec-

tion of the front USB connection (on the back of the display) A.2.7 Air Cooling Interface (Optional) Table 1-28: X46: FAN 1 (15-pin cable, transfer point in the rack for splitting into individual cables for exhaust fan control, temperature, pressure) Signal Name/Description CTRL_FAN1 SPEED_FAN1 Direc-

tion Value range Connection point Remarks Output 0 V to 10 V or PWM X46.4 Input Open collector, 1 pulse per revolution X46.12 Speed control for exhaust fan 1 Speed output for exhaust fan 1, 1 pulse per revolution System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 99 R&S TMU9 R&S TMU9 Interface Description Internal Transmitter Interfaces Signal Name/Description 10V_FAN1 GND Direc-

tion Value range Connection point Remarks Input 10 V (max. 1.1 mA) X46.11 10 V voltage output Exhaust fan 1 Bidirec-

tional X46.5 PRESSURE_1 Input 4 mA to 20 mA X46.14 Measured value from differential pressure sensor 1 GND TEMP_IN GND Bidirec-

tional X46.7 Input 4 mA to 20 mA X46.8 Measured value from the temperature sen-

sor at the rack input Bidirec-

tional X46.15 Table 1-29: X47: FAN 2 (15-pin cable, transfer point in the rack for splitting into individual cables for exhaust fan control, temperature, pressure) Signal Name/Description CTRL_FAN2 SPEED_FAN2 Direc-

tion Value range Connection point Remarks Output 0 V to 10 V or PWM X47.4 Input Open collector, 1 pulse per revolution X47.12 10V_FAN2 Input 10 V (max. 1.1 mA) X47.11 Speed control for exhaust fan 2 Speed output for exhaust fan 2, 1 pulse per revolution 10 V voltage output Exhaust fan 2 GND Bidirec-

tional X47.5 PRESSURE_2 Input 4 mA to 20 mA X47.14 Measured value from differential pressure sensor 2 GND Bidirec-

tional X47.7 TEMP_OUT Input 4 mA to 20 mA X47.8 Measured value from the temperature sen-

sor at the rack output GND DIG_IN GND Bidirec-

tional Input 0 V to 5 V Bidirec-

tional X47.15 X47.9 X47.1 Digital input for "Filter clogged" message System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 100 R&S TMU9 R&S TCE900 Interface Description Interfaces of Base Unit B R&S TCE900 Interface Description B.1 Interfaces of Base Unit B.1.1 X1: MAINS Signal Name Direction Value range Connection point Remarks L1 N PE Input Input Input 100V-240V AC, 50-60Hz10%

X1.L X1.N X1.PE Supply Input Supply Input Supply Input B.1.2 Interfaces of Main Computer IPS1 B.1.2.1 X2 LAN REMOTE Signal Name Direction Value range Connection point Remarks BI_DA+

BI_DA-

BI_DB+

BI_DB-

BI_DC+

BI_DC-

BI_DD+

BI_DD-

Bi-directional Vodiff= 670820mVss Bi-directional Vidiff= 750mVsstyp. Bi-directional Vodiff= 670820mVss Bi-directional Vidiff= 750mVsstyp. Bi-directional Vodiff= 670820mVss Bi-directional Vidiff= 750mVsstyp. Bi-directional Vodiff= 670820mVss Bi-directional Vidiff= 750mVsstyp. X2.1 X2.2 X2.3 X2.4 X2.5 X2.6 X2.7 X2.8 B.1.2.2 X14 USB 1 Signal Name Direction Value range

+5V USB USB Data-

Output Bi-directional Connection point Remarks X 14.1 X 14.2 System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 101 R&S TMU9 R&S TCE900 Interface Description Interfaces of Base Unit Signal Name Direction Value range USB Data+

GND Bi-directional Bi-directional Connection point Remarks X 14.3 X 14.4 B.1.2.3 X15 USB 2 Signal Name Direction Value range Connection point Remarks

+5V USB USB Data-

USB Data+

GND Output Bi-directional Bi-directional Bi-directional X 15.1 X 15.2 X 15.3 X 15.4 B.1.2.4 X11 DVI Signal Name Direction Value range Connection point Remarks Data 2-

Data 2+

Shielding data 2,4 Data 4-

Data 4+

DDC clock DDC data V-Sync Data 1-

Data 1+

Shielding Data 1,3 Data 3-

Data 3+

+5V GND Hotplug-Detect Data 0-

Data 0+

X 11.1 X 11.2 X 11.3 X 11.4 X 11.5 X 11.6 X 11.7 X 11.8 X 11.9 X 11.10 X 11.11 X 11.12 X 11.13 X 11.14 X 11.15 X 11.16 X 11.17 X 11.18 System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 102 R&S TMU9 R&S TCE900 Interface Description Interfaces of Base Unit Signal Name Direction Value range Connection point Remarks Shielding data 0,5 Data 5-

Data 5+

Shielding data Clock +

Clock -

Red Green Blue H-Sync GND X 11.19 X 11.20 X 11.21 X 11.22 X 11.23 X 11.24 X 11.C1 X 11.C2 X 11.C3 X 11.C4 X 11.C5 B.1.3 Interfaces of System Connection Boards (SCB) B.1.3.1 X3 LAN LOCAL FRONT Signal Name Direction Value range Connection point Remarks BI_DA+

BI_DA-

BI_DB+

BI_DB-

BI_DC+

BI_DC-

BI_DD+

BI_DD-

Bi-directional Vodiff= 670820mVss Bi-directional Vidiff= 750mVsstyp. Bi-directional Vodiff= 670820mVss Bi-directional Vidiff= 750mVsstyp. Bi-directional Vodiff= 670820mVss Bi-directional Vidiff= 750mVsstyp. Bi-directional Vodiff= 670820mVss Bi-directional Vidiff= 750mVsstyp. X3.1 X3.2 X3.3 X3.4 X3.5 X3.6 X3.7 X3.8 B.1.3.2 X7 LAN LOCAL REAR Signal Name Direction Value range Connection point Remarks BI_DA+

BI_DA-

Bi-directional Vodiff= 670820mVss Bi-directional Vidiff= 750mVsstyp. X7.1 X7.2 System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 103 R&S TMU9 R&S TCE900 Interface Description Interfaces of Base Unit Signal Name Direction Value range Connection point Remarks BI_DB+

BI_DB-

BI_DC+

BI_DC-

BI_DD+

BI_DD-

Bi-directional Vodiff= 670820mVss Bi-directional Vidiff= 750mVsstyp. Bi-directional Vodiff= 670820mVss Bi-directional Vidiff= 750mVsstyp. Bi-directional Vodiff= 670820mVss Bi-directional Vidiff= 750mVsstyp. X7.3 X7.4 X7.5 X7.6 X7.7 X7.8 B.1.3.3 X66 GPS ANTENNA Signal Name Direction Value range Connection point Remarks GPS ANTENNA Input

-144dBm ... -5dBm X66.1 50 SMA-Buchse GND Bi-directional 0V X66.2 B.1.3.4 X12 TERMINAL SUPPLY 12V, 1A Versorgung fr externes Display Typische Stromaufnahme der TDU900:

Background light DVI Signal USB connection on input side (no load) Ub on TDU900 12V Ub on TDU900 10,5V inactive active active active inactive inactive active active open open open 414mA 483mA connected with PC 530mA Signal Name Direction Value range TERMINA Output 12V +- 1,5V GND NC NC Bi-directional Connection point X12.1 X12.2 472mA 550mA 605mA Remarks Imax. = 1A X12.3 X12.4 System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 104 R&S TMU9 B.1.3.5 X6 TX R&S TCE900 Interface Description Module Slots

(CAN bus, proceted loop, 12V supply for systemcomponents, positions recogniction) Signal Name Direction Value range Connection point Remarks Position1 Input GND CAN_L CAN_H GND LOOP+

0V Bi-directional Bi-directional CAN-Bus Bi-directional CAN-Bus Bi-directional 0V Bi-directional LOOP-

Bi-directional Open -> protective loop open Connection to LOOP -

> protective loop closed Open -> protective loop open Connection to LOOP+

-> protective loop closed X6.1 X6.6 X6.2 X6.7 X6.3 X6.8 X6.4

+12V_RC Output

+12V +- 1,5V, max 1A X6.9 supply of system components Position2 Input X6.5 B.2 Module Slots B.2.1 Coder Board B.2.1.1 X30 TS LAN 1 Signal Name Direction Value range Connection point Remarks BI_DA+

BI_DA-

BI_DB+

BI_DB-

BI_DC+

Bi-directional Vodiff= 670820mVss X30.J1 Bi-directional Vidiff= 750mVsstyp. X30.J2 Bi-directional Vodiff= 670820mVss X30.J3 Bi-directional Vidiff= 750mVsstyp. X30.J4 Bi-directional Vodiff= 670820mVss X30.J5 System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 105 R&S TMU9 R&S TCE900 Interface Description Module Slots Signal Name Direction Value range Connection point Remarks BI_DC-

BI_DD+

BI_DD-

Bi-directional Vidiff= 750mVsstyp. X30.J6 Bi-directional Vodiff= 670820mVss X30.J7 Bi-directional Vidiff= 750mVsstyp. X30.J8 B.2.1.2 X31 TS LAN 2 Signal Name Direction Value range Connection point Remarks BI_DA+

BI_DA-

BI_DB+

BI_DB-

BI_DC+

BI_DC-

BI_DD+

BI_DD-

Bi-directional Vodiff= 670820mVss X31.J1 Bi-directional Vidiff= 750mVsstyp. X31.J2 Bi-directional Vodiff= 670820mVss X31.J3 Bi-directional Vidiff= 750mVsstyp. X31.J4 Bi-directional Vodiff= 670820mVss X31.J5 Bi-directional Vidiff= 750mVsstyp. X31.J6 Bi-directional Vodiff= 670820mVss X31.J7 Bi-directional Vidiff= 750mVsstyp. X31.J8 B.2.1.3 X23 1PPS IN Signal Name Direction Value range 1PPS_EXTERN Input TTL-level pos. edge Connection point X23.1 Remarks seconds pulse from external GPS-

receiver GND Bi-directional 0V X23.2 BNC-socket B.2.1.4 X24 REF MONITOR Signal Name Direction Value range 1REF_MON Output TTL-Pegel GND Bi-directional 0V Connection point X24.1 X24.2 Remarks BNC-socket System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 106 R&S TMU9 B.2.1.5 X20 TS1 IN R&S TCE900 Interface Description Module Slots Signal Name Direction Value range TS1 GND Input ASI, SMPTE310M /

ETI Bi-directional 0V Connection point X20.1 X20.2 Remarks Ri=75 BNC B.2.1.6 X21 TS2 IN Signal Name Direction Value range TS1 GND Input ASI , SMPTE310M /

ETI Bi-directional 0V Connection point Remarks X21.1 X21.2 Ri=75 BNC B.2.1.7 X22 TS MONITOR OUT Signal Name Direction Value range TS_MON Output ASI , SMPTE310M /

ETI GND Bi-directional 0V Connection point X22.1 X22.2 Remarks Ri=75 BNC B.2.2 RF Board B.2.2.1 X64 REF IN Signal Direction Value range Connection point EXT_REF_IN Input

-5 20 dBm oder TTL X64.1 Remarks 50R BNC-socket GND Bi-directional 0V X64.2 System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 107 R&S TMU9 B.2.2.2 X60 RF OUT R&S TCE900 Interface Description Module Slots Signal Name Direction Value range RF_OUT Output 13 dBm DTV 20 dBm Sync Peak ATV Connection point Remarks X60.1 50R SMA-socket GND Bi-directional 0V X60.2 B.2.2.3 X61 RF MONITOR OUT Signal Name Direction Value range RF_MON_OUT Output ATV / DVB 0 / -7 dBm 2dB GND Bi-directional Connection point X61.1 X61.2 Remarks Z = 50 Ohm SMA-socket B.2.2.4 X67 RF DOWNCONVERTER 1 IN For automatic non-linear equalization for DTV, ATV / HF-surveillant for ATV Signal Name Direction Value range RF_DOWN-

CONVERTER_1 Input

+7 dBm (-2

+1dB) DTV

+13dBm Sync.Peak (- 2

+1dB) ATV Connection point X67.1 Remarks 50R SMA-socket GND Bi-directional 0V X67.2 B.2.2.5 X68 RF DOWNCONVERTER 2 IN For automatic linear equalization / quality monitoring of the output signal Signal Name Direction Value range RF_DOWN-

CONVERTER_2 Input

+7 dBm (-2

+1dB) DTV

+13dBm Sync.Peak (- 2

+1dB) ATV Connection point X68.1 Remarks 50R SMA-socket GND Bi-directional 0V X68.2 System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 108 R&S TMU9 R&S TCE900 Interface Description Module Slots B.2.3 Tx Interface B.2.3.1 X40 LAN 1 Ethernet Port P0 Signal Name Direction Value range TX+ (D1+) Bi-directional TX- (D1-) Bi-directional RX+ (D2+) Bi-directional

-1 V +1 V Differential to TX+

Impedance: 100

-1 V +1 V Differential to TX+

Impedance: 100

-1 V +1 V Differential to RX+

Impedance: 100 D3+

D3-

RX- (D2-) Bi-directional

-1 V +1 V Differential to RX+

Impedance: 100 D4+

D4-

B.2.3.2 X41 LAN 2 Ethernet Port P1 Signal Name Direction Value range TX+ (D1+) Bi-directional TX- (D1-) Bi-directional RX+ (D2+) Bi-directional

-1 V +1 V Differential to TX+

Impedance: 100

-1 V +1 V Differential to TX+

Impedance: 100

-1 V +1 V Differential to RX+

Impedance: 100 Connection point X40.J1 X40.J2 X40.J3 X40.J4 X40.J5 X40.J6 X40.J7 X40.J8 Connection point X41.J1 X41.J2 X41.J3 D3+

X41.J4 Remarks Remarks System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 109 R&S TMU9 R&S TCE900 Interface Description Module Slots Signal Name Direction Value range Connection point Remarks D3-

RX- (D2-) D4+

D4-

Bi-directional

-1 V +1 V Differential to RX+

Impedance: 100 X41.J5 X41.J6 X41.J7 X41.J8 B.2.3.3 X42 LAN 3 Ethernet Port P2 Signal Name Direction Value range TX+ (D1+) Bi-directional TX- (D1-) Bi-directional RX+ (D2+) Bi-directional

-1 V +1 V Differential to TX+

Impedance: 100

-1 V +1 V Differential to TX+

Impedance: 100

-1 V +1 V Differential to RX+

Impedance: 100 D3+

D3-

RX- (D2-) Bi-directional

-1 V +1 V Differential to RX+

Impedance: 100 D4+

D4-

Connection point X42.J1 X42.J2 X42.J3 X42.J4 X42.J5 X42.J6 X42.J7 X42.J8 Remarks B.2.3.4 X43 LAN 4 Ethernet Port P3 System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 110 R&S TMU9 R&S TCE900 Interface Description Module Slots Signal Name Direction Value range TX+ (D1+) Bi-directional TX- (D1-) Bi-directional RX+ (D2+) Bi-directional

-1 V +1 V Differential to TX+

Impedance: 100

-1 V +1 V Differential to TX+

Impedance: 100

-1 V +1 V Differential to RX+

Impedance: 100 D3+

D3-

RX- (D2-) Bi-directional

-1 V +1 V Differential to RX+

Impedance: 100 D4+

D4-

Connection point X43.J1 X43.J2 X43.J3 X43.J4 X43.J5 X43.J6 X43.J7 X43.J8 Remarks B.2.3.5 X44 Power Distributor Sub D15 Signal Name Direction Value range OVERVOLTAGE_1 Input 0 V / 12 V Connection point X44.1 OVERVOLTAGE_3 OVERVOLTAGE_5 OVERVOLTAGE_7 Input Input Input s. X44.1 s. X44.1 s. X44.1 GND_FLOAT (out) Output 0 V COOLING_DL1 Output

+12V_FLOAT (out) Output 0 V30 VDC;

2 A max., 60 W max. 12 V 20%, max. 320 mA (Total current with X45.7 and internal con-

sumption on BG) X44.2 X44.3 X44.4 X44.5 X44.6 X44.7 Remarks GND_FLOAT for OK

+12V_FLOAT for Error s. X44.1 s. X44.1 s. X44.1 Galvanically seper-

ated external power sup-

ply Closed contact for CoolingON Galvanically seper-

ated external power sup-

ply System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 111 R&S TMU9 R&S TCE900 Interface Description Module Slots Signal Name Direction Value range Connection point Remarks EXT_VOLT-

AGE_MONITORING OVERVOLTAGE_2 OVERVOLTAGE_4 OVERVOLTAGE_6 OVERVOLTAGE_8 Input Input Input Input Input COOLING_DL2 D Output 0 V30 V s. X44.1 s. X44.1 s. X44.1 s. X44.1 0 V30 VDC;

2 A max., 60 W max. EXT_DOORCON-

TACT Input 0 V / 12V X44.8 X44.9 X44.10 X44.11 X44.12 X44.13 X44.14 EXT_SWITCHOVER I D D Input 0 V / 12 V X44.15 GND GND X44.M1 X44.M2 B.2.3.6 X45 Rf Switch PAR IO Monitoring of an external voltage s. X44.1 s. X44.1 s. X44.1 s. X44.1 Closed contact for CoolingON GND_FLOAT for closed

+12V_FLOAT for open GND_FLOAT for Switchover desired

+12V_FLOAT for Switchover not desired shielding material shielding material Signal Name Direction Value range Connection point Remarks POS1/2_TX1 Input OPEN / 0 V / 12 V X45.1 STATUS_POS1/2_TX3 STATUS_POS1/2_TX5 CON-

TROL_SWITCH_POS1 Input Input Output X45.2 X45.3 X45.4 s. X45.1 s. X45.1 0 V 28 V, 1.35 W max. (external ser-

ies resistor neces-

sary) GND_FLOAT (out) Output 0 V X45.5 Indicator position HF-

switch and USV-dis-

turbance OPEN for open 0 V for Pos2 12 V for Pos1 s. X45.1 s. X45.1 Open Collector against GND galvanically seper-

ated external power sup-

ply System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 112 R&S TMU9 R&S TCE900 Interface Description Module Slots Signal Name Direction Value range Connection point Remarks GPO2 OD D X45.6 Output 0 V / 12 V X45.6

+12V_FLOAT (out) Output X45.7 12 V 20%, max. 320 mA (total cur-

rent with X44.7 and internal consump-

tion on BG) USV_ERROR Input 0 V / 12 V X45.8 STATUS_POS1/2_TX2 STATUS_POS1/2_TX4 STATUS_POS1/2_TX6 CON-

TROL_SWITCH_POS2 Input Input Input Output X45.9 X45.10 X45.11 X45.12 s. X45.1 s. X45.1 s. X45.1 0 V 28 V, 1.35 W max. (external ser-

ies resistor neces-

sary) GPO1 Output 0 V /12 V X45.13

+12V (out) Output X45.14

+12 V 5%, max. 1.1 A (total input current in BG <2A and backplane < 7A has to be adhered to) GPI5 Input 0 V / 12 V X45.15 GND GND X45.16 X45.17 GND_FLOAT for Active (100 series resistor

+12V_FLOAT for Inactive (4k7 pull-

up resistor) galvanically seper-

ated external power sup-

ply USV-disturbance GND_FLOAT for ResetFaults s. X45.1 s. X45.1 s. X45.1 Open Collector against GND GND_FLOAT for Active (100 series resistance)

+12V_FLOAT for Inactive (4k7 pull-

up resistance) ensured over SI FF 7A (Backplane) ensured over 2A5 and 1A1 (TXINTER-

FACE) External- Switchover GND_FLOAT for ResetFaults shielding material shielding material B.2.4 Cooling Interface (CIF) B.2.4.1 X46 Pump 15-pin SUB-D socket System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 113 R&S TMU9 R&S TCE900 Interface Description Module Slots All potentials on this socket refer to GND_FLOAT. Signal Name Direction Value range RS485_3_A RS485_3_B CAN_H CAN_L Bi-directional Bi-directional Bi-directional Bi-directional GND_FLOAT Output PRES_WARN Input 0-5V 0-5V CAN CAN 0V 0-5V Connection point X46. X46.9 X46.2 X46.10 X46.3 X46.11 PRES_FAULT Input 0-5V X46.4 24V_FLOAT_SUP-

PLY_FAN Output 22V- 25V (nominal:

24V) X46.12 RACK2_FAULT Input 0-5V X46.5 TEMP_IN_RACK_2 Input 0-5V X46.13 5V_FLOAT Output 4.60V-5.25V (nomi-

nal: 4.92V) X46.6 PRES_ANA_RACK_2 Input 0-12V X46.14 RS485_4_A RS485_4_B Bi-directional Bi-directional TEMP_OUT_RACK_2 Input 0-5V 0-5V 0-5V X46.7 X46.15 X46.8 Remarks RS485 RS485 CAN Bus CAN Bus Ground, external potential, LP-filtered Digital input, pres-

sure warning, Pull-

up with 4k7 on 5V, high active Digital input, pres-

sure failure, Pull-up with 4k7 on 5V, high active power supply for fan with 0.5A ensured, LP-filterd Digital input, Rack2 failure, Pull-up with 4k7 on 5V, high active analogue or digital input to temperature measurement of the cooling agent tem-

perature on input of rack 2 with 0.5A ensured, LP-filterd analogue input to measure the pres-

sure in cooling circuit of rack 2 RS485 RS485 analogue in put to measure the cooling agent temperature on output of rack 2 B.2.4.2 X47 HEX 15-pin SUB-D socket System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 114 R&S TMU9 R&S TCE900 Interface Description Module Slots All potentials on this socket refer to GND_FLOAT. Signal Name Direction Value range RS485_1_A RS485_1_B Bi-directional Bi-directional 0-5V 0-5V EXT_COOL_ON_1 B D Bi-directional Max. 2A, 30V DC Connection point X47.1 X47.9 X47.2 EXT_COOL_ON_2 Bi-directional Max. 2A, 30V DC X47.10 GND_FLOAT Output EXT_COOL_WARN Input 0V 0-5V X47.3 X47.11 EXT_COOL_FAULT Input 0-5V X47.4 24V_FLOAT_SUP-

PLY_FAN Output 22V- 25V (nominal:

24V) X47.12 RACK1_FAULT Input 0-5V X47.5 TEMP_IN_RACK_1 Input 0-5V X47.13 5V_FLOAT Output 4.60V-5.25V (nomi-

nal: 4.92V) X47.6 PRES_ANA_RACK_1 Input 0-12V X47.14 RS485_2_A RS485_2_B Bi-directional Bi-directional TEMP_OUT_RACK_2 Input 0-5V 0-5V 0-5V X47.7 X47.15 X47.8 Remarks RS485 RS485 contact 1 without potential contact 2 without potential Ground, external potential, LP-filtered Digital input, external cooling warning, Pull-up with 4k7 on 5V, high active Digital input, external colling failure, Pull-

up with 4k7 on 5V, high active power supply for fan with 0.5 A ensured, LP-filtered Digital input, rack1 failure, Pull-up with 4k7 on 5V, high active Analogue input to measure the cooling agent temperature on input of rack 1 power supply with 0.5A ensured, LP-fil-

tered Analogue input to measure the pres-

sure in cooling circuit of rack 1 RS485 RS485 Analogue input to measure the cooling agent temperature on output of rack 1 System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 115 R&S TMU9 R&S TCE900 Interface Description Module Slots B.2.5 Air Cooling Interface (Optional) B.2.5.1 Connection to Exhaust Fan, Differential Pressure Sensor, X46 FAN1 15-pin SUB-D socket All potentials on this socket refer to GND_FLOAT. Signal Name/Description CTRL_FAN1 SPEED_FAN1 Direc-

tion Value range Connection point Remarks Output 0 V to 10 V or PWM X46.4 Input Open collector, 1 pulse per revolution X46.12 10V_FAN1 Input 10 V (max. 1.1 mA) X46.11 Speed control for exhaust fan 1 Speed output for exhaust fan 1, 1 pulse per revolution 10 V voltage output Exhaust fan 1 GND Bidirec-

tional X46.5 PRESSURE_1 Input 4 mA to 20 mA X46.14 Measured value from differential pressure sensor 1 GND TEMP_IN GND Bidirec-

tional X46.7 Input 4 mA to 20 mA X46.8 Measured value from the temperature sen-

sor at the rack input Bidirec-

tional X46.15 B.2.5.2 Connection to Exhaust Fan, Differential Pressure Sensor, X47 FAN2 15-pin SUB-D socket All potentials on this socket refer to GND_FLOAT. Signal Name/Description CTRL_FAN2 SPEED_FAN2 Direc-

tion Value range Connection point Remarks Output 0 V to 10 V or PWM X47.4 Input Open collector, 1 pulse per revolution X47.12 10V_FAN2 Input 10 V (max. 1.1 mA) X47.11 Speed control for exhaust fan 2 Speed output for exhaust fan 2, 1 pulse per revolution 10 V voltage output Exhaust fan 2 System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 116 R&S TMU9 R&S TCE900 Interface Description Module Slots Signal Name/Description GND Direc-

tion Value range Connection point Remarks Bidirec-

tional X47.5 PRESSURE_2 Input 4 mA to 20 mA X47.14 Measured value from differential pressure sensor 2 GND Bidirec-

tional X47.7 TEMP_OUT Input 4 mA to 20 mA X47.8 Measured value from the temperature sen-

sor at the rack output GND Bidirec-

tional X47.15 System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 117 R&S TMU9 R&S TCE900 Interface Description Module Slots System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 118 R&S TMU9 R&S PMU901 Interface Description X1: Supply Input; Schaltbau M3 connector C R&S PMU901 Interface Description C.1 X1: Supply Input; Schaltbau M3 connector Signal Name/Description L N LReserve NReserve PE Direc-

tion Input Input Input Value range Connection point Remarks V AC = 170 V to 264 V I 15 A 47 Hz to 63 Hz cos 0.95 at 230 V and Pnom 0 V V AC = 170 V - 264 V I 15 A 47 Hz to 63 Hz cos 0.95 at 230 V and Pnom X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.5 X1.PE Power supply con-

nection for the regu-

lar power supply Power supply con-

nection for the standby power sup-

ply Power supply con-

nection Input Input 0 V 0 V Since the PE connections also need to be fed in separately for separate electrical circuits, a second protective earth must be ensured via a grounding bolt (40 A test current), since only one shared PE is fed in on the X1. Increased leakage current! The instrument must first be connected to the protective ground. An additional ground wire connection is provided since two power supply circuits are possible: Automatically pluggable (socket 3587.4188.00, at pin contact 3587.4194.00 on the rack side) for rack installation and as a stud for table operation as well. Shutoff at all poles for the connecting cables is necessary for two-phase networks (2W

+ PE). System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 119 R&S TMU9 R&S PMU901 Interface Description X2: RF Output 7/16 - Socket (Rear) C.2 X2: RF Output 7/16 - Socket (Rear) Signal Name/Description RF_OUTPUT Direc-

tion Output Connection point Remarks X2 RF output Value range Pavg,nom=600 W (DVB-

T) Pavg,max = 650 W/

750 W Psync,nom = 1400 W

(combined) 470 MHz to 862 MHz to 50 load, S 1.4 C.3 X3: RF Test Socket; SMA Female (Front) Signal Name/Description RF_MONITOR Direc-

tion Output Value range Connection point Remarks 0.5 V to 1 V / at Psync,nom

-54 dBc to -48 dBc 470 MHz to 862 MHz X3 RF monitor as an open test point on the front panel C.4 X10: RF Input SMA Female (Rear) Signal Name/Description RF_IN Direc-

tion Input Connection point Remarks X10 RF input Value range Pavg,nom = 0 dBm 3 dB (DVB-T) Psync,nom= +3.5 dBm 3 dB (ATV combined) 470 MHz to 862 MHz S11 matching: -16 dB System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 120 R&S TMU9 R&S PMU901 Interface Description X13: Second RF Test Socket for ADE; SMA Female (Rear) C.5 X13: Second RF Test Socket for ADE; SMA Female

(Rear) Signal Name/Description ADE_OUT Direc-

tion Output Value range Connection point Remarks 0.5 V to 1 V / at Psync,nom

-54 dBc to -48 dBc 470 MHz to 862 MHz X13 RF test point prefera-

bly for connecting the ADE demodulator C.6 X22: Fan Connection 1; 4-pin Molex Connector Signal Name/Description VCC_FAN VCC_GND FAN_SPEED NC Direc-

tion Value range Connection point Remarks Output

+18 V DC to +28 V DC X22.1 Bidirec-

tional 0 V Input Open collector X22.2 X22.3 X22.4 The fan connection is located directly on the amplifier board. C.7 X23: Fan Connection 2; 4-pin Molex Connector Signal Name/Description VCC_FAN VCC_GND FAN_SPEED NC Direc-

tion Value range Connection point Remarks Output

+18 V DC to +28 V DC X23.1 Bidirec-

tional 0 V Input Open collector X23.2 X23.3 X23.4 The fan connection is located directly on the amplifier board. System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 121 R&S TMU9 R&S PMU901 Interface Description X11: Amplifier Control Unit; 15-pin D-Sub connector (rear) C.8 X11: Amplifier Control Unit; 15-pin D-Sub connector

(rear) Signal Name/Description SORT1 Direc-

tion Bidirec-

tional Value range Connection point Remarks 0 V to 13 V X11.1 ADGND Input 0 V 1 V X11.9 GND

/AC_FAIL Input 0 V Output Open collector, I 10 mA (with ESD protection), Ri 100 , U12 V low: 2.5 V at 10 mA RESET

(Not used in Rohde & Schwarz generation 9 transmitters) Input AMPL_ON

(Not used in Rohde & Schwarz generation 9 transmitters) VREF_PWR

(Not used in Rohde & Schwarz generation 9 transmitters) PEAK_AV Input Input Input 0 V to 5 V, 5 mA Ri approx. 3.3 k

(optocoupler input) 0 V to 5 V, 5 mA Ri approx. 3.3 k

(optocoupler input) 0 V to 5.58 V, relative to ADGND RL = 74,4 k

, 4 V = nominal value 0 V to 5 V, 5 mA Ri approx. 3.3 k

(optocoupler input) X11.2 X11.10 X11.3 X11.11 X11.4 X11.12 Sort PIN 1, short-cir-

cuit-proof, relative to CAN_GND,

<1 V: low,

>8 V: high Analog and digital ground (in amplifier isolated from GND in order to prevent ground loops) Amplifier ground AC voltage phase monitor open: AC OK low ( 2.5 V): No AC, phase failure, over-

voltage and under-

voltage relative to CAN_GND high ( 1 mA, 3.0 V): Reset, resets the stored messages TEMP_FAIL and REFLECTION rela-

tive to ADGND high ( 1 mA, 3.0 V): Amplifier ON;

relative to ADGND Reference voltage for output power, rel-

ative to ADGND Peak/AVG measure-

ment toggling;

high: ( 1 mA, 3.0 V): PEAK posi-

tion;

low: AV position; rel-

ative to ADGND System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 122 R&S TMU9 R&S PMU901 Interface Description X11: Amplifier Control Unit; 15-pin D-Sub connector (rear) Signal Name/Description SHUT_DOWN Direc-

tion Input Value range Connection point Remarks X11.5 0 V to 13 V, 5 mA Internal pull-up to CAN_V+ via optocou-

pler CAN_GND Input 0 V 1 V X11.13 CAN_L CAN_H X11.6 CAN low X11.14 CAN high CAN_L CAN_H CAN_V+

Bidirec-

tional Bidirec-

tional Input

/AC_OK Output X11.7 X11.15

+ 12 V 1 V, 40 mA (for 100 %

dominant level) typical: 15 mA Open collector, I 10 mA (with ESD protection via Zener diode), Ri 100 , U12 V low: 1.5 V at 10 mA SORT2 Bidirec-

tional 0 V to 13 V X11.8 Amplifier emergency shutoff, open: amplifier inac-

tive (mute) low (

2 mA, 3.0 V): Ampli-

fier in normal mode, relative to CAN_GND CAN ground (isola-

ted from GND) CAN transceiver sup-

ply; relative to CAN_GND (isolated from GND) AC voltage phase monitor low: AC OK open: No AC, phase failure, overvoltage and undervoltage rel-

ative to GND Sort PIN 2, relative to CAN_GND,

<1 V: low,

>8 V: high System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 123 R&S TMU9 R&S PMU901 Interface Description X11: Amplifier Control Unit; 15-pin D-Sub connector (rear) System Manual 2600.5423.02 01 124

 

 

 

 

 

 

OPERATIONAL  DESCRIPTION  

The  R  &  S  model  TMU9  transmitter  is  composed  of  multiple  modules  housed  in  a  single  rack  cabinet  

including  the  final  emission  mask  filter.  The  transmitter  rack  houses  one  or  more  exciters  ,  a  control  unit,  

one  or  more  amplifiers  operating  in  parallel,  splitter  and  combiner  unit,  emission  mask  filter,  cooling  

system,  and  output  harmonic  filter.    Transmitter  configurations  include  a  2  amplifier,  3  amplifier,  4  

amplifier,  and  5  amplifier  systems.  

The  exciter  unit  accepts  the  transport  stream  input  signal  and  converts  this  to  an  ATSC  RF  modulated  

signal.  The  exciter  includes  signal  processing  to  improve  transmitter  linearity  performance  and  

frequency  response  as  well  as  compensating  for  frequency  response  issues  in  the  transmission  system  

beyond  the  transmitter  before  it  reaches  the  antenna.  If  dual  exciters  are  used,  an  exciter  switcher  is  

used  to  select  which  exciter  is  routed  to  the  rest  of  the  transmitter.  

After  the  exciter,  the  signal  is  split  and  directed  to  one  or  more  amplifiers  operating  in  parallel.    Here  the  

modulated  ATSC  signal  is  amplified.    A  combiner  is  used  to  combine  the  signal  from  each  of  the  

amplifiers  and  then  the  signal  is  routed  to  a  harmonic  filter  and  an  emission  mask  filter  to  reduce  

harmonic  energy  and  to  ensure  adjacent  channel  emission  is  compliant  with  FCC  rules.        

The  control  unit  interfaces  with  each  subsystem  within  the  transmitter  and  provides  monitoring  of  each  

function,  implements  automatic  power  control,  communicates  with  any  remote  control  system,  and  

provides  fault  protection  for  the  transmitter.    An  optional  touchscreen  display  is  available.  

The  cooling  system  contains  the  fans  necessary  to  properly  cool  all  components  within  the  transmitter  

and  interfaces  with  the  control  system  for  proper  operation.  

 

 



 

 

 

 

 

 

R&S®Tx9

Transmitter System

Operating Manual

(E9é:2)

2109.9110.02 ─ 07

g

n

i

t

s

a

c

d

a

o

r

B

l

a

u

n

a

M

g

n

i

t

a

r

e

p

O

© 2014 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG

Mühldorfstr. 15, 81671 München, Germany

Phone: +49 89 41 29 - 0

Fax: +49 89 41 29 12 164

E-mail: info@rohde-schwarz.com

Internet: www.rohde-schwarz.com

Subject to change – Data without tolerance limits is not binding.

R&S® is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG.

Trade names are trademarks of the owners.

The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual: R&S®XYZ1234 is abbreviated as R&S XYZ1234.

Quality management

and environmental

management

Sehr geehrter Kunde,

Sie haben sich für den Kauf

eines Rohde & Schwarz Produk-

tes entschieden. Sie erhalten

damit ein nach modernsten Fer-

tigungsmethoden hergestelltes

Produkt. Es wurde nach den

Regeln unserer Qualitäts- und

Umweltmanagementsysteme

entwickelt, gefertigt und geprüft.

Rohde & Schwarz ist unter ande-

rem nach den Managementsys-

temen ISO 9001 und ISO 14001

zertifiziert.

Der Umwelt verpflichtet

❙ Energie-effiziente,

RoHS-konforme Produkte

❙ Kontinuierliche

Weiterentwicklung nachhaltiger

Umweltkonzepte

❙ ISO 14001-zertifiziertes

Umweltmanagementsystem

Dear customer,

You have decided to buy a

Rohde & Schwarz product. This

product has been manufactured

using the most advanced meth-

ods. It was developed, manufac-

tured and tested in compliance

with our quality management

and environmental manage-

ment systems. Rohde & Schwarz

has been certified, for exam-

ple, according to the ISO 9001

and ISO 14001 management

systems.

Environmental commitment

❙ Energy-efficient products

❙ Continuous improvement in

environmental sustainability

environmental management

system

Certified Quality System

ISO 9001

Certified Environmental System

ISO 14001

Cher client,

Vous avez choisi d’acheter un

produit Rohde & Schwarz. Vous

disposez donc d’un produit

fabriqué d’après les méthodes

les plus avancées. Le dévelop-

pement, la fabrication et les

tests de ce produit ont été effec-

tués selon nos systèmes de

management de qualité et de

management environnemental.

La société Rohde & Schwarz a

été homologuée, entre autres,

conformément aux systèmes

de management ISO 9001 et

ISO 14001.

Engagement écologique

❙ Produits à efficience

❙ Amélioration continue de la

durabilité environnementale

❙ Système de management

environnemental certifié selon

ISO 14001

❙ ISO 14001-certified

énergétique

1

0

.

5

0

V

1

1

.

0

0

2

0

.

1

7

1

1

1

1

0

0

2

0

1

7

1

1

ISO-Qualitaets-Zertifikat_1171-0200-11_A4.indd 1

28.09.2012 10:25:08

Customer Support

Technical support – where and when you need it

For quick, expert help with any Rohde & Schwarz equipment, contact one of our Customer Support

Centers. A team of highly qualified engineers provides telephone support and will work with you to find a

solution to your query on any aspect of the operation, programming or applications of Rohde & Schwarz

equipment.

Up-to-date information and upgrades

To keep your instrument up-to-date and to be informed about new application notes related to your

instrument, please send an e-mail to the Customer Support Center stating your instrument and your wish.

We will take care that you will get the right information.

Europe, Africa, Middle East

Phone +49 89 4129 12345

customersupport@rohde-schwarz.com

Phone 1-888-TEST-RSA (1-888-837-8772)

customer.support@rsa.rohde-schwarz.com

Phone +1-410-910-7988

customersupport.la@rohde-schwarz.com

Phone +65 65 13 04 88

customersupport.asia@rohde-schwarz.com

Phone +86-800-810-8228 /

customersupport.china@rohde-schwarz.com

+86-400-650-5896

North America

Latin America

Asia/Pacific

China

1171.0200.22-06.00

R&S®Tx9

Contents

Contents

1 Information about this Manual..............................................................9

2 Safety Instructions...............................................................................11

2.1 Safety Instructions for Transmitter Systems and Equipment................................ 11

2.2 General Safety Instructions....................................................................................... 12

2.2.1 Safety Instructions.........................................................................................................12

2.3 Special Hazard Information........................................................................................ 19

2.3.1 Hazards from AC Supply Voltage................................................................................. 19

2.3.1.1 AC Power Supply.......................................................................................................... 19

2.3.1.2 Changing Fuses............................................................................................................ 19

2.3.2 Hazards from High‑Energy Electric Circuits.................................................................. 19

2.3.3 Hazards from RF Radiation...........................................................................................20

2.3.3.1 Obligation to Instruct Personnel.................................................................................... 20

2.3.3.2 RF Shielding..................................................................................................................20

2.3.3.3 Rules When Operating an Amplifier..............................................................................20

2.3.3.4 Rules When Working on an Open Amplifier..................................................................21

2.3.4 Conditions for Assembly Work on Cooling System.......................................................21

2.3.5 Safety Data Sheets for Hazardous Substances............................................................22

3 Introduction to Operation....................................................................23

3.1 Operation via R&S TDU900........................................................................................ 23

3.1.1 Opening Display............................................................................................................23

3.1.2 Closing Display............................................................................................................. 23

3.1.3 Using Touchscreen Function........................................................................................ 23

3.2 Operation via Browser................................................................................................ 24

3.2.1 Connection Setup and Login.........................................................................................26

3.3 Structure of User Interface......................................................................................... 26

3.3.1 Elements of User Interface............................................................................................26

3.3.2 Views.............................................................................................................................27

3.3.3 Basic Functions on Menu Bar....................................................................................... 28

3.3.3.1

Logbook........................................................................................................................ 29

3.3.3.2 Help...............................................................................................................................29

3.3.3.3

Local/Remote................................................................................................................ 29

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

3

R&S®Tx9

Contents

3.3.3.4

Login/Logout................................................................................................................. 29

3.3.3.5 Device View.................................................................................................................. 29

3.3.3.6 Task View......................................................................................................................30

3.3.4 Navigation..................................................................................................................... 30

3.3.5

Input Fields....................................................................................................................30

3.3.6 Editors........................................................................................................................... 30

3.3.6.1 Numeric Editor.............................................................................................................. 31

3.3.6.2 Text Editor.....................................................................................................................31

3.3.7 Special Tasks................................................................................................................31

3.3.7.1 Finding an Error............................................................................................................ 31

3.3.7.2 Managing Users............................................................................................................ 32

3.3.8

Logbook........................................................................................................................ 32

3.3.8.1

Intelligent Filtering......................................................................................................... 32

3.3.8.2 Chronological View....................................................................................................... 33

3.3.8.3 Manual Filter (Filter/Options).........................................................................................35

3.3.8.4 Scroll Function.............................................................................................................. 36

4 Device View Description......................................................................39

4.1 System Overview........................................................................................................ 39

4.1.1 Forward Power..............................................................................................................39

4.1.2 Reflected Power............................................................................................................40

4.1.3 Transmitter.................................................................................................................... 40

4.1.4 N+1 Redundancy.......................................................................................................... 41

4.1.4.1 Manual Switchover........................................................................................................41

4.1.4.2 Automatic Switchover....................................................................................................41

4.1.4.3 Configuring N+1 Automatic Function............................................................................ 41

4.2 Transmitter.................................................................................................................. 43

4.2.1 Automatic Switchover....................................................................................................44

4.2.1.1 Automatic Input Signal.................................................................................................. 44

4.2.1.2 Automatic Exciter Switchover........................................................................................47

4.2.2 Transmitter Status.........................................................................................................48

4.2.3 Amplifiers...................................................................................................................... 49

4.2.4 Rack.............................................................................................................................. 64

4.2.5 Output Stage................................................................................................................. 65

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

4

R&S®Tx9

Contents

4.3 Exciter DVB-T2............................................................................................................ 65

4.3.1 Coder for DVB-T2......................................................................................................... 65

4.3.2 Setting Transmit Frequency and Output Power............................................................ 74

4.3.3 Signal Feed................................................................................................................... 75

4.3.3.1 Configuring Physical Inputs...........................................................................................75

4.3.3.2

Input Signal Switchover.................................................................................................80

4.3.4 Controlling Time of Transmission in Single-Frequency Networks (SFN)...................... 82

4.3.4.1 Settings......................................................................................................................... 84

4.3.5 Using Frequency Control.............................................................................................. 86

4.3.6 Precorrection at ATV.....................................................................................................88

4.4 Exciter DVB-T.............................................................................................................. 92

4.4.1 Coder for DVB-T........................................................................................................... 92

4.4.2 Setting Transmit Frequency and Output Power............................................................ 96

4.4.3 Signal Feed................................................................................................................... 96

4.4.3.1 Configuring Physical Inputs...........................................................................................96

4.4.3.2

Input Signal Switchover...............................................................................................101

4.4.4 Controlling Time of Transmission in Single-Frequency Networks (SFN).................... 104

4.4.4.1 Settings....................................................................................................................... 106

4.4.5 Using Frequency Control............................................................................................ 108

4.4.6 Precorrection...............................................................................................................110

4.5 Exciter ISDB-T........................................................................................................... 116

4.5.1 Coder for ISDB-T........................................................................................................ 116

4.5.2 Setting Transmit Frequency and Output Power.......................................................... 121

4.5.3 Signal Feed................................................................................................................. 122

4.5.3.1 Configuring Physical Inputs.........................................................................................122

4.5.3.2

Input Signal Switchover...............................................................................................127

4.5.4 Controlling Time of Transmission in Single-Frequency Networks (SFN).................... 129

4.5.4.1 Settings....................................................................................................................... 132

4.5.5 Using Frequency Control............................................................................................ 134

4.5.6 Precorrection...............................................................................................................136

4.6 Exciter ATSC............................................................................................................. 142

4.6.1 Coder for ATSC...........................................................................................................142

4.6.2 Setting Transmit Frequency and Output Power.......................................................... 144

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

5

R&S®Tx9

Contents

4.6.3 Signal Feed................................................................................................................. 145

4.6.3.1 Configuring Physical Inputs.........................................................................................145

4.6.3.2

Input Signal Switchover...............................................................................................150

4.6.4 Controlling Time of Transmission in Single-Frequency Networks (SFN).................... 152

4.6.4.1 Settings....................................................................................................................... 155

4.6.5 Using Frequency Control............................................................................................ 157

4.6.6 Precorrection...............................................................................................................160

4.7 Exciter DTMB............................................................................................................. 165

4.7.1 Coder for DTMB.......................................................................................................... 165

4.8 Exciter ATV................................................................................................................ 169

4.8.1 Coder for ATV............................................................................................................. 169

4.8.2 Setting Transmit Frequency and Output Power.......................................................... 175

4.8.3 Signal Feed................................................................................................................. 176

4.8.4 Using Frequency Control............................................................................................ 179

4.8.5 Precorrection at ATV...................................................................................................181

4.9 Exciter DAB............................................................................................................... 187

4.9.1 Coder for DAB.............................................................................................................187

4.9.2 Using Frequency Control............................................................................................ 189

4.9.3 Precorrection...............................................................................................................191

4.10 Exciter FM.................................................................................................................. 197

4.10.1 Coder for FM............................................................................................................... 197

4.10.2 Setting Transmit Frequency and Output Power for FM...............................................199

4.10.3 Signal Feed................................................................................................................. 200

4.10.3.1 Configuring Physical Inputs.........................................................................................200

4.10.3.2

Input Signal Switchover...............................................................................................203

4.10.4 Using Frequency Control............................................................................................ 204

4.11 Switchless Combiner................................................................................................ 207

4.11.1 Settings....................................................................................................................... 208

4.12 Cooling System......................................................................................................... 210

4.12.1

Liquid Cooling (High‑Performance).............................................................................210

4.12.1.1 Configuring Switching Thresholds (Pressure) and Flow Volumes.............................. 210

4.12.1.2 Configuring Fans and Pumps......................................................................................213

4.12.1.3 Status of Cooling System............................................................................................214

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

6

R&S®Tx9

Contents

4.12.2 Small Cooling – Simplified Liquid Cooling System (FM Transmitter)..........................214

4.12.2.1 Configuration of Cooling System.................................................................................215

4.12.2.2 Status.......................................................................................................................... 215

4.12.3 Air Cooling (Medium‑Power)....................................................................................... 217

5 Task View Description....................................................................... 219

5.1 Basic Settings........................................................................................................... 219

5.2 Parameters: Input Configuration............................................................................. 227

5.3 System Control..........................................................................................................229

5.3.1 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)......................................................... 229

5.3.1.1 General....................................................................................................................... 229

5.3.1.2 Settings on Transmitter End........................................................................................229

5.3.1.3 Settings on Manager End............................................................................................230

5.3.1.4 Which MIBs Must Be Used?....................................................................................... 232

5.3.1.5 Which OIDs from a MIB Must Be Used?.....................................................................233

5.3.1.6 Setting Alarms.............................................................................................................234

5.3.1.7 Testing the SNMP Communications........................................................................... 235

5.3.1.8 Setting Alarms Using SNMP....................................................................................... 236

5.3.1.9 Type plates - the ENTITY MIB.................................................................................... 238

5.4 Maintain Software..................................................................................................... 240

5.4.1 Software Update......................................................................................................... 240

5.4.2 Backup/Restore...........................................................................................................242

5.5 Options.......................................................................................................................244

6 Operating the Device Manager......................................................... 247

6.1 Basic Settings........................................................................................................... 247

7 User Administration...........................................................................257

7.1 Creating New User Profiles...................................................................................... 257

7.2 Changing User Profiles (Users and Access Rights).............................................. 257

7.3 Deleting User Profiles............................................................................................... 258

7.4 Closing Active Sessions.......................................................................................... 258

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

7

R&S®Tx9

Information about this Manual

1 Information about this Manual

This manual is part of the documentation for the R&S THU9 transmitter family from

Rohde & Schwarz. The individual manuals for the transmitter family have a modular

structure and complement each other.

The system manual, which is the central and overarching part of the overall documen-

tation, describes all the steps involved in installing a transmitter.

Operation of the transmitter system after installation and the steps required to put the

system into operation are described in the operating manual.

The service manual describes all maintenance, troubleshooting and service tasks that

customers can carry out themselves. At certain points in the transmitter manual, the

reader is referred to the appropriate operating manual or service manual.

The manuals for the transmitter family describe all activities required for installation,

startup, operation, maintenance, troubleshooting and servicing of the transmitter and

its component parts. The appendix contains the interface descriptions and the techni-

cal documentation.

Structure

Contents

Safety

All skilled personnel working with a transmitter or its components have a duty to read

the associated manuals and to follow the safety measures described in the section

"Safety" and given at appropriate points in the manual. It must be ensured that the

transmitter and the individual components of the transmitter are used only for their

intended use. All activities connected with the transmitter or individual transmitter com-

ponents must be carried out by skilled personnel. If activities require additional skills

and qualifications, this is indicated at the appropriate points in the manual.

Symbols and notation

The "warning triangle" symbol refers the reader to potential hazards. The degree of

danger is indicated by different signal words next to the warning symbol.

Instructions are given in numbered steps. All other formatting options are intended to

improve clarity and are self‑explanatory.

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

9

R&S®Tx9

Introduction to Operation

Operation via R&S TDU900

3 Introduction to Operation

The R&S TDU900 is a display unit with a touchscreen function and a graphical user

interface for configuring Tx9 transmitter systems.

3.1 Operation via R&S TDU900

3.1.1 Opening Display

When in the idle state, the display is inside the R&S TDU900 operating unit.

1. Unlock the display by pressing firmly on the trapezoidal area.

2. The display slowly slides forward out of the instrument.

3. Tilt the display until you have reached the most ergonomically comfortable angle

for operation.

3.1.2 Closing Display

1. Tilt the display to a horizontal position until you feel the display engage.

2. Push the display all the way into the R&S TDU900 housing until the display

engages in the transport lock.

3. The display illumination automatically switches off in this state.

Tip: Close the operating unit during long periods of inactivity to prolong the service

life of the backlighting.

3.1.3 Using Touchscreen Function

The display has a touchscreen function for operating all of the transmitter functions.

Using sharp‑edged objects can damage or destroy the surface. Therefore only use

your finger to operate the touchscreen.

1. A light touch on a button is enough to trigger a user action.

2. A button lights up orange for as long as your finger remains there. The action is not

carried out until you remove your finger from the button.

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

23

R&S®Tx9

Introduction to Operation

Operation via Browser

Tip: To cancel an inadvertently selected action, slide your finger to the side away

from the button highlighted orange and then lift your finger off the touchscreen.

3.2 Operation via Browser

The graphical user interface (GUI) of the Tx9 transmitter series has been implemented

in JAVA to ensure optimum user experience. Java technology provides maximum com-

patibility between different versions of operating systems and browsers.

Supported operating systems

● Windows XP, Windows Vista (32 bit version)

● Windows 7 (32 bit and 64 bit version)

● Windows 8 (32 bit and 64 bit version)

Supported browsers

● Google Chrome

● Mozilla Firefox

● Internet Explorer 7

● Internet Explorer 8

● Internet Explorer 9 (32 bit version)

● Internet Explorer 10 (32 bit and 64 bit desktop version)

Supported JAVA virtual machines

● Oracle (previously: Sun) JRE 7 in 32 bit version

Troubleshooting

You can ensure trouble‑free operation of the GUI in a browser by installing the browser

and the Java VM with their default settings on a computer configured with its factory

settings.

The following solutions are available if the computer settings differ from the standard

installation and there are problems:

● The 64 bit version of Internet Explorer 9 is not supported

– The 32 bit version, which is also installed, must be used

– Use another browser, such as Google Chrome or Mozilla Firefox.

● Internet Explorer 10 is to be used on a 64 bit operating system (Windows 7/8):

"Enhanced Protection Mode" must be disabled in the browser under "Tools >

Options > Advanced" (this is the default setting).

● Windows 8 Modern UI (previously: Metro) does not support Java.

– Start the desktop version of Internet Explorer 10 from the desktop.

– Start Google Chrome or Firefox from a link in Modern UI.

● The error message "Application blocked by security settings" appears on the login

page.

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

24

R&S®Tx9

Introduction to Operation

Operation via Browser

Set the security level to "High" in the Java Control Panel and restart the browser.

● Only a 64 bit Java runtime environment (JRE) is installed.

Remove the 64 bit JRE and install the 32 bit version.

● A 64 bit JRE is installed and required by another application (unlikely)

Install a 32 bit JRE to run in parallel with the 64 bit version.

You can determine the Java version (32 or 64 bit) as follows:

● Open an input prompt window (Start > Run > Open, insert "cmd" and press <OK>)

● Enter: java -d32 -version

● The version number is shown if a 32 bit JRE is installed, otherwise an error mes-

sage appears.

Java security

In order to ensure the optimum protection against malicious software (malware), the

user interface for the Tx9 transmitter series has been implemented in Java. Java tech-

nology eliminates the need to run potentially unsafe ActiveX or Flash plug‑ins in your

browser. Java offers numerous security functions:

● Java security settings

The security level in the Java Control Panel should be set to "High". A correspond-

ing security warning appears then appears when opening a website with Java con-

tents; you have to acknowledge this message. This prevents Java programs from

untrusted websites from being started unintentionally.

● Detecting a secure browser

The Java version installed on the computer should be displayed at the bottom left

corner of the login page only after the security notice for running Java code has

been confirmed. If the Java version is displayed without confirming the security

notice, then you are using an unsecured browser or an outdated version of Java on

your computer.

● Detecting the right web server

The security notice for running the Java code shows the IP address of the transmit-

ter that loaded the Java code to the browser.

Transmitters in the Tx9 series are protected against malware by various security meas-

ures. Nevertheless, it is important to follow this general information on security to pro-

tect other computers in the same network against malware:

● Always keep your browser updated to the latest version!

● Always update your Java runtime environment to the most recent version immedi-

ately after starting your browser.

● Avoid using unsecured browsers, such as MS Internet Explorer 7.

● Always use a firewall to display Internet pages from servers outside your LAN.

● The transmitter should be accessible within its protected intranet at all times. If this

is not technically feasible, take additional measures to secure communications

between the transmitter and browser (e.g. via a VPN).

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

25

R&S®Tx9

Introduction to Operation

Structure of User Interface

3.2.1 Connection Setup and Login

1. Create a physical network connection to the transmitter. The following options are

available:

a) Remote access via WAN (Wide Area Network)

b) Local access directly to a transmitter using a LAN cable

2. Start the browser and enter the following information in the address bar:

a)

IP address of the transmitter

The website for operating the transmitter is called (login page).

3. Enter your user name and password.

Note: The following login information is preconfigured at the factory

● User name: Query

Password: 1234

● User name: Operation

Password: 1234

● User name: Maintenance

Password: 1234

● User name: Configuration

Password: 1234

Change the user names and passwords after logging in for the first time chap-

ter 3.3.7.2, "Managing Users", on page 32.

After successfully logging in, the actual user interface is displayed.

3.3 Structure of User Interface

3.3.1 Elements of User Interface

The user interface is composed of the following elements:

The menu bar provides access to the most important functions.

● Menu bar:

● System status:

● Path bar:

● Working area:

This display provides a constantly visible, general overview of the entire system

status.

The path bar shows the current position within the menu structure and provides the

ability to quickly return to higher menu levels.

The various tasks and configuration steps are carried out in the working area.

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

26

R&S®Tx9

Introduction to Operation

Structure of User Interface

1 = Menu bar

2 = System status

3 = Path bar

4 = Working area

3.3.2 Views

● Device View

● Task View

Device View

The user interface provides two different views of the transmitter system:

In this view, all of the transmitter's functions are structured in the form of block dia-

grams. All parameters relevant to operation are accessible.

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

27

R&S®Tx9

Introduction to Operation

Structure of User Interface

Fig. 3-1: Hierarchical structure of a transmitter system

1 = View at transmitter system level

2 = View at single transmitter level

3 = View at exciter level

Task View

This view combines certain, frequently recurring tasks. A task includes exactly those

cross‑instrument parameters which are required for working on this task. All of the

parameters relevant to startup and maintenance are accessible.

Certain parameters are only accessible in the Task View.

3.3.3 Basic Functions on Menu Bar

All of the functions of a R&S TDU900 required for basic operation of a transmitter are

combined on the menu bar.

The following functions are available:

● Logbook

● Help

● Local/Remote

● Login/Logout

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

28

R&S®Tx9

Introduction to Operation

Structure of User Interface

● Device View

● Task View.

3.3.3.1 Logbook

3.3.3.2 Help

The logbook is used for logging all system events and for troubleshooting and error

analysis.

This button is used to activate the help function. The following steps must be per-

formed:

1. Press the Help button.

All of the elements for which help information is available are identified by a blue

frame.

2. Select the desired element.

The corresponding help information is shown in a separate window.

3.3.3.3 Local/Remote

The transmitter can be operated via both local access and via remote access.

The Local/Remote button allows you to toggle between the two types of access.

The transmitter can be switched from remote operation to local operation from at any

time.

For safety reasons, remote operation is not possible if the system is currently being

operated locally.

The current status (L = Local, R = Remote) is shown directly on the Local/Remote but-

ton. The corresponding status of each transmitter is shown individually for multi‑trans-

mitter systems.

3.3.3.4 Login/Logout

3.3.3.5 Device View

The login dialog allows a user to log in or log out of the system.

This button is used to switch to the Device View.

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

29

R&S®Tx9

Introduction to Operation

Structure of User Interface

3.3.3.6 Task View

3.3.4 Navigation

This button is used to switch to the Task View.

The Device View is used to navigate through the transmitter menus. Pressing one of

the visibly raised block diagram elements allows you to navigate further into the trans-

mitter structure. Parameters that may be spread out over multiple tabs are located on

the lowest menu level. A path bar is shown at the bottom of the screen. :

This has two functions:

● Displaying the current menu level

● Returning to higher menu levels

3.3.5 Input Fields

Additional information regarding the editability of respective parameters is visualized

using icons on the display and input fields. The various display forms have the follow-

ing meaning:

●

●

●

●

This value can be edited without restriction.

This value can be edited, but has no effect in the current configuration.

This value has been changed and has not yet been stored in a preset.

This value cannot be edited with the user rights currently in effect.

3.3.6 Editors

All of the functions of a R&S TDU900 required for basic operation of a transmitter are

combined on the menu bar.

The following functions are available:

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

30

R&S®Tx9

Introduction to Operation

Structure of User Interface

3.3.6.1 Numeric Editor

The numeric editor features the following functions.

1 = By pressing one of these buttons, the value is changed directly in the display without the use of the enter

button.

2 = The value entered using the numeric keypad is accepted by the system by pressing this button.

3 = Pressing this button discards all of the changes made in this window and restores the original value.

Violating the allowed value ranges causes an error message to appear and disables

the input elements (Increase/Decrease/Enter).

The text editor allows letters, digits and special characters to be entered.

3.3.6.2 Text Editor

3.3.7 Special Tasks

3.3.7.1 Finding an Error

There are two ways of locating an error:

● Block diagrams

You can use the traffic light signaling of the elements in the block diagrams to find

the cause of an error in just a few steps, as long as the error is currently active.

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

31

R&S®Tx9

Introduction to Operation

Structure of User Interface

Valuable information about an error's cause and tips for correcting the error can be

retrieved using the help function of the respective error message.

● Logbook

Complex error situations including behavior over time can be analyzed using the

logbook. The help function again provides a multitude of valuable information.

3.3.7.2 Managing Users

User name: Superuser

Password: 1234

3.3.8 Logbook

User management is only available if the R&S TDU900 is operated using a browser.

The following login must be selected for this purpose:

For more details, see chapter 7, "User Administration", on page 257.

All system events are recorded in the logbook. The following functions are available for

simplifying troubleshooting and error analysis:

● Intelligent filtering

● Chronological view

Events are intelligently prefiltered based on the context of the menu currently open.

Events are shown in their chronological order. Associated events are marked

accordingly.

● Manual filter (Filter and Options)

Events or event groups can be chosen selectively with the help of specific criteria.

● Scroll function

Enables fast navigation in long event lists

3.3.8.1

Intelligent Filtering

Depending on which menu is used to open the logbook, only events relevant in the

context of the respective menu are displayed. These filters significantly increase clarity

in the logbook.

● System overview

Opening in the system overview: With MultiTX and N+1 systems, shows all of the

events affecting the core components (e.g. cooling, N+1 automatic switchover) as

well as the most important messages from individual transmitters within the sys-

tem. With SingleTX systems, all of the detailed messages from the transmitter are

also shown.

● Transmitter level:

Opening in a transmitter-specific menu: Shows in detail all of the events that affect

the respective transmitter (incl. exciters).

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

32

R&S®Tx9

Introduction to Operation

Structure of User Interface

Depending on which menu is used to open the logbook, only events relevant in the

context of the respective menu are displayed. These filters significantly increase

clarity in the logbook.

● Exciter level

Shows in detail all of the events that affect the respective exciter.

A total of up to 500 events is logged in the logbook.

3.3.8.2 Chronological View

All of the event messages are listed here in strictly chronological order. The most

recent messages are always shown at the top of the list.

Fig. 3-2: Logbook – chronological view

A thread consists of a group of messages that refer to the same event. The color of the

thread is determined by the most critical message within the thread. Clicking a thread

marker opens a window containing the associated messages.

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

33

R&S®Tx9

Introduction to Operation

Structure of User Interface

Fig. 3-3: Logbook – thread

1 = Thread marker

2 = Click to open detail view

For most messages there is an entry indicating when the message occurred and when

it disappeared.

Each entry consists of the following information:

● Alarm level

Error

–

–

–

–

–

Warning

Info

Error no longer present/remedied

Warning no longer present

● Error message text

● System component (control, amplifier, exciter, etc.)

● Time

Clicking an entry within the thread view displays a detailed description with the follow-

ing contents.

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

34

R&S®Tx9

Introduction to Operation

Structure of User Interface

● From: / To:

● State:

● Duration:

● Component:

● Description:

Displays the time when an event starts or ends.

Indicates whether an event is still active or already remedied.

Indicates how long an event was active.

Indicates the system components affected by an event.

Displays a detailed description of an event.

3.3.8.3 Manual Filter (Filter/Options)

Fig. 3-4: Logbook – filter/options

● Level filter:

The filter function allows filtering of the messages according to the following criteria:

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

35

R&S®Tx9

Introduction to Operation

Structure of User Interface

The messages can be filtered selectively according to individual or multiple levels

(Info | Warning | Fault) at the same time by selecting/deselecting the checkboxes

"Show Infos", "Show Warnings" and "Show Faults".

Selecting the "Show open issues only" checkbox will cause only messages that are

still active to be displayed, in other words, messages that still have not been rem-

edied,

● Component filter:

The messages can be filtered selectively according to individual or multiple system

components (System | Exciter A/B | Output Stage) at the same time by selecting/

deselecting the checkboxes.

● Options:

The following options are available:

– Clear logbook

– Restore logbook

– Messages

– Close

"Clear Logbook" is used to completely delete the contents of the logbook.

"Restore Logbook" is used to restore the logbook after it has been inadvertently

deleted.

The "Messages" display shows the number of entries in the logbook.

"Close" is used to close the entire filter function.

3.3.8.4 Scroll Function

The scroll function enables navigation within a long event list and the selection and

detailed view of specific events.

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

36

R&S®Tx9

Introduction to Operation

Structure of User Interface

Fig. 3-5: Scroll functions

1 = Scroll box

2 = Scroll thumb

3 = Entry up

4 = Page up

5 = Entry down

6 = Page down

oldest date.

recent date.

oldest date.

most recent date.

Clicking inside the scroll box moves the "scroll thumb" directly to the corresponding

position.

Entry down: This button is used to scroll down by one entry in the direction of the

Entry up: This button is used to scroll up by one entry in the direction of the most

Page down: This button is used to scroll by one page at a time in the direction of the

Page up: This button is used to scroll by one page at a time in the direction of the

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

37

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

System Overview

4 Device View Description

4.1 System Overview

The screenshot below shows the Device View Home menu view. It represents the

transmitter system level. The function of the individual buttons and the meaning of spe-

cific parameters are explained in the following chapters.

Fig. 4-1: Device View Home menu view

4.1.1 Forward Power

● Path:Device View Home > TX An

The "Forward Power" field shows the forward power of the transmitter system in kW.

This field lights up green provided that the forward power is above the user‑selectable

warning threshold. If the forward power drops to the warning level, the field lights up

yellow. If the forward power drops below the user‑selectable fault threshold, the field

lights up red.

Pressing the green area opens the "Power and Limits" view. The following user‑select-

able values are displayed in the Forward Power field:

● Power (in percent)

Forward power: can be set between 0 % and 130 %. The nominal transmitter

power corresponds to 100 %.

● Warning Limit (in dB)

Warning threshold: can be set between 0 dB and ‒20 dB.

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

39

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

System Overview

● Fault Limit (in dB)

Fault threshold: can be set between 0 dB and ‒20 dB.

● RF Fail Timeout (in s).

Delay time: can be set between 0 s and 10 s. This is the time between undershoot-

ing of the "Fail Limit" fault threshold and indication of the fault in the transmitter sta-

tus display.

4.1.2 Reflected Power

● Path:Device View Home > TX An

The "Reflected Power" field indicates the reflected power of the transmitter system in

W. This field lights up green provided that the reflected power is below the user‑select-

able warning threshold. If the reflected power exceeds this threshold, the field lights up

yellow. If the reflected power exceeds the user‑selectable fault threshold, the field

lights up red.

Pressing the green area opens the "Power and Limits" view. The following user‑select-

able values are displayed in the Forward Power field:

● Warning Limit (in dB)

● Fault Limit (in dB)

Warning threshold: can be set between ‒28 dB and ‒17 dB.

Fault threshold: can be set between ‒17 dB and ‒14 dB.

4.1.3 Transmitter

The icons and buttons for the TX A1 to TX An and TX B transmitters (depending on the

system configuration) are shown in the "Device View Home" menu overview.

The function of the buttons is explained in the next chapter, see chapter 4.2, "Transmit-

ter", on page 43.

Name

Program On

Reserve On

Reset Faults

Description

Switch used to switch the components in the program path

of the transmitter on and off.

Switch used to switch all components in the standby path of

the transmitter on and off (standby exciter with "dual drive"

redundancy concept and standby output stage with "active

PA Reserve" redundancy concept).

Switch used to reset all faults stored in the transmitter.

Stored faults are: Reflection Fail.

Resetting stored faults can cause automatic redundancy

functions, which are currently in the switched-over state, to

switch back to their original preselected state.

Value range

Access right

Off; On

Operation

Off; On

Operation

Operation

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

40

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

System Overview

Program

The currently active program 1 can be switched off using the "Program 1 – ON/OFF"

button.

4.1.4 N+1 Redundancy

The task of the N+1 automatic function is to provide a B standby transmitter for up to

eight A transmitters. This B transmitter takes over the program of an A transmitter if an

A transmitter signals a fault. The output of the B transmitter is normally connected to a

dummy antenna. The B transmitter is connected to an antenna by the N+1 automatic

function as soon as the B transmitter takes over the program of the A transmitter.

4.1.4.1 Manual Switchover

Manual switchover of a program from an A transmitter to the B transmitter is performed

by connecting the A transmitter concerned to the dummy antenna (button: To Load on

the corresponding A transmitter). As a result of this switchover, a) the A transmitter

becomes the standby transmitter for the B transmitter and b) the B transmitter is now

no longer available as the standby transmitter for other A transmitters (exception: prior-

ity control).

4.1.4.2 Automatic Switchover

If the N+1 automatic function is active and ready for operation and the A transmitter is

available for the N+1 automatic function, a fault in the A transmitter causes the pro-

gram to switch over to the B transmitter. The N+1 automatic function signals the

switchover by changing its status to "changed". The user can now either acknowledge

the switchover by pressing the "Accept changeover" key and adopt it as the new oper-

ating state, or attempt by pressing the "Reset Faults" key to reset the N+1 automatic

function to the original state and to delete the fault which caused the switchover.

4.1.4.3 Configuring N+1 Automatic Function

The switching behavior of the N+1 automatic function with regard to checkout times

and automatic switchback can be configured according to individual requirements. Fur-

thermore, for the B transmitter it is possible to define the A transmitter from which the

program settings are to be adopted when the B transmitter operates as a standby

transmitter.

Configuring Program‑Specific Settings

The B transmitter must store all program‑specific settings of all A transmitters internally

so that they can be activated immediately in the event of a fault. Program‑specific set-

tings are all settings which directly affect the signal path through the transmitter, i.e.

settings for the coder, the exciter inputs and outputs, the transmit frequency and the

output power. The program‑specific settings are made at the A transmitters and stored

using the menu item "Save Preset" in the Task View of the A transmitter. The settings

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

41

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

System Overview

stored for the A transmitters are synchronized with the B transmitter automatically even

if the B transmitter was switched off when the settings were stored. If the program‑spe-

cific settings are changed at A transmitters without these settings being stored as pre-

sets, the changes will not be available on the B transmitter in the event of a switchover.

Presets can only be stored on the A transmitters.

Configuring Power‑Specific Settings

All settings which have been stored on an A transmitter as presets and synchronized

with the B transmitter can be overwritten individually in the B transmitter. This can be

used to calibrate the power test points of the B transmitter to the frequency and output

power of the respective A transmitter. To do so, the "Program Settings" of the A trans-

mitter concerned must be activated in the B transmitter ("Load Program Settings") and

then the corresponding settings must be made in the menus of the B transmitter.

Finally, the changed settings must be stored in the B transmitter ("Save Tx B Set-

tings"). This must be repeated for all programs that the B transmitter can take over.

Settings that have been changed directly at the B transmitter are no longer synchron-

ized with the B transmitter using the "Save Preset" function on the A transmitters. It is

therefore recommended to overwrite the preset settings of the A transmitters at the

B transmitter only for purposes of calibrating the power test points, and never to make

program‑specific settings directly at the B transmitter.

If a setting has been inadvertently changed on the B transmitter and stored for an

A transmitter, automatic synchronization can be reactivated for this setting value in the

following way:

● On the B transmitter, set the setting value to the same value as on the A transmit-

ter.

● Press "Save Tx B Settings" in the menu of the N+1 automatic function

This setting value is now synchronized again together with all program‑specific setting

values of the A transmitter.

"N+1 Automatic" parameters

● Path: "Device View (Home)" > "Automatic" > "n+1 Automatic"

Name

Description

Automatic (Auto

Switch)

Used to activate the n+1 automatic function. If the n+1 automatic func-

tion is active, a fault within an A transmitter causes a switchover and

the program of the A transmitter is taken over by the standby B trans-

mitter.

Value range

Access right

On, Off

Read / Write

(Operation)

Guard Time (Auto

Switch)

Checkout time which must pass before an A transmitter is replaced by

the standby B transmitter. A long Guard Time suppresses switchover

operations caused by brief faults, but also reduces the availability of

the program.

0 s to 60 s

Read / Write

(Maintenance)

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

42

R&S®Tx9

Name

Description

Switch Mode

(Auto Switch)

Load Program

Settings (Auto

Switch)

Save Tx B Set-

tings (Auto

Switch)

Automatic (Sta-

tus)

Used to define the switching behavior of the N+1 automatic function.

Single switch: Switchover of an A transmitter to the B transmitter can

occur once only. Multiple switch: Following a switchover operation, the

system can switch back to the A transmitter automatically when the

A transmitter no longer signals a fault but the B transmitter indicates a

fault. If priority control is active, this switch should be set to Multiple

Switch.

Used to load the program‑specific settings of an A transmitter to the

B transmitter.

Used to save settings, which have been changed relative to the loaded

A transmitter, in the B transmitter.

Indicates the status of the N+1 automatic function by means of three

elements. If the N+1 automatic function is on, it can be "ready"/"not

ready" and at the same time "changed"/"not changed".

On, Off, Ready,

Not Ready,

Changed

Tx B is Reserve

for (Status)

If a switchover operation has taken place, this indicates which program

of an A transmitter the B transmitter has taken over.

RF Switch (Sta-

tus)

Indicates a fault if in the event of a switchover one of the RF switches

could not be turned correctly or if one of the jumpers has not been

positioned correctly on the patch panel (if used).

Ready / Not

Ready

Device View Description

Transmitter

Value range

Access right

Single, Multiple

Read / Write

(Maintenance)

Read / Write

Tx A1, Tx A2, Tx

A3, Tx A4, Tx A5,

Tx A6, Tx A7, Tx

A8

Tx A1, Tx A2, Tx

A3, Tx A4, Tx A5,

Tx A6, Tx A7, Tx

A8

Read Only

Read Only

Read Only

4.2 Transmitter

The screenshot below shows the Transmitter menu view. It represents the single trans-

mitter level. The function of the individual buttons and the meaning of specific parame-

ters are explained in the following chapters.

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

43

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Transmitter

4.2.1 Automatic Switchover

4.2.1.1 Automatic Input Signal

The R&S®TCE900 in the R&S®TCE900 exciter configuration has an automatic switch-

over function which, in the event of a signal failure at one logical input, switches over to

the other logical input (provided that a valid input signal is available at the other logical

input). Before a failure occurs, the preselected input is active. The way in which this

automatic switchover function operates is determined by the following factors:

Automatic input switchover ON/OFF

If automatic switchover is OFF, the preselected input remains active even if the input

signal fails. If automatic switchover is ON and there is a failure at the (preselected)

input, switchover to the standby input takes place.

Input priority (Preferred Input = Logical Input 1/2)

Following switchover of the priority logical input to the standby input, the automatic sys-

tem switches back to this priority input as soon as a signal returns. All switchover oper-

ations are delayed for the set delay times. If the signal fails at both the operating input

and the standby input, the priority input always remains active.

Inputs with equal priority (Preferred Input = none)

Following switchover of the active logical input, the second input with the same priority

remains active until the input signal fails on this input also. The automatic system

switches back to the preselected input, but only if a signal is present on it once again

(and if "Switch to" is set to "reserve & back"). All switchover operations are delayed for

the set delay times.

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

44

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Transmitter

Selecting this operating mode minimizes the number of switchover operations and, in

certain cases, the number of breaks in transmission.

Direction of switchover (Switch to)

The "to reserve and back" switch position enables switchover in both directions, i.e. to

and from the standby input, depending on which of the two logical inputs is currently

faulty.

The "reserve" switch position ensures that switchover takes place once only. Following

switchover, the automatic system switches to "switched" and the "Active" indicator dis-

appears.

Switchback to the preselected input takes place when the active input is switched over

by pressing the input selector switch (Selector) and then selecting the preselected

input.

If the switch is set to "reserve", the switchback to the preselected input is suppressed.

Manual switchover between inputs

The input can be switched over in the "Home" > "Transmitter" > "Exciter" menu by

pressing the input selector switch ("Selector") and then selecting the desired input.

Depending on the configuration and switching state (ON/OFF) of the automatic input

signal switchover function, this menu contains either the switch used to change the

preferred input or the switch used to switch over the active input.

The automatic input signal switchover function is configured in the following way:

1. Navigate to the following destination using the menu bar:

"Devices" > "Tx<n>" > "Exciter A|B" > "Input Auto"

2. The following parameters must be defined on the Automatic tab:

a)

for Configuration:

● Automatic:

● Preferred Input:

● Guard Time to Reserve:

● Guard Time Back:

● Switch to:

for Reserve Control:

● If Reserve Input Fails.

for Seamless Switching:

● Seamless Switching:

● Delay between Inputs

● Pre-Delay:

b)

c)

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

45

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Transmitter

Name

Description

Automatic (State)

d)

for Input Control:

● Force Exciter Changeover:

● Mute on Input Fail

● If Reserve Input fails

"Automatic input signal switchover" parameters

Indicates the state of the automatic input signal switchover function.

●

Not Ready:

The automatic switchover function is not ready. An input signal is

not present at the standby input or a switchover has already taken

place and the automatic switchover function is configured such

that automatic switchback is not permitted.

Ready:

The automatic switchover function is ready to switch the currently

active input over to the input currently not in use as soon as the

input signal of the currently active input fails.

Changed:

The automatic switchover function has switched over from the

preferred input to the standby input.

●

●

Value range

Access right

Read only

undefined, Not

Ready, Ready,

Changed+Ready,

Changed+Not

Ready

Seamless Switch-

ing

Indicates whether seamless switching of the input signal is possible.

Read only

undefined, not

Possible, Possi-

ble

"Not Possible" always appears if only one input signal is supplied or in

cases where two different data streams are present at the two inputs. If

seamless switching is possible, it always takes place immediately

when required, regardless of whether a "Guard Time to Reserve" or

"Guard Time Back" has been set.

Automatic

Activates automatic switchover of the input signal to the standby input

if the preferred input fails.

Off, On

Operation

Preferred Input

Used to select the preferred input which the automatic input signal

switchover function should use whenever possible.

Input 1, Input 2,

No Preference

Operation

Active Input

Switch to

Used to select the active input to be used when the automatic input

signal switchover function is off. If the automatic switchover function is

on, the input can only be switched over using this switch if Preferred

Input is set to "No Preference" or a switchover to the standby input has

taken place.

Used to set the operational response of the automatic switchover func-

tion.

●

"To Reserve Only":

The automatic switchover function switches over once from the

preferred input to the standby input and then assumes the "not

ready" state". Switching the active input over manually to the pre-

ferred input reactivates the automatic switchover function.

"To Reserve and Back":

Following successful switchover to the standby input, the auto-

matic switchover function can also switch back automatically if the

signal at the standby input fails.

●

Input 1, Input 2

Operation

Reserve Only,

Reserve & Back

Maintenance

Guard Time to

Reserve

Used to set a guard time which must elapse before the automatic

switchover function switches over to the standby input if the input sig-

nal at the preferred input fails. The set guard time has no effect if

seamless switching is possible. In this case, the switchover always

takes place immediately without interruption (i.e. seamlessly).

Maintenance

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

46

Name

Description

Value range

Access right

Guard Time Back Used to set a guard time which must elapse before the automatic

Maintenance

R&S®Tx9

If Reserve Fails

switchover function switches back to the preferred input if the input sig-

nal at the standby input fails. If seamless switching is possible, switch-

over always takes place immediately without interruption regardless of

the set guard time. If "to Reserve Only" was selected as the "Direc-

tion", the set guard time has no effect.

Used to determine whether the signal at the standby input is to be

monitored.

●

If the transmitter is operated with only one input signal or the

standby input is connected only temporarily, "Do Not Show Warn-

ing" must be selected.

If two redundant input signals are normally supplied to the trans-

mitter, "Show Warning" must be selected.

●

4.2.1.2 Automatic Exciter Switchover

Device View Description

Transmitter

Do Not Show

Warning, Show

Warning

Maintenance

The automatic exciter switchover function enables a faulty exciter to be automatically

switched over to a functional standby exciter.

In the "Exciter Automatic" menu it is possible to switch automatic switchover between

two exciters on and off and to select the basic operating behavior of the function. The

"Switch Mode" switch is used to select whether automatic switchover to a standby

exciter is to take place once only (Single Switch) or whether a switchback is also to be

performed if the standby exciter signals a fault, but the preselected exciter is no longer

faulty (Multiple Switch).

It is also possible to set a guard time which must always expire before a switchover

can take place. This prevents unwanted switchover operations resulting from brief fault

events.

Operation

One of the two exciters can be preselected for operation by pressing the exciter selec-

tor switch (or via the ExciterAuto -> Exciter Switch tab). This exciter is switched on

together with the output stage by pressing the "Program Path On" switch (in the

"Transmitter" menu). If necessary, the RF of the standby exciter can be switched on for

measuring and monitoring purposes by pressing the "Reserve Path (on)" switch (in the

"Transmitter" menu). A switchover operation causes the standby exciter to become the

main exciter and vice versa. The ON/OFF switches then act on the other exciter in

each case.

"Single Switch" Mode

If a fault occurs in the preselected exciter, the automatic switchover function will swap

the main and standby exciter and display an "Automatic changed" message.

Either the new state can now be accepted by changing the "preselected exciter"

("Automatic changed" disappears) or the automatic switchover function can be reset to

its original state by pressing "Reset Faults" (in the "Transmitter" menu).

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

47

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Transmitter

"Multiple Switch" Mode

This mode is identical to "Single Switch", except that following a double switchover

operation the "preselected" exciter becomes the active exciter again. The "Automatic

Changed" message is still displayed in this case. To delete this message, either the

new state of the automatic switchover can be adopted by pressing the "Recommand

Selection" button (in the "Transmitter" > "Exciter Auto" menu, "Exciter Switch" tab) or

the original state can be assumed again by pressing "Reset Faults" (in the Transmitter

menu).

4.2.2 Transmitter Status

Description

Indicates whether all components in the program path of the

transmitter have been switched on or off (reserve exciter

with "Dual Drive" redundancy concept and reserve output

stage with "active PA reserve" redundancy concept).

Indicates whether all components in the reserve path of the

transmitter have been switched on or off (reserve exciter

with "Dual Drive" redundancy concept and reserve output

stage with "active PA reserve" redundancy concept).

Value range

Access right

Off; On

Read Only

Off; On

Read Only

Name

Program On

Reserve On

Overall LED

RF LED

Read Only

Read Only

Yellow: Warning

Gray: Off

Green: OK

Red: Fault

Gray: Off

Green: OK

Yellow: Warning

Red: Fault

Yellow: Warning

Red: Fault

Reflection LED

Gray: Off

Read Only

Automatic (Backup Drive /

Dual Drive)

Ready (Backup Drive / Dual

Drive)

Indicates whether the automatic exciter switchover function

has been activated. If the automatic switchover function is

active, the system will switch over to the standby exciter if

the active exciter fails.

Indicates whether the automatic exciter switchover function

is ready. If "not ready" is indicated, either the automatic

exciter switchover function has already switched over to the

standby exciter or a fault has occurred in the exciter switch.

Off; On

Read Only

Yes; No

Read Only

changed Over (Backup

Drive / Dual Drive)

Indicates whether the automatic exciter switchover function

has switched over to a reserve exciter.

Read Only

switch Failed (Backup

Drive / Dual Drive)

Indicates that switchover to the reserve exciter has failed.

Read Only

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

48

R&S®Tx9

4.2.3 Amplifiers

Device View Description

Transmitter

Fig. 4-2: "Amplifiers" menu view (Multi‑Tx)

R&S PHU901/R&S PHU902/R&S PHV902: "Status" parameters

● Path: "Device View (Home)" > "Tx <n>" > "Output Stage" > "Amplifiers" > "Ampli-

fier <n>" > Tab "Status"

Name

Description

Value range

Access right

Indicates whether the amplifier has been switched on or off by the R&S

TCE900 Tx control.

Off, On

Read only

Indicates the status of the communication link between the amplifier

and the R&S TCE900 Tx control.

Ok, Warning

Read only

The status is indicated as follows:

● Ok

A link exists between the amplifier and the R&S TCE900 Tx con-

trol.

● Warning

No link exists between the amplifier and the R&S TCE900 Tx con-

trol. Check the power supply of the amplifier.

Indicates that the amplifier is receiving an input signal, the level of

which is too low.

●

If this message occurs at all amplifiers at the same time, the fault is

located at the exciter switch, splitter or exciter.

If this fault occurs at only some of the amplifiers, the output level of

the exciters and splitter must be checked.

If the fault occurs at only one amplifier, the self‑engaging connec-

tor of the RF signal on the rear panel of the amplifier must be

checked for mechanical damage.

●

●

No, Yes (warn-

ing)

Read only

Amplifier

Link

RF In Fail

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

49

Device View Description

Transmitter

Value range

Access right

No, Yes (warn-

ing)

Read only

No, Yes (fault)

Read only

R&S®Tx9

Name

Mute

Init Fail

Reflection

Indicates whether the reflection at the RF output is becoming too great.

Read only

No, Yes (warn-

ing)

Description

Indicates that the amplifier is suppressing its output signal.

This indicator appears in the following cases:

●

●

●

No input signal is present

During bias adjustment

An external absorber signals via connector X11 that it is overheat-

ing.

Indicates a fault if the amplifier detects an internal fault at power ON. If

other faults are indicated at the same time, the cause of these faults

must be rectified first. If the "Init Fail" fault still exists after other faults

have been rectified, the amplifier must be replaced.

In this case, the antenna as well as the link between the amplifiers and

the antenna via the coupling switches and output stage switches (if

present) must be checked.

The occurrence of reflection is stored in a nonvolatile memory. After the

reason for the reflection has been rectified, this message must be reset

manually by pressing the "Reset Faults Transmitter" button or "Reset

Faults System" button.

The shut‑off taps for the coolant must be checked. They must be open.

The occurrence of this message is stored in a nonvolatile memory. After

the reason for the overheating has been rectified, this message must be

reset manually by pressing the "Reset Faults Transmitter" button or

"Reset Faults System" button.

NOTE: Only personnel with the relevant special service training are

permitted to change the transistors.

●

Indicates a fault if the quiescent current of one or more transistors can-

not be adjusted.

●

"No Error": Automatic quiescent current adjustment has been per-

formed properly.

Abort Adjust: Adjustment has been aborted because a constant

temperature has not settled in the amplifier. In this case, adjust-

ment should be started again immediately after the fault has occur-

red.

"Error on PA On" or "Adjust Error": There is a technical fault in the

amplifier; the amplifier should be replaced.

●

Transistor Fail

Indicates that one or more driver or power transistors are defective.

No, Yes (fault)

Read only

BIAS Fail

Read only

No Error, Abort

Adjust, Error on

PA On, Adjust

Error

Doherty Active

Indicates whether the Doherty mode of the amplifier is active or not (not

valid for R&S TCE900).

Off, On

Read only

RF Power Fail

Indicates that the output power of the amplifier is more than 3 dB below

the nominal value.

No, Yes (fault)

Read only

Temp. Fail

Indicates that the amplifier has overheated internally.

No, Yes (fault)

Read only

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

50

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Transmitter

Name

Description

Freq. ID

With R&S PHU902 only:

Value range

Access right

String

Read Only

Indicates the frequency ranges in which the amplifier can be operated

in Doherty mode.

B2: 575 MHz to 660 MHz

B4: 470 MHz to 500 MHz; 660 MHz to 715 MHz

B5: 500 MHz to 530 MHz; 715 MHz to 750 MHz

B6: 530 MHz to 575 MHz; 750 MHz to 790 MHz

If the option is not suitable for the transmit frequency, the amplifier auto-

matically switches to broadband mode.

With R&S PHV902 only:

Indicates the frequency ranges in which the amplifier can be operated

in Doherty mode.

D1: 170 MHz to 179 MHz

D2: 179 MHz to 193 MHz; 224 MHz to 239 MHz

D3: 193 MHz to 207 MHz; 239 MHz to 254 MHz

D4: 207 MHz to 224 MHz

BB: Amplifier can only be operated in the broadband mode.

If the option is not suitable for the transmit frequency, the amplifier auto-

matically switches to broadband mode.

Regulation Fail

Indicates that the internal power regulation of the amplifier has reached

the limit of its control range.

No, Yes (fault)

Read only

This is an indication that one or more power transistors are defective.

Amplifier Temp.

Indicates the temperature of the amplifier.

0 °C to 150 °C

Read only

The amplifier temperature is usually a few degrees higher than the cool-

ant temperature. If it is more than 15 °C higher, either the shut‑off taps

for the coolant are closed or the flow rate of the coolant is too low

(chapter 4.12, "Cooling System", on page 210).

Absorber Fail

Indicates that overheating of the rack absorber has been detected.

No, Yes (warn-

ing)

Read only

Normally, this warning is signaled by all amplifiers of a transmitter

simultaneously. If the warning is signaled by only one amplifier, check

the rack cabling.

Coolant Temp.

Indicates the temperature of the coolant flowing out of the transmitter

rack toward the heat exchanger. The temperature must not exceed a

maximum value of 65 °C.

Read only

RF Monitor

Indicates the coupling attenuation of the "RF Monitor" test point on the

amplifier at 205.5 MHz (VHF amplifier) resp. 650 MHz (UHF amplifier).

0.00 dB to

+99.99 dB

Read only

AC Fail

Indicates a fault if the mains voltage has been interrupted.

The circuit breakers must be checked in this case.

No, Yes (warn-

ing)

Read only

DC Fail

Indicates whether one of the internal power supply units of the amplifier

is not delivering DC voltage.

No, Yes (fault)

Read only

Detection of a fault is only possible if the RF of the transmitter has been

switched on (Program on).

Supply Fail

Indicates that one of the internal power supply units is probably not

working.

No, Yes (fault)

Read only

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

51

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Transmitter

R&S PHR901 (VHF, Band II): "Status" parameters

● Path: "Device View (Home)" > "Tx <n>" > "Output Stage" > "Amplifiers" > "Ampli-

fier <n>" > Tab "Status"

Name

Beschreibung

Wertebereich

Zugriffsrecht

Amplifier

Indicates whether the amplifier has been switched on or off by the R&S

TCE900.

Off, On

Read Only

Mute

Indicates that the amplifier is suppressing its output signal.

No, Yes (warn-

ing)

Read only

This indicator appears in the following cases:

●

●

●

No input signal is present

During bias adjustment

An external absorber signals via connector X11 that it is overheat-

ing.

RF Power Fail

Indicates that the output power of the amplifier is more than 3 dB below

the nominal value.

No, Yes (Fault)

Read Only

Temp. Fail

Indicates that the amplifier has overheated internally.

No, Yes (fault)

Read only

The shut‑off taps for the coolant must be checked. They must be open.

The occurrence of this message is stored in a nonvolatile memory.

After the reason for the overheating has been rectified, this message

must be reset manually by pressing the "Reset Faults Transmitter" but-

ton or "Reset Faults System" button.

Supply Fail

Indicates that one of the internal power supply units is probably not

working.

No, Yes (Fault)

Read Only

Link

Indicates whether a communication link exists between the amplifier

and the R&S TCE900 Tx control.

On, Off

Read Only

If no link exists between the amplifier and the R&S TCE900 Tx control,

check the power supply of the amplifier.

Regulation Fail

Indicates that the internal power regulation of the amplifier has reached

the limit of its control range.

No, Yes (Fault)

Read Only

RF In Fail

No, Yes (Warn-

ing)

Read Only

This is an indication that one or more power transistors are defective.

This fault can also occur if the amplifier performs a system check fol-

lowing a TRANSISTOR_FAIL and then continues to run at reduced

power.

Indicates that the amplifier is receiving an input signal, the level of

which is too low.

●

If this message occurs at all amplifiers at the same time, the fault

is located at the exciter switch, splitter or exciter.

If this fault occurs at only some of the amplifiers, the output level

of the exciters and splitter must be checked.

If the fault occurs at only one amplifier, the self‑engaging connec-

tor of the RF signal on the rear panel of the amplifier must be

checked for mechanical damage.

●

●

Amplifier Temp.

Indicates the temperature of the amplifier. The amplifier should only be

switched on at temperatures above 0 °C.

0 °C to 150 °C

Read Only

AC Fail

DC Fail

Indicates a fault if the mains voltage has been interrupted. The circuit

breakers must be checked in this case.

No, Yes (Warn-

ing)

Read Only

Indicates whether one of the internal power supply units of the amplifier

is faulty (e.g. no DC voltage is being delivered).

No, Yes (Fault)

Read Only

Detection of a fault is only possible if the RF of the transmitter has

been switched on (Program on).

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

52

Device View Description

Transmitter

Wertebereich

Zugriffsrecht

No, Yes (Fault)

Read Only

R&S®Tx9

Name

Init Fail

Beschreibung

Indicates a fault if the amplifier detects an internal fault at power ON. If

other faults are indicated at the same time, the cause of these faults

must be rectified first. If the "Init Fail" fault still exists after other faults

have been rectified, the amplifier must be replaced.

Reflection

Indicates whether the reflection at the RF output is becoming too great.

Read Only

No, Yes (Warn-

ing)

In this case, the antenna as well as the link between the amplifiers and

the antenna via the combiners and output stage switches (if present)

must be checked.

The occurrence of reflection is stored in a nonvolatile memory. After

the reason for the reflection has been rectified, this message must be

reset manually by pressing the "Reset Faults Transmitter" button or

"Reset Faults System" button.

Coolant Temp.

Indicates the temperature of the coolant.

The coolant temperature is usually a few degrees lower than the ampli-

fier temperature.

0 °C to approx.

150 °C

AC 1

DC 1

Indicates that the AC voltage of power supply unit 1 is in the permissi-

ble range.

No, Yes

Read Only

Indicates whether the DC voltage of power supply unit 1 is in the per-

missible range.

No, Yes (Fault)

Read Only

Transistor Fail

Indicates that one or more driver or power transistors are defective.

No, Yes

Read Only

Absorber Fail

Indicates that overheating of the rack absorber has been detected.

No, Yes (Fault)

Read Only

This message is only output if an ON command has been issued and

the AC voltage is present at power supply unit 1.

NOTE: Only personnel with the relevant special service training are

permitted to change the transistors.

Normally, this warning is signaled by all amplifiers of a transmitter

simultaneously. If the warning is signaled by only one amplifier, check

the rack cabling.

AC 2

DC 2

BIAS Fail

Indicates that the AC voltage of power supply unit 2 is in the permissi-

ble range.

No, Yes

Read Only

Indicates whether the DC voltage of power supply unit 2 is in the per-

missible range.

No, Yes (Fault)

Read Only

This message is only output if an ON command has been issued and

the AC voltage is present at power supply unit 2.

●

Indicates a fault if the quiescent current of one or more transistors can-

not be adjusted.

●

"No Error": Automatic quiescent current adjustment has been per-

formed properly.

Abort Adjust: Adjustment has been aborted because a constant

temperature has not settled in the amplifier. In this case, adjust-

ment should be started again immediately after the fault has

occurred.

"Error on PA On" or "Adjust Error": There is a technical fault in the

amplifier; the amplifier should be replaced.

●

Read only

No Error, Abort

Adjust, Error on

PA On, Adjust

Error

RF Monitor

Indicates the coupling attenuation of the "RF Monitor" RF test point on

the amplifier (87.5 MHz to 108 MHz).

52,6 dB to 58,6

dB

Read Only

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

53

Device View Description

Transmitter

R&S®Tx9

Name

AC 3

DC 3

Amplifier

Link

RF In Fail

Beschreibung

Wertebereich

Zugriffsrecht

Indicates that the AC voltage of power supply unit 3 is in the permissi-

ble range.

No, Yes

Read Only

Indicates whether the DC voltage of power supply unit 3 is in the per-

missible range.

No, Yes (Fault)

Read Only

This message is only output if an ON command has been issued and

the AC voltage is present at power supply unit 3.

R&S PMU901: "Status" parameters

● Path: "Device View (Home)" > "Tx <n>" > "Output Stage" > "Amplifiers" > "Ampli-

fier <n>" > Tab "Status"

Name

Description

Value range

Access right

Indicates whether the amplifier has been switched on or off by the R&S

TCE900.

Off, On

Read only

Indicates the status of the communication link between the amplifier

and the R&S TCE900 Tx control.

Ok, Warning

Read only

No, Yes (warn-

ing)

Read only

The status is indicated as follows:

● OK

A link exists between the amplifier and the R&S TCE900 Tx con-

trol.

● Warning

No link exists between the amplifier and the R&S TCE900 Tx con-

trol. Check the power supply of the amplifier.

Indicates that the amplifier is receiving an input signal, the level of

which is too low.

●

If this message occurs at all amplifiers at the same time, the fault

is located at the exciter switch, splitter or exciter.

If this fault occurs at only some of the amplifiers, the output level

of the exciters and splitter must be checked.

If the fault occurs at only one amplifier, the self‑engaging connec-

tor of the RF signal on the rear panel of the amplifier must be

checked for mechanical damage.

●

●

This indicator appears in the following cases:

●

●

●

No input signal

During bias adjustment

An external absorber signals via connector X11 that it is overheat-

ing.

Indicates a fault if the amplifier detects an internal fault at power ON. If

other faults are indicated at the same time, the cause of these faults

must be rectified first. If the "Init Fail" fault still exists after other faults

have been rectified, the amplifier must be replaced.

Mute

Indicates that the amplifier is suppressing its output signal.

No, Yes (warn-

ing)

Read only

Init Fail

No, Yes (fault)

Read only

RF Monitor

Indicates the coupling attenuation of the "RF Monitor" test point on the

amplifier at 650 MHz.

0.00 dB to

+99.99 dB

Read only

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

54

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Transmitter

Name

Description

Value range

Access right

Reflection

Indicates whether the reflection at the RF output is becoming too great.

Read only

No, Yes (warn-

ing)

In this case, the antenna as well as the link between the amplifiers and

the antenna via the combiners and output stage switches (if present)

must be checked.

The occurrence of reflection is stored in a nonvolatile memory. After

the reason for the reflection has been rectified, this message must be

reset manually by pressing the "Reset Faults Transmitter" button or

"Reset Faults System" button.

RF Power Fail

Indicates that the output power of the amplifier is more than 3 dB below

the nominal value.

No, Yes (fault)

Read only

Temp. Fail

Indicates that the amplifier has overheated internally.

No, Yes (fault)

Read only

Transistor Fail

Indicates that one or more driver or power transistors are defective.

No, Yes

Read only

BIAS Fail

Read only

No Error, Abort

Adjust, Error on

PA On, Adjust

Error

The shut‑off taps for the coolant must be checked. They must be open.

The occurrence of this message is stored in a nonvolatile memory.

After the reason for the overheating has been rectified, this message

must be reset manually by pressing the "Reset Faults Transmitter" but-

ton or "Reset Faults System" button.

NOTE: Only personnel with the relevant special service training are

permitted to change the transistors.

●

Indicates a fault if the quiescent current of one or more transistors can-

not be adjusted.

●

"No Error": Automatic quiescent current adjustment has been per-

formed properly.

Abort Adjust: Adjustment has been aborted because a constant

temperature has not settled in the amplifier. In this case, adjust-

ment should be started again immediately after the fault has

occurred.

"Error on PA On" or "Adjust Error": There is a technical fault in the

amplifier; the amplifier should be replaced.

●

Amplifier Temp.

Indicates the temperature of the amplifier. The amplifier should only be

switched on at temperatures above 0 °C.

‒30 °C to 120 °C Read only

Frequency Fail

No, Yes (fault)

Read only

This fault occurs if the tunit (tuning unit) used in the amplifier is not suit-

able for the RF of the exciter. The tunit is a plug-in module and is on

the top side of the amplifier. Please check that the used tunit is suitable

for the frequency which is set in the Output menu of the exciter, and

whether it has been installed in the amplifier in the "Doherty" or "Broad-

band" position corresponding to the setting in the "Basic Config" menu.

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

55

R&S®Tx9

Name

Freq. ID

Description

Device View Description

Transmitter

Value range

Access right

1 to 7, BB, mis-

match

Read only

Shows the ID of the tunit (tuning unit) which is installed in the amplifier.

The operating frequency which is set for the transmitter, and the result-

ing center frequency of the operating channel must be suitable for the

operating frequency range of the tunit.

The ID "BB" is shown if the tunit is fitted in the position (slot) "BB" (=

broadband mode). "Missmatch" is shown if no tunit is built in.

1: 502 MHz to 518 MHz; 614 MHz to 630 MHz; 750 MHz to 758 MHz

2: 470 MHz to 486 MHz; 574 MHz to 598 MHz; 710 MHz to 726 MHz;

830 MHz to 854 MHz

3: 558 MHz to 574 MHz; 686 MHz to 710 MHz; 814 MHz to 830 MHz

4: 550 MHz to 558 MHz; 670 MHz to 686 MHz; 790 MHz to 814 MHz

5: 534 MHz to 550 MHz; 646 MHz to 670 MHz; 774 MHz to 790 MHz

6: 518 MHz to 534 MHz; 630 MHz to 646 MHz; 758 MHz to 774 MHz

7: 486 MHz to 502 MHz; 598 MHz to 614 MHz; 726 MHz to 750 MHz;

854 MHz to 862 MHz

This is an indication that one or more power transistors are defective.

This fault can also occur if the amplifier performs a system check fol-

lowing a TRANSISTOR_FAIL and then continues to run at reduced

power.

Regulation Fail

Indicates that the internal power regulation of the amplifier has reached

the limit of its control range.

No, Yes (fault)

Read only

Blower Fail

Indicates a fault if one of the fans of the amplifier module has failed.

No, Yes (fault)

Read only

Absorber Fail

Indicates that overheating of the rack absorber has been detected.

No, Yes (fault)

Read only

Normally, this warning is signaled by all amplifiers of a transmitter

simultaneously. If the warning is signaled by only one amplifier, check

the rack cabling.

Air Inlet

Indicates the inlet air temperature of the amplifier module.

Read only

‒30 °C to

+120 °C

It should always be in the range +1 °C to +45 °C.

AC Fail

AC 1 Ok

AC 2 Ok

DC Fail

Indicates a fault if the mains voltage has been interrupted. The circuit

breakers must be checked in this case.

No, Yes (warn-

ing)

Read only

Indicates that the mains AC voltage at power supply unit 1 is in the per-

missible range (only valid for PMU901 with power supply standby).

No, Yes

Indicates that the mains AC voltage at power supply unit 2 is in the per-

missible range (only valid for PMU901 with power supply standby).

No, Yes

Indicates whether one of the internal power supply units of the amplifier

is faulty (e.g. no DC voltage is being delivered).

No, Yes (fault)

Read only

Detection of a fault is only possible if the RF of the transmitter has

been switched on (Program on).

DC 1 Ok

Indicates whether the DC voltage of power supply unit 1 is in the per-

missible range.

No, Yes (fault)

Read only

This message is only output if an ON command has been issued and

the AC voltage is present at power supply unit 1 (only valid for

PMU901 with power supply standby).

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

56

Device View Description

Transmitter

Value range

Access right

No, Yes (fault)

Read only

Name

Description

DC 2 Ok

Indicates whether the DC voltage of power supply unit 2 is in the per-

missible range.

This message is only output if an ON command has been issued and

the AC voltage is present at power supply unit 2 (only valid for

PMU901 with power supply standby).

Supply Fail

Indicates that one of the internal power supply units is probably not

working.

No, Yes (fault)

Read only

Supply 1 Fail

Indicates that power supply unit 1 (right) is probably faulty (only valid

for PMU901 with power supply standby).

No, Yes (fault)

Read only

Supply 2 Fail

Indicates that power supply unit 2 (left) is probably faulty (only valid

for PMU901 with power supply standby).

No, Yes (fault)

Read only

Air Outlet

Indicates the outlet air temperature of the amplifier module.

Read only

‒30 °C to

+120 °C

R&S PMV901: "Status" parameters

● Path: "Device View (Home)" > "Tx <n>" > "Output Stage" > "Amplifiers" > "Ampli-

fier <n>" > Tab "Status"

Name

Description

Value range

Access right

Indicates whether the amplifier has been switched on or off by the R&S

TCE900 Tx control.

Off, On

Read only

Indicates the status of the communication link between the amplifier

and the R&S TCE900 Tx control.

Ok, Warning

Read only

R&S®Tx9

Amplifier

Link

RF In Fail

No, Yes (warn-

ing)

Read only

The status is indicated as follows:

● OK

A link exists between the amplifier and the R&S TCE900 Tx con-

trol.

● Warning

No link exists between the amplifier and the R&S TCE900 Tx con-

trol. Check the power supply of the amplifier.

Indicates that the amplifier is receiving an input signal, the level of

which is too low.

●

If this message occurs at all amplifiers at the same time, the fault

is located at the exciter switch, splitter or exciter.

If this fault occurs at only some of the amplifiers, the output level

of the exciters and splitter must be checked.

If the fault occurs at only one amplifier, the self‑engaging connec-

tor of the RF signal on the rear panel of the amplifier must be

checked for mechanical damage.

●

●

This indicator appears in the following cases:

●

●

●

No input signal

During bias adjustment

An external absorber signals via connector X11 that it is overheat-

ing.

Indicates a fault if the amplifier detects an internal fault at power ON. If

other faults are indicated at the same time, the cause of these faults

must be rectified first. If the "Init Fail" fault still exists after other faults

have been rectified, the amplifier must be replaced.

Mute

Indicates that the amplifier is suppressing its output signal.

No, Yes (warn-

ing)

Read only

Init Fail

No, Yes (fault)

Read only

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

57

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Transmitter

Name

Description

Value range

Access right

RF Monitor

Indicates the coupling attenuation of the "RF Monitor" test point on the

amplifier at 650 MHz.

0.00 dB to

+99.99 dB

Read only

Reflection

Indicates whether the reflection at the RF output is becoming too great.

Read only

No, Yes (warn-

ing)

In this case, the antenna as well as the link between the amplifiers and

the antenna via the combiners and output stage switches (if present)

must be checked.

The occurrence of reflection is stored in a nonvolatile memory. After

the reason for the reflection has been rectified, this message must be

reset manually by pressing the "Reset Faults Transmitter" button or

"Reset Faults System" button.

RF Power Fail

Indicates that the output power of the amplifier is more than 3 dB below

the nominal value.

No, Yes (fault)

Read only

Temp. Fail

Indicates that the amplifier has overheated internally.

No, Yes (fault)

Read only

Transistor Fail

Indicates that one or more driver or power transistors are defective.

No, Yes

Read only

BIAS Fail

Read only

No Error, Abort

Adjust, Error on

PA On, Adjust

Error

The shut‑off taps for the coolant must be checked. They must be open.

The occurrence of this message is stored in a nonvolatile memory.

After the reason for the overheating has been rectified, this message

must be reset manually by pressing the "Reset Faults Transmitter" but-

ton or "Reset Faults System" button.

NOTE: Only personnel with the relevant special service training are

permitted to change the transistors.

●

Indicates a fault if the quiescent current of one or more transistors can-

not be adjusted.

●

"No Error": Automatic quiescent current adjustment has been per-

formed properly.

Abort Adjust: Adjustment has been aborted because a constant

temperature has not settled in the amplifier. In this case, adjust-

ment should be started again immediately after the fault has

occurred.

"Error on PA On" or "Adjust Error": There is a technical fault in the

amplifier; the amplifier should be replaced.

●

Amplifier Temp.

Indicates the temperature of the amplifier. The amplifier should only be

switched on at temperatures above 0 °C.

‒30 °C to 120 °C Read only

Doherty Active

Indicates whether the Doherty mode of the amplifier is active or not.

No, Yes (Fault)

Read only

Freq. ID

Indicates the frequency ranges in which the amplifier can be operated

in Doherty mode.

D1 to D4, BB,

mismatch

Read only

D1: 170 MHz to 179 MHz

D2: 179 MHz to 193 MHz; 224 MHz to 239 MHz

D3: 193 MHz to 207 MHz; 239 MHz to 254 MHz

B4: 207 MHz to 224 MHz

BB: Amplifier can only be operated in the broadband mode.

If the option is not suitable for the transmit frequency, the amplifier

automatically switches to broadband mode.

This is an indication that one or more power transistors are defective.

This fault can also occur if the amplifier performs a system check fol-

lowing a TRANSISTOR_FAIL and then continues to run at reduced

power.

Regulation Fail

Indicates that the internal power regulation of the amplifier has reached

the limit of its control range.

No, Yes (fault)

Read only

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

58

Device View Description

Transmitter

R&S®Tx9

AC Fail

AC 1 Ok

AC 2 Ok

DC Fail

Name

Description

Value range

Access right

Blower Fail

Indicates a fault if one of the fans of the amplifier module has failed.

No, Yes (fault)

Read only

Absorber Fail

Indicates that overheating of the rack absorber has been detected.

No, Yes (fault)

Read only

Normally, this warning is signaled by all amplifiers of a transmitter

simultaneously. If the warning is signaled by only one amplifier, check

the rack cabling.

Air Inlet

Indicates the inlet air temperature of the amplifier module.

Read only

‒30 °C to

+120 °C

It should always be in the range +1 °C to +45 °C.

Indicates a fault if the mains voltage has been interrupted. The circuit

breakers must be checked in this case.

No, Yes (warn-

ing)

Read only

Indicates that the mains AC voltage at power supply unit 1 is in the per-

missible range (only valid for PMVU901 with power supply

standby).

No, Yes

Indicates that the mains AC voltage at power supply unit 2 is in the per-

missible range (only valid for PMV901 with power supply standby).

No, Yes

Indicates whether one of the internal power supply units of the amplifier

is faulty (e.g. no DC voltage is being delivered).

No, Yes (fault)

Read only

Detection of a fault is only possible if the RF of the transmitter has

been switched on (Program on).

DC 1 Ok

Indicates whether the DC voltage of power supply unit 1 is in the per-

missible range.

No, Yes (fault)

Read only

This message is only output if an ON command has been issued and

the AC voltage is present at power supply unit 1 (only valid for

PMV901 with power supply standby).

DC 2 Ok

Indicates whether the DC voltage of power supply unit 2 is in the per-

missible range.

No, Yes (fault)

Read only

This message is only output if an ON command has been issued and

the AC voltage is present at power supply unit 2 (only valid for

PMV901 with power supply standby).

Supply Fail

Indicates that one of the internal power supply units is probably not

working.

No, Yes (fault)

Read only

Supply 1 Fail

Indicates that power supply unit 1 (right) is probably faulty (only valid

for PMV901 with power supply standby).

No, Yes (fault)

Read only

Supply 2 Fail

Indicates that power supply unit 2 (left) is probably faulty (only valid

for PMV901 with power supply standby).

No, Yes (fault)

Read only

Air Outlet

Indicates the outlet air temperature of the amplifier module.

Read only

‒30 °C to

+120 °C

"Supply" parameters

fier <n>" > Tab "Supply"

● Path: "Device View (Home)" > "Tx <n>" > "Output Stage" > "Amplifiers" > "Ampli-

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

59

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Transmitter

Name

Description

Value range

Access right

V Aux In (Supply)

Indicates the supply voltage of the amplifier control board.

Read only

This auxiliary voltage is generated directly by the power supply unit.

This voltage should be present at the amplifier control board even if the

amplifier has been switched off by the R&S TCE900. If no voltage is

indicated, the miniature circuit breakers of the power distribution unit as

well as the self‑engaging contacts on the rear panel of the amplifier

must be checked first of all. If no fault can be found in the energy feed,

the amplifier must be replaced.

V+ Mon (Supply)

Indicates the voltage supplied to the transistor blocks by the power

supply unit.

If the displayed voltage is 0 V, either the power supply unit is faulty or

the amplifier has not been switched on by the R&S TCE900.

I DC (Amplifier)

Indicates the total current flowing through the internal power supply

units.

If the display shows 0 A, the amplifier may not have been switched on

by the R&S TCE900.

Other possible faults are:

●

●

●

RF In Fail

Temperature Fail

DC Fail

I Pre (Amplifier)

Indicates the current flowing through the transistors of the preamplifier

module.

V5V ACB (Ampli-

fier Control

Board)

Indicates the 5 V auxiliary voltage which is generated on the amplifier

control board from the auxiliary voltage (V_AUX_IN) of the power sup-

ply unit.

If no voltage is indicated, the miniature circuit breakers of the energy

distribution unit and also the self‑engaging contacts on the rear panel

of the amplifier should be checked first of all.

If no fault can be found in the energy feed, the amplifier must be

replaced.

Read only

Read only

Read only

Read only

V 3V5 (Amplifier

Control Board)

Indicates the 3.5 V auxiliary voltage which is generated on the amplifier

control board from the auxiliary voltage (V_AUX_IN) of the power sup-

ply unit.

Read only

If no voltage is indicated, the miniature circuit breakers of the energy

distribution unit and also the self‑engaging contacts on the rear panel

of the amplifier should be checked first of all.

If no fault can be found in the energy feed, the amplifier must be

replaced.

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

60

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Transmitter

Name

Description

Value range

Access right

V 12 Mon (Pre

Amplifier)

Indicates the 12 V auxiliary voltage.

●

Read only

V Pre Mon (Pre

Amplifier)

Indicates the 20 V supply voltage of the preamplifier.

●

Read only

R&S PHU901, R&S PHU902, R&S PHV902, R&S PHR901: The

auxiliary voltage is generated on the preamplifier board from the

20 V supply voltage (V PRE MON). If the amplifier has not been

switched on by the R&S TCE900 the voltage is approx. 8 V.

R&S PMU901, R&S PMV901: The auxiliary voltage is generated

on the amplifier board from the 20 V supply voltage

(V_PRE_MON). If the amplifier has not been switched on by the

R&S TCE900, the voltage is 0 V.

R&S PHU901, R&S PHU902, R&S PHV902: In the ON state, the

voltage is approx. 20 V and is generated on the preamplifier

board. The displayed voltage is 0 V if the amplifier has been

switched off by the R&S TCE900. If no voltage is indicated in the

ON state, the miniature circuit breakers of the energy distribution

unit and also the self‑engaging contacts on the rear panel of the

amplifier should be checked first of all. If no fault can be found in

the energy feed, the amplifier must be replaced.

R&S PMU901: As for PHU901, except that here the 20 V voltage

is generated on the amplifier board.

R&S PMV901: not existing.

●

●

●

Name

I PRE

I DRV

I 1A

I 2A

I 3A

I 1B

I 2B

I 3B

R&S PHU901/R&S PHU902/R&S PHV902: "Transistors" parameters

● Path: "Device View (Home)" > "Tx <n>" > "Output Stage" > "Amplifiers" > "Ampli-

fier <n>" > Tab "Transistors"

Description

Value range

Access right

Indicates the current flowing through the transistors of the preamplifier

module.

0 A to 5 A

Read only

Indicates the current flowing through transistors V12A and V12B of the

driver module.

0 A to 40 A

Read only

Indicates the current flowing through transistors V14 and V15 of output

stage module 1 in transistor block A.

0 A to 40 A

Read only

Indicates the current flowing through transistors V16 and V17 of output

stage module 2 in transistor block A.

0 A to 40 A

Read only

Indicates the current flowing through transistors V18 and V19 of output

stage module 3 in transistor block A (not valid for R&S PHV902).

0 A to 40 A

Read only

Indicates the current flowing through transistors V24 and V25 of output

stage module 1 in transistor block B.

0 A to 40 A

Read only

Indicates the current flowing through transistors V26 and V27 of output

stage module 2 in transistor block B.

0 A to 40 A

Read only

Indicates the current flowing through transistors V28 and V29 of output

stage module 3 in transistor block B (not valid for R&S PHV902)..

0 A to 40 A

Read only

R&S PHR901 (VHF, Band II): "Transistors" parameters

● Path: "Device View (Home)" > "Tx <n>" > "Output Stage" > "Amplifiers" > "Ampli-

fier <n>" > Tab "Transistors"

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

61

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Transmitter

Name

I DRV

I 101

I 102

I 103

I 104

I 105

I 106

I 107

I 108

Name

I PRE

I DRV

I 1A

I 2A

I 3A

I 1B

I 2B

I 3B

Description

Indicates the current flowing through transistors T1000 and T1050 of

the preamplifier/driver.

Value range

Access right

0 A to 5 A

Read only

Indicates the current flowing through transistor V101 of output stage

module 1 in transistor block A.

0 A to 40 A

Read only

Indicates the current flowing through transistor V102 of output stage

module 1 in transistor block A.

0 A to 40 A

Read only

Indicates the current flowing through transistor V103 of output stage

module 2 in transistor block A.

0 A to 40 A

Read only

Indicates the current flowing through transistor V104 of output stage

module 2 in transistor block A.

0 A to 40 A

Read only

Indicates the current flowing through transistor V105 of output stage

module 3 in transistor block B.

0 A to 40 A

Read only

Indicates the current flowing through transistor V106 of output stage

module 3 in transistor block B.

0 A to 40 A

Read only

Indicates the current flowing through transistor V107 of output stage

module 4 in transistor block B.

0 A to 40 A

Read only

Indicates the current flowing through transistor V108 of output stage

module 4 in transistor block B.

0 A to 40 A

Read only

R&S PMU901/R&S PMV901: "Transistors" parameters

● Path: "Device View (Home)" > "Tx <n>" > "Output Stage" > "Amplifiers" > "Ampli-

fier <n>" > Tab "Transistors"

Beschreibung

Wertebereich

Zugriffsrecht

Zeigt den Strom durch die Transistoren des Vorverstärkermoduls an.

0 A bis 5 A

Read Only

Zeigt den Strom durch den Transistor V401 an.

0 A bis 40 A

Read Only

Zeigt den Strom durch den Transistor V500 im Transistorblock A an.

0 A bis 40 A

Read Only

Zeigt den Strom durch den Transistor V1500 im Transistorblock A an.

0 A bis 40 A

Read Only

Zeigt den Strom durch den Transistor V2500 im Transistorblock A an

(gilt nicht für R&S PMV901).

0 A bis 40 A

Read Only

Zeigt den Strom durch den Transistor V600 im Transistorblock B an.

0 A bis 40 A

Read Only

Zeigt den Strom durch den Transistor V1600 im Transistorblock B an.

0 A bis 40 A

Read Only

Zeigt den Strom durch den Transistor V2600 im Transistorblock B an

(gilt nicht für R&S PMV901).

0 A bis 40 A

Read Only

R&S PHU901/R&S PHU902/R&S PHV902/R&S PMV901: "RF Levels" parameters

● Path: "Device View (Home)" > "Tx <n>" > "Output Stage" > "Amplifiers" > "Ampli-

fier <n>" > Tab "RF Levels"

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

62

Device View Description

Transmitter

R&S®Tx9

Name

Power A

Power B

Description

Value range

Access right

Indicates the measured voltage of the RF detector in transistor block A. 0 V to 8 V

Read only

Indicates the measured voltage of the RF detector in transistor block B. 0 V to 8 V

Read only

Power V Ref

Indicates the nominal value which is predefined by the R&S TCE900

for internal regulation of the output power.

0 V to 6 V

Read only

Power Out

Indicates the measured voltage of the RF detector at the output of the

amplifier.

0 V to 8 V

Read only

Reflected Out

Indicates the measured voltage of the RF detector for reflected power

at the output of the amplifier.

0 V to 8 V

Read only

R&S PMU901: "RF Levels" parameters

● Path: "Device View (Home)" > "Tx <n>" > "Output Stage" > "Amplifiers" > "Ampli-

fier <n>" > Tab "RF Levels"

Name

Beschreibung

Wertebereich

Zugriffsrecht

Power V Ref

Zeigt den Sollwert an, der durch die R&S TCE900 für die interne Rege-

lung der Ausgangsleistung vorgegeben wird.

0 V bis 6 V

Read Only

Power Out

Zeigt die gemessene Spannung des RF-Detektors am Ausgang des

Verstärkers an.

0 V bis 8 V

Read Only

Reflected Out

Zeigt die gemessene Spannung des RF-Detektors für die Rücklaufleis-

tung am Ausgang des Verstärkers an.

0 V bis 8 V

Read Only

R&S PHR901 (VHF, Band II): "RF Levels" parameters

● Pfad: "Device View (Home)" > "Tx <n>" > "Output Stage" > "Amplifiers" > "Ampli-

fier <n>" > Tab "RF Levels"

Name

Description

Power In

Shows the measured power at the amplifier input.

Value range

Access right

0.000 W to

0.101 W

Read only

Power Driver

Shows the measured power at the amplifier driver stage.

0.0 W to 126.0 W Read only

Power A

Indicates the measured power of the RF detector in transistor block A.

Read only

Power B

Indicates the measured power of the RF detector in transistor block B.

Read only

Power V Ref

Indicates the nominal value which is predefined by the R&S TCE900

for internal regulation of the output power.

0 % to 100.00 % Read only

Power Out

Shows the measured power of the RF detector at the output of the

amplifier.

0.00 W to

7500.00 W

Reflected Out

Shows the measured power of the RF detector for the reflected power

at the output of the amplifier.

0.00 W to

1500.00 W

Read only

Read only

0.00 W to

10334.00 W

0.00 W to

10334.00 W

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

63

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Transmitter

"Type Plate" parameters

● Path: "Device View (Home)" > "Tx <n>" > "Output Stage" > "Amplifiers" > "Ampli-

fier <n>" > Tab "Type Plate"

Information about the amplifier is set at the factory.

Name

Name

Description

Instrument designation

Value range

Access right

Part Number

R&S material number and order number of the instrument. Specify this

number when reporting faults.

Read only

Read only

Read only

Read only

Read only

Read only

Read only

Variant

Instrument variant

Product Index

Production index (parts change index)

Serial Number

Serial number

Production Date

Production date

SW/FW/Bios

Number

Software, firmware or BIOS number

4.2.4 Rack

"Status Rack" parameters

Name

Absorber

Description

Value range Access right

With multi‑rack transmitters, this indicates whether one

of the rack absorbers is overheating. This fault can

occur if several amplifiers of a rack fail and additionally

there is a fault in the cooling system.

Green: OK

Read Only

Red: too hot

Cabinet Door

Indicates whether the rear rack door is open or closed

(does not apply to TMU9).

Green:

Closed

Read Only

Overvoltage Protectors

Indicates whether the overvoltage protection for the

respective component is still functioning.

Yellow: Open

Green: OK

Read Only

Red: Fault

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

64

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Exciter DVB-T2

4.2.5 Output Stage

"Commissioning" parameters

Name

Absorber

Description

Value range Access right

With multi‑rack transmitters, this indicates whether one

of the rack absorbers is overheating. This fault can

occur if several amplifiers of a rack fail and additionally

there is a fault in the cooling system.

Green: OK

Read Only

Red: too hot

Cabinet Door

Indicates whether the rear rack door is open or closed. Green:

Closed

Read Only

external Fault

12V Control

Indicates whether an external fault message exists at

terminal X41 of the mains distribution board. This func-

tion is only available if the "use external faults" check

mark has been set in the Commissioning dialog box for

this rack.

Indicates whether a backup power supply unit connec-

ted to terminal X42 of the mains distribution board is

still working. This function is only available if the "con-

trol external 12V supply" check mark has been set in

the Commissioning dialog box for this rack.

Yellow: Open

Green: no

Fault

Red: Fault

Read Only

Green: OK

Read Only

Red: Fault

Overvoltage Protectors

Indicates whether the overvoltage protection for the

respective component is still functioning.

Green: OK

Read Only

Red: Fault

4.3 Exciter DVB-T2

4.3.1 Coder for DVB-T2

To operate the transmitter in DVB‑T2 mode, an appropriate software option must be

activated using an option kex.

This function is used to set the DVB transmission parameters required for coding and

modulation and to check the used (TPS) settings (TPS = transmission parameter sig-

naling) that are signaled during transmission.

The network configuration parameters are used to set the higher‑level parameters for

DVB‑T2 that comply with the standard and are valid for all physical layer pipes (PLP).

The L1 frame information parameters are used to configure the "L1 post signaling".

The PLP parameters are used to make various settings for the possible PLPs. When

streaming via TS (TS Stream setting), the PLP parameters can be configured for

exactly one PLP. If, however, T2MI is active (T2MI = On), several PLPs from the T2MI

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

65

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Exciter ATSC

Name

Description

Test Signal (Non-

linear Extension)

Generates signals with different modulation in order to increase the

video S/N ratio using an external measuring instrument. Measurement

of the video S/N ratio and adjustment of the associated slopes allows

the S/N ratio to be optimized for various picture contents.

Value range

Access right

Black, Grey,

White, Off

Maintenance

Black Slope

(Nonlinear Exten-

sion)

Grey Slope (Non-

linear Extension)

White Slope

(Nonlinear Exten-

sion)

Used to optimize the video S/N ratio at high levels.

-50% to 50%

Maintenance

The value can only be changed if the nonlinear precorrector is in

"Stop" mode and the test signal "Black" has been activated.

Used to optimize the video S/N ratio at medium levels.

-50% to 50%

Maintenance

The value can only be changed if the nonlinear precorrector is in

"Stop" mode and the test signal "Grey" has been activated.

Used to optimize the video S/N ratio at low levels.

-50% to 50%

Maintenance

The value can only be changed if the nonlinear precorrector is in

"Stop" mode and the test signal "White" has been activated.

Phase Correction

(FM Carrier 1/2)

Indicates whether the sound phase shifter for carrier 1 and carrier 2 is

switched on.

Off, On

Maintenance

Trigger Point 1/2

(FM Carrier 1/2)

Indicates the position defined for the respective onset point of the

phase shifter (referenced to modulation of the picture signal).

0% to 100%

Maintenance

Slope 1/2 (FM

Carrier 1/2)

Indicates the value that has been set for the slope at the respective

onset point of the phase shifter.

-50% to 50%

Maintenance

The setting can be changed here.

The setting can be changed here.

The setting can be changed here.

4.6 Exciter ATSC

4.6.1 Coder for ATSC

To operate the transmitter in ATSC mode, an appropriate software option must be acti-

vated using an option key.

The ATSC TV standard can be used both in single frequency networks (SFN) and in

multiple frequency networks (MFN). In an SFN, the time at which an ATSC symbol is

transmitted is set automatically via the transmission control protocol (TCP). The net-

work mode is selected in the SFN menu. Whether a TCP is present in the data stream

is indicated in the two Input menus.

In the Configuration menu, it is possible to activate transmission to mobile terminal

equipment and also to set the transmitter IDs for operation in a network.

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

142

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Exciter ATSC

"Configuration" parameters

● Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > ATSC Coder > Configuration

To operate the transmitter in Mobile DTV (MDTV) mode, an appropriate software

option must be activated using an option key.

Name

Description

Value range

Access right

Indicates whether the coding for Mobile DTV is switched on or off.

Off, On

Maintenance

Mobile DTV (Con-

figuration)

MHE PID (Config-

uration)

Indicates which MHE PID is set.

The setting can be changed here.

0 to 8191

Maintenance

The packet ID that is set is the one containing the Mobile DTV data

stream. The MHE PID is only available if Mobile DTV has been set to

"On".

Frame Status

(Configuration)

Indicates whether the ATSC coder is synchronized using the TCP

frames contained in the data stream.

Locked,

Unlocked

Read only

A fault can occur if the fed transport stream does not contain a TCP. In

this case, the status display of the active input would signal a corre-

sponding TCP fault.

Indicates whether mobile data is contained in the input data stream.

Found, Not found Read only

This display is only available if Mobile DTV has been set to "On".

Mobile Content

(Configuration)

RF Watermark

(Localization)

Indicates the set RF watermark level.

The setting can be changed here.

It is the level of the RF watermark signal relative to the useful signal.

If "Off" is set, no RF watermark signal is generated. The RF watermark

allows a distinction to be made between the RF signals of individual

transmitters in single‑frequency networks for measuring purposes. To

enable this, the transmitter ID, for example, is transmitted cyclically in

the watermark.

‒21 dB to ‒

39 dB in steps of

3 dB, Off

Maintenance

Network ID

(Localization)

Indicates the set network ID.

The setting can be changed here.

0 to 495

Maintenance

Using the network ID, several transmitters in a single‑frequency net-

work can be combined to form a group. All the transmitters in a group

must be assigned different Tx addresses.

Tx Address

(Localization)

Indicates the set transmitter address.

The setting can be changed here.

0 to 31

Maintenance

The transmitter address allows a distinction to be made between the

individual transmitters in a single‑frequency network.

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

143

R&S®Tx9

"Test" parameters

Device View Description

Exciter ATSC

Name

Description

Generate Test

Signal

Indicates which test signal is to be generated.

● Off

Value range

Access right

Off, PRBS, Sin-

gle Carrier

Maintenance

●

●

Switches off test signal generation.

PRBS

Generates a PRBS sequence instead of the payload.

Single Carrier

Generates an unmodulated single carrier.

The frequency of the single carrier is at the center of the band and

therefore deviates from the vision carrier frequency.

This test signal can be used to measure the phase noise of the

synthesizer. The phase noise must be measured via the RF Moni-

tor Out connector (X61). The cable connected to RF Out (X60)

must be removed. In order to protect the amplifiers, this test signal

is only generated if the output of the exciter is open.

The setting can be changed here.

Testmode

Indicates whether one of the test signals is activated.

Off, On

Read only

If a test signal is activated, decoding of the transmitted signal by the

transmitter will not be possible.

4.6.2 Setting Transmit Frequency and Output Power

The transmit frequency is configured separately for each R&S TCE900 exciter with an

accuracy of ±1 Hz. For the DVB‑T and DVB‑T2 transmission standards, the channel

center frequency must be set during this process.

The output power of the R&S TCE900 exciters is regulated internally to +13 dBm for

DTV. It can be attenuated via an integrated attenuator by up to 9 dB (in steps of 3 dB).

Depending on the number of amplifiers that a transmitter has, the attenuator in the

R&S TCE900 exciter has to be configured as described below.

The transmit frequency and output power are configured in the following way:

► Navigate to the following using the menu bar:

"Device View (Home)" > "TX<n>" > "Exciter A | B" > "Output" > "Attenuation" (0 dB,

3 dB, 6 dB, 9 dB).

Attenuation setting for R&S THU9

● Transmitter with 1 amplifier: 9 dB

● Transmitter with 2 or more amplifiers: 0 dB

Attenuation setting for R&S TMU9/R&S TMV9

● Transmitter with 1 amplifier: 9 dB

● Transmitter with 2 or more amplifiers: 0 dB

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

144

R&S®Tx9

4.6.3 Signal Feed

Device View Description

Exciter ATSC

The TCE900 Exciter has a number of physical inputs depending on the modules and

software options installed. Up to two of these inputs can be used parallel to each other

for signal feed. They are referred to below as logical inputs. The assignment of physi-

cal inputs to logical inputs takes place in a special task during startup of the system. All

available physical inputs can also be configured within this task. In normal operation,

the two selected logical inputs are visible in the Device View of the exciter. All settings

relevant for the logical inputs can be made directly in the Device View. The two logical

inputs are available for automatic input switchover in the event of a fault along the feed

path.

4.6.3.1 Configuring Physical Inputs

The physical inputs are configured at startup of the system in the menu "Device View"

> "Tx<n>" > "Exciter A | B" > "Task View" > "Configure Inputs".

This function allows you to define two logical inputs from the number of available inputs

used for the redundancy of the input signal. For each logical input, you can optionally

assign a name for the fed program multiplex. This name is displayed in the transmitter

and system overview screens.

Every TCE900 Exciter which is suitable for the transmission of digital TV has two trans-

port stream inputs (connector X20 and X21). The data format (ASI/SMPTE/Auto) can

be set separately for both inputs. The gross data rate and the packet length are also

displayed.

TS Feed

IP Feed

Depending on the installed software options, up to two independent IP feeds are avail-

able in the TCE900 Exciter. During startup, each Ethernet socket (X30, X31) must be

assigned an IP address in the menu "Device View" > "Tx<n>" > "Exciter A | B" > "Task

View" > "Configure TS LAN". The two Ethernet sockets are linked to two logical IP

streams which contain additional configuration parameters. Both IP streams support

unicast and multicast streams. For multicast streams, the IP address of the multiplexer

which makes the stream available in the network must also be specified. It is possible

to assign both logical IP streams to the same physical socket, but to specify different

multicast addresses. This provides maximum flexibility with regard to different redun-

dancy scenarios in the feed path.

The IP addresses for the Ethernet sockets are configured in the "Configure TS LAN"

task and only become effective after the TCE900 Exciter has been restarted.

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

145

Device View Description

Exciter ATSC

R&S®Tx9

Stream Status

Packet Length

MIP (SIP, IIP)

Settings for Input 1/2 (Transport Stream and IP Stream)

"Transport Stream (TS 1/2)" parameters

Name

Description

Indicates whether a valid serial data stream is being

fed to the transmitter via the TS1/2 IN sockets (X20/

X21). If a fault is displayed here, first check the setting

of the TS type (ASI/SMPTE).

Value range Access right

OK, No

Stream

Read Only

Indicates the detected packet length of the transport

stream.

Read Only

OK, No, Fail

Read Only

Indicates whether the control information required for

SFN mode is contained in the data stream. The dis-

played name depends on the modulation standard. An

error can also be displayed in MFN mode if the coder

settings are to be automatically controlled via the trans-

port stream.

Gross data rate

Shows the total data rate at the TS feed including stuff-

ing bytes.

1200000 bps Read Only

Payload data rate

Indicates the information data rate without stuffing

bytes on the TS feed. This value is only available if

MFN is set (multiple‑frequency network), i.e. SFN mode

(single‑frequency network) must be set to OFF.

Data rate

Indicates whether the data rate of the payload matches

the selected coder settings.

Multiplex Name

Here, you can assign any desired name for the multi-

plex contained in this transport stream. This name is

displayed in the transmitter overview and, in the case

of n+1 systems, in the automatic transmitter switchover

function.

"IP Stream (IP 1/2)" parameters

Read Only

Read Only

Read / Write

OK, Too

Low, Too

High, No Sig-

nal

<20 charac-

ters>

Name

Description

Stream Status (Status)

Indicates whether a valid data stream is being fed to

the transmitter via the IP feed. If a fault is indicated,

check the settings of the IP stream and the Ethernet

interface.

Value range Access right

OK, No

Stream

Read Only

Packet Length (Status)

Indicates the detected packet length of the IP stream.

Read Only

Gross data rate (Sta-

tus)

Indicates the total data rate (gross data rate) on the IP

feed.

1200000 bps Read Only

Payload data rate (Sta-

tus)

Indicates the information data rate of the multiplex con-

tained in the IP stream.

Data rate

Indicates whether the data rate of the payload matches

the selected coder settings.

Read Only

Read Only

OK, Too

Low, Too

High, No Sig-

nal

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

146

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Exciter ATSC

Name

Description

MIP (SIP, IIP)

Value range Access right

OK, No, Fail

Read Only

RJ45 Connector (Set-

tings)

TS LAN1, TS

LAN2

Maintenance

Indicates whether the control information required for

SFN mode is contained in the data stream. The dis-

played name depends on the modulation standard. An

error can also be displayed in MFN mode if the coder

settings are to be automatically controlled via the trans-

port stream.

Used to define the physical network interface to which

the logical IP stream is bound. Normally, the TS LAN 1

socket (X30) is coupled to IP stream 1 and the TS LAN

2 socket (X31) to IP stream 2. This allows you to use

multiple redundant servers that can be selected auto-

matically using the automatic input signal switchover.

However, it is also possible to feed several multicast

streams via the same physical Ethernet socket. In this

case, too, the automatic input signal switchover func-

tion can toggle automatically between two data

streams.

Used to select the used network protocol.

●

UDP (User Datagram Protocol) for easy, connec-

tionless communication.

RTP (Realtime Transport Protocol) for packet‑ori-

ented communication.

●

Used to set the used type of network streaming.

●

Unicast: The multiplexer sends the suitable IP

stream to the IP address of the TV transmitter.

● Multicast: The TV transmitter subscribes to a mul-

ticast IP stream that can be provided by the multi-

plexer in the feed network to several transmitters

at the same time.

Displays the IP address of the generator in Multicast

mode. In Unicast mode, the IP address of the selected

RJ45 socket of the TCE900 is displayed here. In Multi-

cast mode you can change the IP address here.

Here, you can assign any desired name for the multi-

plex contained in this transport stream. This name is

displayed in the transmitter overview and, in the case

of n+1 systems, in the automatic transmitter switchover

function.

Protocol (Settings)

Streaming Mode (Set-

tings)

Auto, UDP,

RTP

Maintenance

Multicast,

Unicast

Maintenance

Port (Settings)

Used to set the port number under which the transport

stream is expected.

0 to 65535

Maintenance

IP Address (Settings)

Maintenance (Read Only)

Multiplex Name (Set-

tings)

<20 charac-

ters>

Read / Write

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

147

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Exciter ATSC

"Settings" parameters

Name

Description

Mute on Input Fail

(Input Control of Input

1 / Input 2)

Used to determine whether the output signal of the

exciter is to be shut down if the input signal of all avail-

able inputs fails, or whether "null packets" are to be

sent. This switch is available in multiple‑frequency net-

works (MFN) only. In single‑frequency networks (SFN),

the exciter will always mute if no decodable input signal

is fed.

Used to set the length of the checkout time which must

expire after detection of an input signal fault before the

exciter displays a fault. If a short checkout time is set,

the system can quickly switch over to a standby exciter

if all input signals of the exciter fail. If a long checkout

time is set, there will be enough time in the event of a

fault to switch to an alternative feed path so that the

exciter is prevented from switching over to a redun-

dancy component.

Used to determine whether switchover to another

redundant exciter is to take place if the input signal

fails. This function is available for all redundancy sys-

tems (dual drive, backup exciter and n+1). In the "Yes"

position, an exciter fault is signaled to the higher‑level

redundancy control unit, which decides whether to

switch over to another exciter or transmitter. In the "No"

position, no switchover takes place.

Value range Access right

No, Yes

Read / Write

0 s to 600 s

Read / Write

Read / Write

No (Create

Warning),

Yes (Create

Fault)

Input Fail Delay (Input

Control of Input 1 /

Input 2)

Force Exciter Change-

over (On loss Of Input

Signal)

"Task View Config" parameters

"Device View" > "Tx<n>" > "Exciter A | B" > "Task View" > "Configure Inputs" > "Con-

fig"

Name

Description

Logical Input 1/2

Value range Access right

Variable

Maintenance

Multiplex 1/2 Name

Maintenance

Used to configure the input interfaces used for two

inputs, independently of each other. To test the "seam-

less switching" function, it is possible to select the

same input interface for both inputs. The selection

options for the data sources are determined by the

installed input interfaces and option keys.

Here, you can assign any desired name for the multi-

plex contained in this transport stream. This name is

displayed in the transmitter overview and, in the case

of N+1 systems, in the automatic transmitter switchover

function.

For measuring purposes, any input signal can be

switched to the TS Monitor-Out socket (X22). The

selection options for the data sources are determined

by the installed input interfaces and option keys.

Indicates whether a valid data stream is being fed to

the transmitter via the IP feed. If a fault is indicated,

check the settings of the IP stream and the Ethernet

interface.

Maintenance

Stream OK,

No Stream

Query

Monitor Out

IP MUX 1/2

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

148

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Exciter ATSC

"Task View TS Feed" parameters

"Device View" > "Tx<n>" > "Exciter A | B" > "Task View" > "Configure Inputs" > "TS

Feed"

or: "Device View" > "Tx<n>" > "Exciter A | B" > "Input 1 | 2" > "Transport Stream"

Name

Description

TS 1/2 Type

Used to set the data format for the data streams at X20

and X21.

●

●

●

Auto: The data format is detected automatically

ASI: Manual setting for an ASI transport stream

SMPTE: Manual setting for an SMPTE transport

stream

Value range Access rights

Auto, ASI,

SMPTE

Maintenance

Gross data rate

Indicates the total data rate on the IP feed.

Stream Status

Indicates whether a valid serial data stream is being

fed to the transmitter via the TS1/2 IN sockets (X20/

X21). If a fault is displayed here, first check the setting

of the TS type (ASI/SMPTE).

OK, No

Stream

Packet Length

Indicates the detected packet length of the transport

stream.

MIP/IIP/TCP+DB

Depending on the selected TV standard, this indicates

whether additional information for operation in sin-

gle‑frequency networks (SFN) is present in the data

stream.

Read Only

Read Only

Read Only

Read Only

"Settings" parameters

"Device View" > "Tx<n>" > "Exciter A | B" > "Input 1 | 2" > "Settings"

Name

Description

Mute (on Input Fail)

Value range Access right

No, Yes

Maintenance

Input Fail Delay

0 s to 600 s

Maintenance

Force Exciter Change-

over

Yes, No

Maintenance

Used to define the operating behavior when the active

input fails. This parameter is available in MFN mode

only.

●

No – In this mode, the output signal is not sup-

pressed if the active input fails. Null packets are

output instead.

Yes – If the active input fails, the output signal is

suppressed.

●

Used to set a delay time which must elapse following

an input signal failure before the output signal is sup-

pressed and a sum fault is generated.

Used to determine whether switchover to another

redundant exciter is to take place if the input signal

fails. This function is available for all redundancy sys-

tems (dual drive, backup exciter and N+1).

●

Yes – In the "Yes" position, an exciter fault is sig-

naled to the higher‑level redundancy control unit

which decides whether to switch over to another

exciter or transmitter.

No – In the "No" position, no switchover takes

place.

●

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

149

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Exciter ATSC

4.6.3.2

Input Signal Switchover

The R&S®TCE900 in the R&S®TCE900 Exciter configuration has an automatic switch-

over function which, in the event of a signal failure at one logical input, switches over to

the other logical input (provided that a valid input signal is available at the other logical

input). Before a failure occurs, the preselected input is active. The way in which this

automatic switchover function operates is determined by the following factors:

Automatic input switchover ON/OFF

If automatic switchover is OFF, the preselected input remains active even if the input

signal fails. If automatic switchover is ON and there is a failure at the (preselected)

input, switchover to the standby input takes place.

Input priority (Preferred Input = Logical Input 1/2)

Following switchover of the priority logical input to the standby input, the automatic sys-

tem switches back to this priority input as soon as a signal returns. All switchover oper-

ations are delayed for the set delay times. If the signal fails at both the operating input

and the standby input, the priority input always remains active.

Inputs with equal priority (Preferred Input = none)

Following switchover of the active logical input, the second input with the same priority

remains active until the input signal fails on this input also. The automatic system

switches back to the preselected input, but only if a signal is present on it once again

(and if "Switch to" is set to "reserve & back"). All switchover operations are delayed for

the set delay times.

Selecting this operating mode minimizes the number of switchover operations and, in

certain cases, the number of breaks in transmission.

Direction of switchover (Switch to)

The "reserve and back" switch position enables switchover in both directions, i.e. to

and from the standby input, depending on which of the two logical inputs is currently

faulty.

The "reserve" switch position ensures that switchover takes place once only. Following

switchover, the automatic system switches to "switched" and the "Active" indicator dis-

appears.

Switchback to the preselected input takes place when the active input is switched over

by pressing the input selector switch (Selector) and then selecting the preselected

input.

If the switch is set to "reserve", the switchback to the preselected input is suppressed.

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

150

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Exciter ATSC

Seamless switching

The automatic input signal switchover function has an operating mode which permits

seamless switching between two inputs. Seamless switching is activated using the

"Seamless" switch. If seamless switching is possible, the switchover always takes

place immediately, irrespective of the set guard times. Seamless switching is available

without restriction for operation in single‑frequency networks (SFN). For operation in

MFNs, it is necessary to set the maximum expected delay time between the two signal

feeds. The signal which arrives earlier is delayed by the set time and the signal which

arrives later is adjusted to the earlier signal. The currently measured delay between the

two inputs is displayed to provide an adjustment aid. In SFN and MFN mode, signals

can be fed via two different media (e.g. ASI and IP).

Manual switchover between inputs

Manual switchover is possible when the automatic input signal switchover function is

both on and off.

● Switchover with automatic input signal switchover OFF

The input can be switched over in the "Home" > "Transmitter" > "Exciter" menu by

pressing the input selector switch ("Selector") and then selecting the desired input

"Selected Input".

● Switchover with automatic input signal switchover ON

The input can be switched over in the "Home" > "Transmitter" > "Exciter" menu by

pressing the input selector switch ("Selector") and then selecting the desired input

"Selected Input" if the two inputs are configured with equal priority (Preferred Input

= None).

If one of the inputs is configured as having priority, switchover is performed by

changing the priority input "Preferred Input" in the same menu.

"Automatic input signal switchover" parameters

Name

Description

Value range

Access right

Automatic (State)

Indicates the state of the automatic input signal switchover function.

● Off:

Off, Active,

Changed

Read Only

●

●

The automatic switchover function is switched off.

Active:

The automatic switchover function is ready to switch the currently

active input over to the input currently not in use as soon as the

input signal of the currently active input fails.

Changed:

The automatic switchover function has switched over from the

preferred input to the standby input. "Changed" is only displayed if

switchback is not permitted. ("Switch to" = reserve)

"Not Possible" appears if only one input signal is fed, if two different

data streams are present at the two inputs or if in MFN mode the set

"Max Delay between Inputs" is not sufficient to align the two signals

with each other. If seamless switching is possible, it always takes place

immediately when required, regardless of whether a "Guard Time to

Reserve" or "Guard Time Back" has been set.

Seamless Switch-

ing

Indicates whether seamless switching of the input signal is possible.

Read Only

not Possible,

Possible

Automatic

Activates automatic switchover of the input signal to the standby input

if the preferred input fails.

Off, On

Operation

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

151

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Exciter ATSC

Name

Description

Value range

Access right

Preferred Input

Used to select the preferred input which the automatic input signal

switchover function should use whenever possible.

Input 1, Input 2,

None

Operation

Selected Input

Input 1, Input 2

Operation

Switch to

Reserve Only,

Reserve & Back

Maintenance

Used to select the active input to be used when the automatic input

signal switchover function is off. If the automatic switchover function is

on, the input can be switched over using this switch if Preferred Input is

set to "No Preference" or a switchover to the standby input has taken

place. Switchover of the input is otherwise performed using the "Prefer-

red Input" switch.

Used to set the operational response of the automatic switchover func-

tion.

●

"To Reserve Only":

The automatic switchover function switches over once from the

preferred input to the standby input and then assumes the "not

ready" state. Switching the active input over manually to the pre-

ferred input reactivates the automatic switchover function.

"To Reserve and Back":

Following successful switchover to the standby input, the auto-

matic switchover function can also switch back automatically if the

signal at the standby input fails.

●

Guard Time to

Reserve

Used to set a guard time which must elapse before the automatic

switchover function switches over to the standby input if the input sig-

nal at the preferred input fails. The set guard time has no effect if

seamless switching is possible. In this case, the switchover always

takes place immediately without interruption (i.e. seamlessly).

Maintenance

Guard Time Back Used to set a guard time which must elapse before the automatic

Maintenance

If Reserve Fails

switchover function switches back to the preferred input if the input sig-

nal at the standby input fails. If seamless switching is possible, switch-

over always takes place immediately without interruption regardless of

the set guard time. If "to Reserve Only" was selected as the "Direc-

tion", the set guard time has no effect.

Used to determine whether the signal at the standby input is to be

monitored.

●

If the transmitter is operated with only one input signal or the

standby input is connected only temporarily, "Do Not Show Warn-

ing" must be selected.

If two redundant input signals are normally supplied to the trans-

mitter, "Show Warning" must be selected.

●

Do Not Show

Warning, Show

Warning

Maintenance

4.6.4 Controlling Time of Transmission in Single-Frequency Networks

(SFN)

For operation in single-frequency networks (SFN), the R&S®TCE900 exciter has a

function which allows the time at which the signal is transmitted to be controlled. In the

SFN, time synchronization of all exciters in the network is performed using a seconds

pulse (PPS), which is generally obtained at the exciter site via GPS satellites.

Controlling time of transmission

Control of the time of transmission is switched on and off in the "Device View (Home)"

> "Transmitter" > "Exciter" > "SFN Regulation" menu ("Time Synchronization" tab) by

means of the "SFN Sync" switch (On (SFN) / Off (MFN)). This function can only be

used if the exciter has a time reference.

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

152

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Exciter ATSC

To operate the transmitter with an integrated GPS receiver, an appropriate software

option must be activated using an option code.

The following options are available:

● Feed of an external PPS signal (pulse per second)

● Use of an integrated GPS receiver (requires option key)

If the time reference fails during operation, the exciter can revert to its integrated fre-

quency control function (see the chapter "Frequency Control") and calculate a highly

precise PPS internally.To do so, the exciter only needs to be able to synchronize with a

PPS once for a few seconds after it has started.

If the time and frequency reference fail at the same time, Holdover Mode becomes

active. In this operating mode, the accuracy of "time of transmission" control depends

on the frequency stability of the integrated, temperature‑stabilized 10 MHz crystal oscil-

lator (OXCO).

Since, in Holdover Mode, calculation of the time of transmission becomes increasingly

inaccurate over time, the output signal of the exciter can be switched off after a config-

urable Guard Time.

Special features

● R&S Mobile

● R&S A53

● A/110

With ATSC, up to three different synchronization types are supported.

An appropriate software option must be activated using an option code for the respec-

tive synchronization type.

If mobile content is transmitted and a Rohde & Schwarz AEM100 Emission

Mux/SFN inserter is used, the "RSMobile" synchronization type must be selected.

If normal content is transmitted and a Rohde & Schwarz AEM100 Emission

Mux/SFN inserter is used, the "RSA53" synchronization type must be selected.

In the case of the standard‑conforming SFN synchronization corresponding to

ATSC A/110B, the "A/110" synchronization type must be selected. It contains a

compatible expansion to allow use of Mobile DTV.

With the synchronization types "R&S Mobile" and "A/110", a distinction is also made as

to whether the time of transmission is to be synchronized primarily using data from the

TCP information or using data from the dummy bytes.

Setting and display of time of transmission

In the "Device View (Home)" > "Transmitter" > "Exciter" > "SFN Regulation" menu

("SFN Delay" tab), the time of transmission is displayed relative to the reference time.

The time of transmission can be adapted individually by setting an additional static

delay.

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

153

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Exciter ATSC

The following delays occur:

● Maximum Delay

Time taken for the signal to travel from the playout center (MIP inserter) to the

transmit antenna for regular transmission. This delay is set in the SFN adapter and

is the default for all transmitters of the SFN.

● Network Delay

Time taken for the signal to travel from the playout center (SFN adapter) to the

input of the exciter. With IP feed, the time for forward error correction (FEC) and

packet reordering is added to the Network Delay. This delay depends on the used

transmission path.

● Processing Delay

● Dynamic Delay

● Total Delay

● Static SFN Delay

Minimum transit time of the signal through the exciter. This delay depends on the

set transmission parameters.

Period of time by which signal processing is delayed artificially in order to achieve

the desired time of transmission.

Actual transit time of the signal through the exciter. This time is the sum of Pro-

cessing Delay plus Dynamic Delay.

Positive or negative offset (set manually for the individual transmitter location) of

the time of transmission relative to the regular time of transmission preset under

Maximum Delay. The Static SFN Delay is used to compensate for differences

between transmission systems from different manufacturers.

● Dispatch Time

This is the actual time of transmission. It is the network‑wide Maximum Delay plus

the transmitter‑specific Static SFN Delay.

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

154

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Exciter ATSC

Fig. 4-6: Delays in SFN

1 = Time of the signal infeed (MIP inserter)

2 = Signal feed at the exciter (Ts x IN)

3 = Regular time of transmission for the station (Tx)

4 = Individually corrected time of transmission for the station (Dispatch Time)

4.6.4.1 Settings

"Time Synchronization" parameters

● Path: "Device View (Home)" > "Tx<n > " > "Exciter A | B" >"SFN Regulation" >

"Time Synchronization"

Description

Value range Access right

The suitable signal source for synchronizing the time of

transmission can be selected in this list.

Maintenance

Indicates whether a seconds pulse is present at the

1PPS_IN socket (X23) at the TCE.

Indicates whether the integrated GPS receiver is

returning a stable seconds pulse (PPS). This function

must have been enabled by installing an option key in

the TCE.

External

PPS, Internal

GPS

No Signal,

Inaccurate,

OK

No Signal,

Inaccurate,

OK

Read only

Read only

Name

Source

Ext. PPS

Int. GPS PPS

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

155

R&S®Tx9

Name

SFN Sync

SFN Sync Mode

PPS State

Device View Description

Exciter ATSC

Description

Value range Access right

Maintenance

Off (MFN),

Dynamic

(SFN)

Maintenance

RSMobile,

RSA53,

A/110

Read only

OK, Hold-

over, Hold-

over expired,

Missing

Used to activate time synchronization.

● Off (MFN): The time of transmission is not control-

●

led.

Dynamic (SFN): The time of transmission of a

symbol is the same for all the transmitters of a sin-

gle‑frequency network (SFN).

Used to define the type of time synchronization. This

switch is available only after the appropriate software

options have been enabled.

●

RSMobile: For transmitting mobile content and

when using a Rohde & Schwarz AEM100 Emis-

sion Mux/SFN inserter.

RSA53: When transmitting normal content and

when using a Rohde & Schwarz AEM100 Emis-

sion Mux/SFN inserter.

A/110: For standard‑conforming SFN synchroniza-

tion corresponding to ATSC A/110B. It contains a

compatible expansion to allow use of Mobile DTV.

●

●

With the synchronization types "R&S Mobile" and "A/

110", a distinction can also be made as to whether the

time of transmission is to be synchronized primarily

using data from the TCP information or using data from

the dummy bytes.

Indicates whether the internally formed PPS is

phase‑synchronized with the frequency control.

● OK: The PPS is phase‑synchronized with the fre-

●

●

quency control.

Holdover: The PPS and the reference frequency of

the frequency control have failed. Time synchroni-

zation is now performed with the accuracy of the

integrated crystal oscillator (OCXO).

Holdover Expired: The maximum time for which

the transmitter is permitted to remain in holdover

mode has expired (see the Frequency Control

menu).

● Missing: No PPS signal has been detected since

the TCE900 exciter was last started.

If "OK" is not displayed, the signal source of the fre-

quency control must be checked.

Used to select the maximum permitted deviation of the

time of transmission relative to the internally controlled

reference frequency. If the set value is exceeded, the

absolute time of transmission is recalculated. This cau-

ses a brief signal failure (mute).

Max. Deviation

0 s to 100 μs Read only

SFN State

Read only

Indicates whether or not the fed signal can be transmit-

ted in a time‑synchronous manner. If the "No Time Ref-

erence" fault message is displayed, the reference feed

of the Time Synchronization and the Frequency Regu-

lation must be checked. If the "No Time Information"

fault message is displayed, it must be checked whether

the control information for the time of transmission is

contained in the data stream. (See the "Input" menu.)

SFN Resync,

No Time

Information,

No Time Ref-

erence, SFN

Resync, In

Time

"SFN Delay" parameters

"SFN Delay"

● Path: "Device View (Home)" > "Tx<n > " > "Exciter A | B" >"SFN Regulation" >

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

156

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Exciter ATSC

Name

Description

Maximum Delay

Value range Access rights

0 s to 1 s

Read only

Network Delay

0 s to 1 s

Read only

Time taken for the signal to travel from the playout cen-

ter to the transmit antenna for regular transmission.

This delay is set at the SFN adapter and is the default

for all transmitters of the dynamic SFN.

Time taken for the signal to travel from the playout cen-

ter to the input of the signal processing unit. This delay

depends on the used transmission path. If an IP feed is

used, the FEC processing time is a component of the

Network Delay.

Indicates the internal transit time for signal processing

in the exciter. It depends on the configured modulation

parameters.

Indicates the signal delay controlled by the SFN (sin-

gle‑frequency network) synchronization which is

required in order to meet the desired time of transmis-

sion exactly. The displayed value contains the set

Static Delay Offset as well as the Tx Time Offset (if

available).

Indicates the total transit time of the signal through the

transmitter. It is the sum of Processing Delay plus

Dynamic Delay.

Positive or negative offset (set manually for the individ-

ual transmitter site) of the time of transmission relative

to the regular time of transmission preset under Maxi-

mum Delay. The Static Delay is used to compensate

differences between transmission systems from differ-

ent manufacturers.

Time from the point at which the signal leaves the play-

out center until its actual transmission at the transmit

antenna. This delay corresponds to the Maximum

Delay (compulsory for all transmitters in an SFN) plus

Static Delay Offset plus Tx Time Offset (if available).

Processing Delay

0 s to 1 s

Read only

Dynamic Delay

0 s to 1 s

Read only

Total Delay

0 s to 1 s

Read only

Static SFN Delay

0 s to 1 s

Maintenance

Dispatch Time

0 s to 1 s

Read only

4.6.5 Using Frequency Control

The R&S TCE900 in the R&S TCE900 exciter configuration has a transmit frequency

control function.

Depending on the accuracy and stability requirements, one of two operating modes

can be selected for the transmitter.

To operate the transmitter with an integrated GPS receiver, an appropriate software

option must be activated using an option code.

● Free‑wheeling mode

Here the transmit frequency is formed from a temperature‑stabilized 10 MHz crys-

tal oscillator (TCXO).

The frequency stability is sufficient for continuous operation in multiple frequency

networks (MFN).

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

157

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Exciter ATSC

● Operation with reference frequency

Here the transit frequency is stabilized by means of a reference frequency. The fol-

lowing options are available:

– External 10 MHz reference frequency

– External PPS (pulse per second)

– Built-in GPS receiver.

The frequency stability and frequency accuracy which can be achieved in this way

fulfill the increased requirements for operation of the transmitter in single‑frequency

networks. If several reference signals are available at the same time, automatic

selection of the most suitable reference frequency is possible.

If the reference signal fails, the transmitter switches over to Holdover Mode and fre-

quency control operates with the accuracy of the temperature‑stabilized 10 MHz crystal

oscillator (OXCO).

Since, in Holdover Mode, frequency control becomes increasingly inaccurate over

time, the output signal of the exciter can be switched off after a configurable Guard

Time.

In the case of reference signals with major fluctuations (jitter), e.g. with non‑controlled

external GPS receivers, a jitter correction function can be activated.

For measuring purposes, the used reference signal or one of the reference signals pro-

cessed internally in the exciter can be output via the Monitor-Out socket (X24).

"Frequency Regulation" parameters

● Path:"Device View (Home)" > "Tx<n>" > "Exciter" > "Frequency Regulation" > Tab

"Frequency Regulation"

Name

Description

Value range Access right

Ext. 10 MHz (Input)

Indicates whether an external 10 MHz reference is

present at the REF_IN (X64) socket on the R&S

TCE900.

Source (Input)

The suitable signal source for the frequency reference

can be either detected automatically or preselected in

this list. If multiple signal sources are connected simul-

taneously in "Auto" position, an external reference is

given preference for selection before the internal GPS.

In "Manual" position, the internal crystal oscillator

(OCXO) is calibrated manually and the transmitter can

be operated completely without an external reference

source (not suitable for single-frequency networks).

Ext PPS (Input)

Indicates whether a seconds pulse is present at the

1PPS_IN socket (X23) at the R&S TCE900.

Current Source (input)

Shows the signal source used currently for frequency

regulation.

Read only

Read only

Read only

Read only

No Signal,

Inaccurate,

OK

Manual, Ext.

5 MHz, Ext.

10 MHz, Ext.

PPS, Int.

PPS GPS,

Auto

No Signal,

Inaccurate,

OK

Manual, Ext.

5 MHz, Ext.

10 MHz, Ext.

PPS, Int.

GPS

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

158

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Exciter ATSC

Name

Description

Value range Access right

Int. GPS PPS (Input)

Indicates whether the integrated GPS receiver is

returning a stable seconds pulse (PPS). This function

must have been enabled by installing an option key in

the TCE.

No Signal,

Inaccurate,

OK

Read only

Manual OCXO (regula-

tor)

Enables manual adjustment of the internal crystal oscil-

lator. To allow this, a frequency counter which is

synchronized via a highly accurate reference must be

connected via the monitor output.

0 to 65535

Maintenance

Reference (regulator)

Indicates the state of the reference used. In single‑fre-

quency networks, a failure of the reference can cause a

malfunction and thus lead to switchover of the exciter.

Fault, Warn-

ing, OK

Read only

Freq. Stability (regula-

tor)

Indicates the frequency accuracy of the regulator. The

highest possible accuracy ("Excellent") is only reached

at least 24 hours after switching on the exciter. This

ensures that if the reference fails, there are no faults in

single‑frequency networks before the guard time runs

out.

Read only

Unknown,

Inaccurate,

Good, Excel-

lent

Monitor Out (regulator) Used to select the signal to be output at the Monitor

Operation

Out socket (X24).

On Ref. Fail Mute (reg-

ulator)

Maintenance

Off, Internal

5 MHz, Inter-

nal 10 MHz,

Internal 1

PPS, Internal

1 PPS GPS,

Current

Source

Never, At

Startup, After

Guard Time

Used to define the behavior if the reference source

fails.

●

"Never": Muting never takes place. This causes

faults in single‑frequency networks, especially

after power failures.

"At Startup": After a power failure, muting takes

place until the regulator is synchronized. If the ref-

erence fails, the transmitter will continue running

as long as possible.

"After Guard Time": Muting takes place not only

after power failures, but also after failure of the ref-

erence and expiry of the set Guard Time.

●

●

This value defines for how many hours the signal pro-

cessing should continue running without synchroniza-

tion if the reference connection fails. The Guard Time is

active only if the "Freq Stability" was "Good" at the time

of the failure. The longer the time selected is, the

poorer the accuracy of the transmitting frequency will

become. In addition, the time of transmission of the sig-

nal shifts. If this uses up the guard interval, reception

problems occur in single‑frequency networks.

When using an external reference source with high jit-

ter, activating this function can provide better frequency

stability. With "Good" reference signals, this function

should be disabled as the regulator takes significantly

longer to attain its maximum frequency stability. When

the internal GPS is used, this function is enabled auto-

matically.

Guard Time (regulator)

0 to 24 hours Maintenance

Jitter Correction (Guard

Time)

On, Off

Maintenance

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

159

R&S®Tx9

4.6.6 Precorrection

Device View Description

Exciter ATSC

Each R&S®TCE900 Exciter is equipped with an adaptive precorrector, which continu-

ously compensates for nonlinear distortions of the amplifiers and linear distortions of

the output filter so that, in both cases, a high‑quality signal is present at the output of

the transmitter.

Adaptive nonlinear precorrection

For adaptive nonlinear precorrection, enter a minimum shoulder distance that must not

be undershot. The precorrector will calculate a new precorrection curve as soon as a

shoulder distance below the set value is measured.

The adaptive precorrection can be stopped if necessary (Adaptive Predistortion =

Stop). The current precorrection curve remains in effect.

For measuring purposes, the adaptive nonlinear precorrector can be bypassed (Adap-

tive Predistortion = Bypass) so that the R&S®TCE900 Exciter returns an undistorted

signal at its RF output.

The precorrector can be restarted manually (Reset), making it possible to calculate a

better precorrection curve, even if the shoulder distance has not yet been undershot.

The current precorrection curve is lost as a result.

Adaptive linear precorrection

With adaptive linear precorrection, limit values for amplitude (Amplitude Ripple) and

group delay (Group Delay Ripple) must be set. The precorrector will calculate a new

precorrection curve as soon as the limit values are exceeded.

The adaptive precorrection can be stopped if necessary (Adaptive Predistortion =

Stop). The current precorrection curve remains in effect.

For measuring purposes, the adaptive linear precorrector can be bypassed (Adaptive

Predistortion = Bypass) so that the R&S®TCE900 Exciter returns an undistorted signal

at its RF output.

The precorrector can be restarted manually (Reset), making it possible to calculate a

better precorrection curve, even if the shoulder distance has not yet been undershot.

The current precorrection curve is lost as a result.

The adaptive adjustment of nonlinear precorrection is not available for analog TV

standards.

Crest factor reduction

Available as an option for all COFDM standards

The crest factor feature provides the possibility of improving the signal parameters

"MER" and "Shoulder Distance" separately. Additionally, the signal can be improved

and the DC supply voltage reduced at the amplifier to increase efficiency; this simulta-

neously reduces the crest factor of the transmitter.

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

160

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Exciter ATSC

Sound phase shifter

Only available for analog TV standards

The sound phase shifter modifies the phase of the sound subcarrier as a function of

the low-frequency modulation of the picture signal.

When the sound phase shifter is switched on, its characteristic is determined using two

onset points.

The reference for setting the position is initially a value of 37.5 % for the back porch.

Smaller values are in the range of the sync pulse, whereby a value of 15 % corre-

sponds to a sync‑pulse amplitude of 300 mV. Larger values are in the picture range,

whereby a value of 90 % corresponds to a picture amplitude of 700 mV.

An additional condition is that the setting for onset point 1 must always be greater than

that of onset point 2. The sharpness of the two onset points is determined by the slope

of the characteristic at these points. The magnitude of the setting determines the mag-

nitude of the phase shift, whereby a setting of 50 % specifies the maximum value. The

sign of the setting value determines whether the phase is shifted in the positive or neg-

ative direction.

When the characteristic is calculated, it is divided into three linear areas by the two

onset points.

No phase shift takes place for modulation of the picture signal in the area between the

two onset points, i.e. a correction phase of 0° is set.

A correction phase unequal to 0° is set in the case of picture signal modulation which is

greater than the position of onset point 1. The characteristic in this area begins with a

correction phase of 0°, with modulation corresponding to the position of onset point 1,

and increases linearly up to the maximum phase set with slope 1, with 100 % modula-

tion of the picture signal.

Similarly, a correction phase unequal to 0° is also set in the case of picture signal mod-

ulation which is smaller than the position of onset point 2. The characteristic in this

area begins with a correction phase of 0°, with modulation corresponding to the posi-

tion of onset point 2, and increases linearly up to the maximum phase set with slope 2,

with 0 % modulation of the picture signal.

"Non Linear" parameters

● Path:Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > Pre-Correction > Non Linear

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

161

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Exciter ATSC

Name

Description

Value range

Access right

Adaptive Precor-

rection (Settings)

The nonlinear precorrector is used to compensate amplifier faults. The

quality of precorrection affects the shoulder distance of the output sig-

nal.

Bypass, Stop,

Run

Maintenance

The setting can be changed here.

●

Bypass

The nonlinear precorrector is deactivated. The signal is not modi-

fied inside the exciter.

Stop

Adaptive precorrection is deactivated. The correction curve that

was determined last is active inside the exciter.

Run

Digital TV standards only: The adaptive precorrector is active.

The best possible precorrection curve to compensate amplitude

and phase errors of the amplifiers is determined continuously.

Analog TV standards only: The automatic precorrector is active.

The best possible precorrection curve to compensate amplitude

and phase errors of the amplifiers is determined once. The pre-

corrector then enters "Stop" mode. The program is interrupted

during precorrection.

In certain situations, it may be advisable to have a suitable precorrec-

tion curve determined automatically first and then to switch adaptive

precorrection to "Stop" so that the found precorrection curve can no

longer change.

Calculation of a new precorrection curve can be forced by performing

a reset.

Acquisition

The precorrector is currently recording new measurement values.

Calculation

The precorrector is currently calculating a new precorrection

curve.

●

●

●

●

Status (Settings)

Indicates the status of the nonlinear precorrector.

●

Idle

The precorrector is not active.

Idle, Acquisition,

Calculation

Read Only

Input Level (Set-

tings)

Indicates whether the level of the input signal is sufficient. "No Input"

appears if the transmitter is off or if the connection to the RF test point

is interrupted.

OK, Too Low,

Too High, No

Input

Read Only

Reset (Settings)

Resets the precorrection. If the precorrector is in "run" mode, a new

precorrection curve is calculated.

Maintenance

Shoulder Distance

(Shoulders)

Indicates the minimum shoulder distance that is to be achieved by the

adaptive nonlinear precorrector.

30 dB to 45 dB

Maintenance

The setting can be changed here.

The precorrector will calculate a new precorrection curve as soon as a

shoulder distance below the set value is measured.

Shoulder Left

(Shoulders)

Indicates the shoulder distance attained by the circuit for automatic

switchover, measured in the left part of the signal spectrum.

Shoulder Right

(Shoulders)

Indicates the shoulder distance attained by the circuit for automatic

switchover, measured in the right part of the signal spectrum.

Read Only

Read Only

Signal Limiter

(Limiter)

The setting can be changed here.

Limits the signal at the input of the nonlinear precorrector.

6 dB to 12 dB

Maintenance

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

162

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Exciter ATSC

"Linear" parameters

● Path:Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > Pre-Correction > Linear

Name

Description

Value range

Access right

Adaptive Precor-

rection (Settings)

The linear precorrector is used to compensate output filter faults. The

quality of precorrection affects the amplitude and group delay ripple of

the output signal.

Bypass, Stop,

Run

Maintenance

The setting can be changed here.

●

Bypass

The linear precorrector is deactivated. The signal is not modified

inside the exciter.

Stop

Adaptive precorrection is deactivated. The correction curve that

was determined last is active inside the exciter.

Run

Digital TV standards only: The adaptive precorrector is active.

The best possible precorrection curve to compensate for ampli-

tude and group delay errors caused by the output filter is deter-

mined continuously.

Analog TV standards only: The automatic precorrector is active.

The best possible precorrection curve to compensate for ampli-

tude and group delay errors caused by the output filter is deter-

mined once. The precorrector then enters "Stop" mode. The pro-

gram is interrupted during precorrection.

In certain situations, it may be advisable to have a suitable precorrec-

tion curve determined automatically first and then to switch adaptive

precorrection to "Stop" so that the found precorrection curve can no

longer change.

Acquisition

The precorrector is currently recording new measurement values.

Calculation

The precorrector is currently calculating a new precorrection

curve.

●

●

●

●

Status (Settings)

Indicates the status of the linear precorrector.

●

Idle

The precorrector is not active.

Idle, Acquisition,

Calculation

Read Only

Input Level (Set-

tings)

Indicates whether the level of the input signal is sufficient. "No Input"

appears if the transmitter is off.

Slope (Settings)

Indicates the asymmetry compensation caused by the RF cable used

between the RF test point downstream of the output filter and the input

of the linear precorrector.

The setting can be changed here.

OK, Too Low,

Too High, No

Input

Read Only

-1 dB to 1 dB

Maintenance

Reset (Settings)

Resets the precorrection. If the precorrector is in "run" mode, a new

precorrection curve is calculated.

Maintenance

Amplitude Ripple

Limit (Amplitude

Ripple Limiter)

Indicates the desired maximum amplitude ripple at the output of the fil-

ter. If the circuit for automatic switchover is switched on, the precorrec-

tor attempts to modify the signal to such an extent that the amplitude

ripple remains below the specified limit.

The setting can be changed here.

0 dB to 2 dB

Maintenance

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

163

Device View Description

Exciter ATSC

R&S®Tx9

Amplitude Ripple

(Amplitude Ripple

Limiter)

Amplitude Ripple

(Amplitude Ripple

Limiter)

Group Delay Limit

(Group Delay Lim-

iter)

Group Delay

(Group Delay Lim-

iter)

Group Delay Rip-

ple (Group Delay

Ripple)

Name

Description

Value range

Access right

Indicates whether the limit set for the amplitude ripple can be achieved

by the linearity corrector.

Limit OK, limit

unreachable

Read Only

If the limit was chosen too low, a warning is displayed. In this case, the

corrector will retain the last-calculated curve.

Indicates the residual ripple in the amplitude frequency response

attained by the circuit for automatic switchover in dB.

Read Only

Indicates the desired maximum group delay ripple at the output of the

filter. If the circuit for automatic switchover is switched on, the precor-

rector attempts to modify the signal to such an extent that the group

delay ripple remains below the specified limit.

The setting can be changed here.

10 ns to 500 ns

Maintenance

Indicates whether the limit set for the group delay can be achieved by

the linearity corrector.

Limit OK, limit

unreachable

Read Only

If the limit was chosen too low, a warning is displayed. In this case, the

corrector will retain the last-calculated curve.

Indicates the residual ripple in the group delay attained by the circuit

for automatic switchover in ns.

Read Only

"Crest Factor" parameters

Available as an option for all COFDM standards

● Path:Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > Pre-Correction > Crest Factor

Name

Description

Reduction

Value range

Access right

Bypass, Manual

Maintenance

Activates manual crest factor reduction. This function is used to opti-

mize the efficiency of the transmitter.

●

Bypass

Deactivates the crest factor reduction.

● Manual

Activates manual crest factor reduction.

Used to set the crest factor of the exciter's output signal. Setting a low

crest factor allows the efficiency of the transmitter to be increased as a

result of the lower operating voltage of the amplifiers. This can lead to

an increase in intermodulation products outside the frequency band

and to a reduction in MER.

Crest Factor

7 dB to 15 dB

Maintenance

Inband Noise

Increasing this value results in a lower crest factor. This, however,

reduces MER.

10% to 100%

Maintenance

Outband Noise

Increasing this value produces a lower crest factor; however, this

results in an increase in intermodulation products outside the fre-

quency band.

0% to 50%

Maintenance

"Advanced Precorrection" parameters

Available for analog TV standards

● Path:Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > Pre-Correction > Advanced

Precorrection

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

164

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Exciter DTMB

Name

Description

Test Signal (Non-

linear Extension)

Generates signals with different modulation in order to increase the

video S/N ratio using an external measuring instrument. Measurement

of the video S/N ratio and adjustment of the associated slopes allows

the S/N ratio to be optimized for various picture contents.

Value range

Access right

Black, Grey,

White, Off

Maintenance

Black Slope

(Nonlinear Exten-

sion)

Grey Slope (Non-

linear Extension)

White Slope

(Nonlinear Exten-

sion)

Used to optimize the video S/N ratio at high levels.

-50% to 50%

Maintenance

The value can only be changed if the nonlinear precorrector is in

"Stop" mode and the test signal "Black" has been activated.

Used to optimize the video S/N ratio at medium levels.

-50% to 50%

Maintenance

The value can only be changed if the nonlinear precorrector is in

"Stop" mode and the test signal "Grey" has been activated.

Used to optimize the video S/N ratio at low levels.

-50% to 50%

Maintenance

The value can only be changed if the nonlinear precorrector is in

"Stop" mode and the test signal "White" has been activated.

Phase Correction

(FM Carrier 1/2)

Indicates whether the sound phase shifter for carrier 1 and carrier 2 is

switched on.

Off, On

Maintenance

Trigger Point 1/2

(FM Carrier 1/2)

Indicates the position defined for the respective onset point of the

phase shifter (referenced to modulation of the picture signal).

0% to 100%

Maintenance

Slope 1/2 (FM

Carrier 1/2)

Indicates the value that has been set for the slope at the respective

onset point of the phase shifter.

-50% to 50%

Maintenance

The setting can be changed here.

The setting can be changed here.

The setting can be changed here.

4.7 Exciter DTMB

4.7.1 Coder for DTMB

To operate the transmitter in DTMB mode, an appropriate software option must be acti-

vated using an option key.

The DTMB transmission parameters required for coding and modulation as well as the

TPS settings (TPS = transmission parameter signaling) used and signaled during

transmission can be checked in the "Config" and "Modulation" menu fields.

The DTMB standard can be used both in single frequency networks (SFN) and multiple

frequency networks (MFN). In SFNs, the TPSs are usually set automatically by the

megaframe information packet (MIP) or second frame initialization packet (SIP); in

MFNs, the TPS parameters are usually set manually.

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

165

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Switchless Combiner

Name

Description

Guard Time (regulator)

Value range Access right

0 to 24 hours Maintenance

Jitter Correction (Guard

Time)

On, Off

Maintenance

This value defines for how many hours the signal pro-

cessing should continue running without synchroniza-

tion if the reference connection fails. The Guard Time is

active only if the "Freq Stability" was "Good" at the time

of the failure. The longer the time selected is, the

poorer the accuracy of the transmitting frequency will

become. In addition, the time of transmission of the sig-

nal shifts. If this uses up the guard interval, reception

problems occur in single‑frequency networks.

When using an external reference source with high jit-

ter, activating this function can provide better frequency

stability. With "Good" reference signals, this function

should be disabled as the regulator takes significantly

longer to attain its maximum frequency stability. When

the internal GPS is used, this function is enabled auto-

matically.

4.11 Switchless Combiner

The switchless combiner couples the RF output signals of two racks and feeds the total

power to the antenna. If a rack has a power drop, the switchless combiner ensures

maximum output power at the antenna by a continuous shift of the phase angle.

Operating principle

The switchless combiner consists of two 90-degree couplers and an RF tube of varia-

ble length (referred to as a trombone). Changing the length makes it possible to gener-

ate a variable phase shift between the two inputs. If there is a complete power drop at

an input, the power of the other input can be fed to the antenna without loss. If there is

a partial power drop at one of the two inputs, the power dissipation in the absorber is

minimized by adjusting the phase angle.

Commissioning

During commissioning, the position of the trombone has to be calibrated for different

phase angles. To do so, connect an external power meter to the absorber of the

switchless combiner.

The calibration process consists of the following work steps:

● Start the calibration process.

● Set the switchless combiner to "local".

● Switch the signal of input 1 off.

● Press the up/down buttons on the switchless combiner to set the trombone so that

the power dissipation at the absorber is minimal.

● Press "Save Position".

● Switch the signal of input 1 on and of input 2 off.

● Press the up/down buttons on the switchless combiner to set the trombone so that

the power dissipation at the absorber is minimal.

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

207

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Switchless Combiner

● Press "Save Position" again.

● Switch the signal of input 2 back on.

● End the calibration process and set the switchless combiner to "remote".

Finally, use the phase shifter in rack 2 to set a power maximum at the antenna.

The calibration process has to be carried out again after changing the frequency. In

addition, the switchless combiner has to be reprogrammed beforehand according to

the manufacturer's instructions.

Operation

In "Automatic" mode, the switchless combiner responds to power losses at its inputs

independently. In "Manual" mode, one of three fixed positions of the trombone can be

moved to, for example, to switch off a rack.

4.11.1 Settings

"Overview" parameters

> "Overview"

● Path: "Device View (Home)" > "Tx<n >" > "Output Stage" >"Switchless Combiner"

Name

Description

Automatic (Control)

Switches the automatic power control of the rack

combiner on and off.

Value range Access right

Off, On

Maintenance

Position (Control)

Indicates which input was switched to the antenna

when automatic is switched off.

1, 2, 1+2

Read only

The setting can be changed here.

Current Position (Regu-

lation)

Indicates the current effective phase angle between the

two inputs. If the coupling is symmetric, the phase

angle is 90 degrees. If the switchless combiner has not

yet been calibrated for the current transmitter fre-

quency, the display shows a %.

Read only

0 degrees to

180 degrees,

0 % to 100 %

Status (Regulation)

Indicates whether the control is currently working:

●

●

Hold: The phase angle is constant.

Phase decreasing/Phase increasing: The phase

angle is currently being changed.

Hold, Phase

decreasing,

Phase

increasing

Read only

Calibration (Regulation)

Ok, Warning Read only

Indicates whether the switchless combiner has been

calibrated for the current transmitter frequency.

● OK: The switchless combiner is calibrated.

● Warning: The switchless combiner has not yet

been calibrated.

Access (Device Status)

Indicates whether the switchless combiner is in "Local"

mode or "Remote" mode. For the control to work, the

switchless combiner has to be in "Remote" mode.

Local/

Remote

Read only

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

208

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Switchless Combiner

Name

Description

Value range Access right

Link (Device Status)

Indicates whether there are data communications

between the transmitter and switchless combiner.

Read only

SFN Resync,

No Time

Information,

No Time Ref-

erence, SFN

Resync, In

Time

Warning (Device Sta-

tus)

Indicates whether the switchless combiner signals a

warning. This indication is identical to the indication on

the control panel of the switchless combiner.

Off, Yes

Read only

Fault (Device Status)

Off, Yes

Read only

Indicates whether the switchless combiner signals an

error. This indication is identical to the indication on the

control panel of the switchless combiner.

RF Probe (Device Sta-

tus)

Indicates whether the test point at the antenna output

functions.

OK, Fail

Read only

RCB (Device Status)

Indicates whether the redundancy control board in the

R&S TCE900 system control functions without errors.

OK, Fail

Read only

"Calibration" parameters

> "Calibration"

● Path: "Device View (Home)" > "Tx<n >" > "Output Stage" >"Switchless Combiner"

Name

Description

Value range Access right

Calibration (Calibration) Starts the calibration process. The calibration steps to

Off, On

Maintenance

be carried out are displayed in the "Instruction" field

after the calibration process has been started.

Save Position (Calibra-

tion)

Saves the upper or lower position of the trombone dur-

ing the calibration process.

Maintenance

Forward Power (Cali-

bration)

Transmitter (Calibra-

tion)

Indicates the power at the antenna.

0 kW to

100 kW

Read only

Indicates whether the transmitter is switched on.

Off, On

Maintenance

The setting can be changed here.

Instruction (Calibration)

Indicates the next step after starting the calibration

process.

Read only

Rack 1-4 (Calibration)

Auto/Off

Maintenance

Indicates whether the respective rack is switched on.

During the calibration process, the RF at the inputs of

the switchless combiner can be switched off using this

switch.

Access Combiner (Sta-

tus)

Indicates whether the switchless combiner is in "Local"

mode or "Remote" mode. For the control to work, the

switchless combiner has to be in "Remote" mode

Local/

Remote

Read only

Status (Status)

Indicates whether the switchless combiner has been

calibrated for the current transmitter frequency.

Calibrated,

Uncalibrated

Read only

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

209

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Cooling System

Name

Description

Value range Access right

Position (degree) (Sta-

tus)

Indicates the currently set phase angle. This display is

available only if the switchless combiner has been cali-

brated.

0 degrees to

180 degrees

Read only

Position (raw) (Status)

Indicates the position of the trombone (unitless).

0 to 1024

Read only

4.12 Cooling System

4.12.1 Liquid Cooling (High‑Performance)

The following illustration shows the "Cooling" menu for liquid cooling.

4.12.1.1 Configuring Switching Thresholds (Pressure) and Flow Volumes

● Path:Device View (Home) > Cooling

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

210

R&S®Tx9

Name

Type

Description

Device View Description

Cooling System

Value range

Access right

R&S Standard,

Site Cooling,

R&S Small

Configuration

A distinction must be made between the following types:

●

R&S Standard

If the transmitter is connected to a 9000 series cooling sys-

tem, select "R&S Standard".

If the transmitter is connected to an existing site cooling

system, select the "Site Cooling" setting. In this case,

warning and fault signaling lines which are routed to termi-

nal x8000 of the mains distribution board (MDB) are evalu-

ated.

If an FM single transmitter is connected to a simplified

cooling system without temperature control, select the

"R&S Small" setting.

●

●

Heat Exchangers /

Rack

Either 1 or 2 redundant heat exchangers can be used in each

rack. The set value affects fan monitoring and also the indica-

tors on the user interface.

1 or 2

Configuration

Fans / Heat

Exchanger

Either 1 or 2 fans can be used for each heat exchanger. The set

value affects fan monitoring and also the indicators on the user

interface.

0, 1 or 2

Configuration

Set Point Tempera-

ture

At this temperature, the temperature control system will attempt

to adjust the coolant temperature by changing the fan speed at

the heat exchangers. If the temperature drops below or

exceeds the control range, the actual coolant temperature can

be higher or lower.

25 to 65

Configuration

Fault Limit (Coolant

Temperature)

If the coolant temperature exceeds this value, a fault is trig-

gered and the rack is shut down. In N+1 systems, this event

can lead to switchover of the transmitter.

50 to ‒65

Configuration

Warning Limit (Cool-

ant Temperature)

If the coolant temperature exceeds this value, a warning is trig-

gered. The fault threshold is permanently set to 65 °C.

40 to 65

Configuration

(Coolant Pressure)

Warning Limit

If the coolant pressure drops to this value or lower, a warning is

triggered. Normally, this value should be set higher than the

value for the corresponding "Fault Limit".

0 to 4

Configuration

(Coolant Pressure)

Fault Limit

If the coolant pressure drops to this value or lower, a fault is

triggered. Normally, this value should be lower than the value

for the corresponding "Warning Limit".

0 to 4

Configuration

Max Fan Speed

50 % to 100 % Configuration

If Temperature

Exceeds Warning

Limit (Fans)

If necessary, the maximum speed of the fans at the heat

exchanger can be decreased in order to reduce noise. This can,

however, result in an increase in coolant temperature or even in

shutdown of the transmitter.

If a speed limit has been activated for the fans, this switch can

be used to select how the cooling system is to respond if the

warning threshold for the return temperature is exceeded.

●

"Keep Fans Quiet"

The speed limit for the fans remains activated. The trans-

mitter is shut down when the fault threshold for the return

temperature is reached.

"Rise Noise Level of Fans"

The set speed limit for the fans is deactivated and the fan

speed is automatically increased to max. 100 % of the

nominal speed.

●

Configuration

Keep Fans

Quiet

1 = Rise Noise

Level of Fans

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

211

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Cooling System

Name

Description

Value range

Access right

If Temperature

Exceeds Warning

Limit (RF)

Automatic reduction of the output power can be performed in

order to reduce the temperature level of cooling when the warn-

ing threshold is exceeded. In this case, the amplifiers are auto-

matically precorrected corresponding to their lower power.

Keep Nominal

RF Power

Reduce RF

Power to 80 %

Reduce RF

Power to 60 %

Configuration

Configuration

Maintenance

Maintenance

Read only

Read only

Extra Flow Rate

Hide Pump Errors

Hide Fan Errors

In addition to the minimum flow rate predetermined by the num-

ber of amplifiers, the flow can be increased in two stages if

additional components which require cooling (e.g. dummy load)

are installed.

During registration of pumps on the pump bus, this switch can

be used to hide fault messages which could otherwise cause

the transmitter to shut down. This makes it possible to discon-

nect pumps from the bus without interrupting operation.

During registration of fans on the fan bus, this switch can be

used to hide fault messages which could otherwise cause the

transmitter to shut down. This makes it possible to disconnect

fans from the bus without interrupting operation. The switch

acts on all fans of an output stage.

0

+10

+20

Off

On

Off

On

Site Cooling Warning Warnings from the site cooling system are displayed here. This

message only functions if the appropriate signals from the site

cooling system are supplied via terminal x8000 of the mains

distribution board (MDB).

OK

Warning

Site Cooling Fault

Faults at the site cooling system are displayed here. This mes-

sage only functions if the appropriate signals from the site cool-

ing system are supplied via terminal x8000 of the mains distri-

bution board (MDB).

OK

Fault

Pump (State)

Motor (State)

Operating Hours

(Pump)

(Pump) Type

Flow

Speed

Fan (State)

(Fan) Motor

Indicates whether the pump has been correctly registered on

the pump communication bus by the transmitter control unit.

Indicates whether the pump motor can run freely or is mechani-

cally blocked. To rectify this fault, the pump must be disassem-

bled and checked for foreign objects.

OK

Not Found

Read only

Installed

Blocked

Read only

Indicates how long the pump has been in operation.

0 to 999999

Read only

Indicates the used pump type. The displayed type is identical to

the type specified on the type plate of the pump.

●

The type "40‑100" should be used for transmitters with up

to 6 amplifiers.

The type "32‑120" should be used for transmitters with

more than 6 amplifiers.

●

"40‑100",

"32‑120"

Read only

Indicates the currently measured flow through the pump.

0 to 200

Read only

Indicates the currently measured speed of the pump motor.

0 to 100

Indicates whether the assigned fan is correctly registered on the

fan communication bus.

Read only

Indicates whether the fan motor is ready for operation or is

mechanically blocked.

Blocked

Read only

not found

installed

OK

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

212

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Cooling System

Name

Description

(Fan) Supply

If this message appears, the fan is disconnected from the

power supply.

Value range

Access right

OK

Failure

Read only

Check the position of the maintenance switch on the heat

exchanger; also check the circuit breaker of the fan in the mains

distribution unit of the rack.

Inlet Temp.

Outlet Temp.

Pressure

Indicates the temperature of the coolant flowing into the trans-

mitter rack.

‒30 °C to

+90 °C

Indicates the temperature of the coolant flowing out of the trans-

mitter rack toward the heat exchanger. The temperature must

not exceed a maximum value of 65 °C.

‒30 °C to

+90 °C

Read only

Read only

0 to 6

Read only

Antifreeze

Off; On

Configuration

Indicates the pressure of the coolant. With the pumps switched

off, this pressure can be slightly lower than when the pumps are

running. The correct pressure depends on the delivery head of

the pumps, the temperature of the coolant and the altitude of

the operating location.

Precise pressure tables can be found in the manual.

Used to define whether or not the fans at the heat exchanger

are to switch off if the temperature drops well below the speci-

fied temperature. Off: The fans switch off. This setting is recom-

mended in order to reduce the energy consumption of the cool-

ing system. On: The fans continue to run even at low outside

temperatures. This setting is recommended if the risk of fan

seizure due to freezing is to be reduced. Note: Even if anti-

freeze mode is active, the condensation protection function of

the transmitter will still switch off the fans at an inlet tempera-

ture below approx. +10 °C. The fans are designed in such a

way that they are not damaged if they seize up due to freezing.

Auto/On

If the switch is set to "On", the cooling system is switched on

irrespective of whether or not the transmitter is on. This setting

should only be used when putting the system into operation. If

the switch is set to "Auto", the cooling system is switched on/off

when the transmitter is switched on/off.

Cooling is

always On;

Cooling is

switched on by

Parameter "On"

Configuration

4.12.1.2 Configuring Fans and Pumps

The settings for fans are made in the following way:

For a standard cooling system with one transmitter rack, one pump unit and one heat

exchanger, configuration is performed automatically. Manual configuration is only nec-

essary in the following cases:

● More than one rack

● More than one heat exchanger per rack

1. Ensure that no pumps and fans are connected to the mains distribution board

(MDB).

2. Press the following buttons: Task View > Setup Cooling > Scan Devices.

3.

In the Scan Control field, switch Scan Device to "On".

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

213

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Cooling System

4. Follow the dialog step by step by connecting one fan after the other and one pump

after the other in the specified sequence to the mains distribution board (MDB) on

the rear of the transmitter rack.

Note: The status of this process is signaled by the status display in the Scan Con-

trol field:

● off (gray) = Scan Devices is switched off.

● In progress (yellow) = configuration is running

● Finished (green) = configuration has been successfully completed; all displays

in the Rack 1 and Rack 2 fields are set to Nothing to do.

5. Switch Scan Device to "Off".

4.12.1.3 Status of Cooling System

Cooling status parameters

Name

Description

Sensor for inlet temper-

ature

Indicates the status of the temperature sensor at the

inlet of the rack. If a fault is indicated, first check the

connecting cable between the sensor and the cooling

interface card in the R&S TCE900 system control unit.

Value range Access right

Green: OK

Read only

Sensor for outlet tem-

perature

Indicates the status of the temperature sensor at the

outlet of the rack.

Green: OK

Read only

Sensor for coolant

pressure

Indicates the status of the pressure sensor. If a fault is

indicated, first check the connecting cable between the

sensor and the cooling interface card in the

R&S TCE900 system control unit.

Green: OK

Read only

Status of coolant filter

Indicates that the pump power is not sufficient to

deliver the required flow. With a correctly dimensioned

and installed cooling system, this only occurs if the

coolant filter is blocked.

Green: OK

Read only

Yellow: Filter

Warning

Sensor for overall sta-

tus

Indicates whether the temperature sensors and pres-

sure sensor are OK. A malfunction at the pressure sen-

sor results in a fault; a malfunction at a temperature

sensor results in a warning.

Green: OK

Read only

Yellow:

Warning

Red: Fault

Red: Sensor

Fault

Red: Sensor

Fault

Red: Sensor

Fault

4.12.2 Small Cooling – Simplified Liquid Cooling System (FM Transmitter)

The following illustration shows the "Cooling" menu for "Small Cooling".

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

214

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Cooling System

4.12.2.1 Configuration of Cooling System

The "Small Cooling" mode (simplified cooling) is used only for FM single transmitters.

● Path:Device View (Home) > Cooling > Task View > Setup Cooling

Name

Type

Description

The following cooling system types can be configured:

●

R&S Standard

If the transmitter is connected to a 9000 series cooling sys-

tem, select the "R&S Standard" setting.

Site Cooling

Set this configuration if the FM transmitter system is to be

connected to the existing site cooling system.

R&S Small

If an FM single transmitter is connected to a simplified

cooling system without temperature control, use the

"R&S Small" setting.

●

●

Value range

Access right

R&S Standard,

Site Cooling,

R&S Small

Configuration

4.12.2.2 Status

● Path:Device View (Home) > Cooling

Pressing the buttons

● Outlet Temp.

● Pressure

● Sensor Status

● Inlet Temp.

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

215

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Cooling System

switches to the "Sensors" view or tab.

"Sensors" parameters

Name

Description

Outlet Temp.

(Outlet Tempera-

ture)

Indicates the temperature of the coolant flowing out of the transmitter

rack toward the heat exchanger. The temperature must not exceed a

maximum value of 65 °C.

Value range

Access right

‒30 °C to +90 °C Read only

Indicates the status of the temperature sensor at the outlet of the rack. Off, Sensor Fault,

Read only

OK

Indicates the threshold value for a temperature warning.

40 °C to 65 °C

Configuration

If the coolant temperature exceeds this value, a warning is triggered.

The threshold value can be set here (in steps of 1 degree).

Indicates the threshold value for displaying a temperature fault.

50 °C to 65 °C

Configuration

If the coolant temperature exceeds this value, a corresponding temper-

ature fault is displayed and the rack is shut down. In N+1 systems, this

event can lead to switchover of the transmitter.

The threshold value can be set here (in steps of 1 degree).

Inlet Temp. (Inlet

temperature)

Indicates the temperature of the coolant flowing into the transmitter

rack.

‒30 °C to +90 °C Read only

Indicates the status of the temperature sensor at the inlet of the rack.

If a fault is indicated, first check the connecting cable between the sen-

sor and the cooling interface card (CIF) in the R&S TCE900 system

control unit.

Indicates the pressure of the coolant.

With the pumps switched off, this pressure can be slightly lower than

when the pumps are running. The correct pressure depends on the

delivery head of the pumps, the temperature of the coolant and the alti-

tude of the operating location. Precise pressure tables can be found in

the system manual for the transmitter.

Off, Sensor Fault,

OK

Read only

‒500 Pa to

+500 Pa

Read only

Indicates the status of pressure sensor 1. If a fault is indicated, first

check the connecting cable between the sensor and the air cooling

interface card in the R&S TCE900 system control unit.

Off, Sensor Fault,

OK

Read only

Indicates the threshold value for a pressure warning.

0.0 bar to 4.0 bar Configuration

If the coolant pressure drops to this value or lower, a warning is trig-

gered. This value should be set higher than the value for the corre-

sponding "Fault Limit".

The threshold value can be set here (in steps of 1 bar).

If the coolant pressure drops to this value or lower, a corresponding

pressure fault is displayed. This value should be set lower than the

value for the corresponding "Warning Limit".

The threshold value can be set here (in steps of 1 bar).

Indicates the threshold value for displaying a pressure fault.

0.0 bar to 4.0 bar Configuration

Sensor Status

(Outlet Tempera-

ture)

Warning Limit

(Outlet Tempera-

ture)

Fault Limit (Outlet

Temperature)

Sensor Status

(Inlet Tempera-

ture)

Pressure (Cool-

ant Pressure)

Sensor Status

(Coolant Pres-

sure)

Warning Limit

(Coolant Pres-

sure)

Fault Limit (Cool-

ant Pressure)

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

216

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Cooling System

4.12.3 Air Cooling (Medium‑Power)

The following illustration shows the "Cooling" menu for air cooling.

● Path:Device View (Home) > Cooling

Pressing the buttons

● Rack Pressure

● Outlet Temp.

● Sensor Status

switches to the "Sensors" view or tab.

"Sensors" parameters

Name

Description

Value range

Access right

Inlet Temperature Indicates the temperature of the air flowing into the transmitter rack

‒30 °C to +90 °C Read only

(only for ducted intake air with an optional intake air kit).

Sensor Status

(Inlet Tempera-

ture)

Indicates the status of the temperature sensor at the inlet of the rack. If

a fault is indicated, first check the connecting cable between the sen-

sor and the air cooling interface in the R&S TCE900 system control

unit (only for ducted intake air with an optional intake air kit).

Off, Sensor Fault,

OK

Read only

Indicates the temperature of the air flowing out of the transmitter rack.

‒30 °C to +90 °C Read only

Outlet Tempera-

ture

Sensor Status

(Outlet Tempera-

ture)

Rack Pressure

Indicates the status of the temperature sensor at the outlet of the rack. Off, Sensor Fault,

Read only

OK

Indicates the pressure in the rack. Two differential pressure sensors

(Sensor 1 and Sensor 2) measure the differential air pressure inside

and outside the rack. If a sensor fails, the remaining sensor continues

to indicate the pressure inside the rack.

‒500 Pa to

+500 Pa

Read only

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

217

R&S®Tx9

Device View Description

Cooling System

Name

Description

Sensor 1 (Pres-

sure 1)

Indicates the status of pressure sensor 1. If a fault is indicated, first

check the connecting cable between the sensor and the air cooling

interface card in the R&S TCE900 system control unit.

Value range

Access right

Off, Sensor Fault,

OK

Read only

Sensor 2 (Pres-

sure 2)

Indicates the status of pressure sensor 2. If a fault is indicated, first

check the connecting cable between the sensor and the air cooling

interface card in the R&S TCE900 system control unit.

Off, Sensor Fault,

OK

Read only

"Status Fan 1/2" parameters

Name

Description

Communication

Indicates whether the data transfer from fans 1/2 to the air cooling

interface (ACIF) is OK.

Value range

Access right

OK, Fault

Read only

Speed

Indicates the speed of fans 1/2 read out from the air cooling interface

(ACIF).

0 % to 100 %

Read only

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

218

R&S®Tx9

Task View Description

Basic Settings

5 Task View Description

5.1 Basic Settings

The structure of the transmitter system is configured in the "Basic Setup" menu. Each

R&S TCE900 is assigned its logical function together with the other R&S TCE900

units, the physical installation position of the individual R&S TCE900 units is set and

the distribution of transmitters and R&S TCE900 units in the racks is described.

The basic settings are made for each R&S TCE900 in the system and must be entered

in the specified sequence:

● Hardware equipment ("Boards" menu tab)

The hardware modules which each R&S TCE900 contains and at which position

these modules are inserted in the R&S TCE900 base unit must be configured for

each R&S TCE900.

● Definition of the logical function

The task that each R&S TCE900 is to fulfill in the system must be defined.

● Integration of the R&S TCE900 in the transmitter system

Depending on their function, some R&S TCE900 units require additional informa-

tion regarding:

–

system variant (MultiTX, N+1)

–

–

transmitter variant (Redundancy, Modulation, Amplifier Type)

assignment to a transmitter (TX Number, Exciter A/B)

● Physical structure of the transmitter system

Depending on their function, some R&S TCE900 units require additional informa-

tion regarding:

–

total number of transmitter racks

–

number of racks per transmitter

● Physical installation location of the R&S TCE900 units

Each R&S TCE900 must be assigned the following:

–

number of the rack in which the R&S TCE900 is installed

–

number of the installation slot within a rack

● Assignment of transmitters to racks ("Racks" menu tab)

Each R&S TCE900 with the "Rack Control" function must be assigned those trans-

mitters which are installed in the racks that the "Rack Control" function monitors.

Changes to the basic settings only become effective when the R&S TCE900 has been

restarted.

In the tables below, "?" means that it must be taken into consideration whether an air

cooling interface (ACIF) or a TX interface is installed. See the detailed description of

the "Cooling Control" and "Rack Control" parameters in the table "Description of set-

ting values".

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

219

R&S®Tx9

Task View Description

Basic Settings

Assignment of logical functions

Table 5-1: "Functions" for SingleTX systems (for TMU9 and TMV9 only)

Transmitter type

TX Control

Exciter

System

Control

Cooling

Control

Rack Con-

trol

Table 5-2: "Functions" for MultiTX systems (<n> = 1 to 8)

Transmitter type

TX Control

Exciter

System

Control

Cooling Con-

trol

Rack Con-

trol

Single drive

Exciter

Backup drive

Exciter A

Exciter B

Dual drive

System Control

Exciter A

Exciter B

Single drive

System Control

Exciter (TX <n>)

Dual drive

System Control

Exciter A (TX <n>)

Exciter B (TX <n>)

Single drive

System Control

Exciter (TX A<n>, TX B)

Rack Control (where

applicable)

Dual drive

System Control

Exciter A (TX A<n>, TX

B)

X

X

-

X

-

-

X

-

X

-

-

X

-

-

X

-

X

X

X

-

X

X

-

X

-

X

X

-

-

X

-

X

X

X

X

-

X

X

-

X

-

X

X

-

-

X

-

X

?

?

-

?

-

-

?

-

?

-

-

?

-

-

?

-

?

?

-

?

-

-

X

-

X

-

-

X

-

X

X

-

Table 5-3: "Functions" for N+1 systems (<n> = 1 to 8; TXB: <n> = 9)

Transmitter type

TX Control

Exciter

System

Control

Cooling

Control

Rack Con-

trol

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

220

R&S®Tx9

Task View Description

Basic Settings

Transmitter type

TX Control

Exciter

System

Control

Cooling

Control

Rack Con-

trol

Exciter B (TX A<n>, TX

B)

Rack Control (where

applicable)

-

-

X

-

X

-

-

-

-

X

Table 5-4: "Setup" for SingleTX systems (for TMU9 and TMV9 only)

Transmitter type

System Variant

Exciter

Redundancy No. of

TX

Number

Transmit-

ters

SingleTX/MultiTX

A1

Single drive

SingleTX/MultiTX

System Control

SingleTX/MultiTX

Single drive

Exciter

Backup drive

Exciter A

Exciter B

Dual drive

Exciter A

Exciter B

Single drive

Exciter (TX <n>)

Dual drive

Exciter A (TX <n>)

Exciter B (TX <n>)

-

-

-

-

-

-

Single drive

System Control

N+1 TX

Exciter (TX A<n>, TX B)

-

A

A

B

-

A

B

-

A

-

A

B

-

A

A1

A1

-

A1

A1

TX

Number

-

-

A<n>

A<n>

TX

Number

-

A<n>

System Control

SingleTX/MultiTX

A<n>

Single drive

System Control

SingleTX/MultiTX

1

1

1

1

-

-

-

-

-

-

Transmit-

ters

<n>

<n>

Transmit-

ters

Backup drive

Backup drive

Dual drive

Dual drive

-

-

-

Dual drive

Dual drive

<n>

Single drive

Table 5-5: "Setup" for MultiTX systems (<n> = 1 to 8)

Transmitter type

System Variant

Exciter

Redundancy No. of

Table 5-6: "Setup" for N+1 systems (<n> = 1 to 8; TXB <n> = 9)

Transmitter type

System Variant

Exciter

Redundancy No. of

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

221

R&S®Tx9

Transmitter type

System Variant

Exciter

Redundancy No. of

Task View Description

Basic Settings

Transmit-

ters

-

-

-

Dual drive

Dual drive

<n>

-

-

-

TX

Number

-

-

-

A<n>

A<n>

-

-

A

B

-

System Control

N+1 TX

Rack Control (where appli-

cable)

Dual drive

Exciter A (TX A<n>, TX B)

Exciter B (TX A<n>, TX B)

Rack Control (where appli-

cable)

-

-

-

-

Table 5-7: IP addresses for SingleTX systems (for TMU9 and TMV9 only)

Transmitter type

Ethernet Local

Single drive

Exciter

Backup drive

Exciter A

Exciter B

Dual drive

System Control

Exciter A

Exciter B

Transmitter type

Single drive

System Control

Exciter (TX <n>)

Dual drive

System Control

Exciter A (TX <n>)

Exciter B (TX <n>)

192.168.58.100

192.168.58.11

192.168.58.12

192.168.58.100

192.168.58.11

192.168.58.12

Ethernet Local

192.168.58.100

192.168.58.<n>1

192.168.58.100

192.168.58.<n>1

192.168.58.<n>2

Table 5-8: IP addresses for MultiTX systems (<n> = 1 to 8)

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

222

R&S®Tx9

Task View Description

Basic Settings

Table 5-9: IP addresses for N+1 systems (<n> = 1 to 8; TXB <n> = 9; <m> = 2 to 9, No. of Rack Con-

trols)

Transmitter type

Single drive

System Control

Exciter (TX A<n>, TX B)

Dual drive

System Control

Exciter A (TX A<n>, TX B)

Exciter B (TX A<n>, TX B)

Ethernet Local

192.168.58.100

192.168.58.<n>1

192.168.58.100

192.168.58.<n>1

192.168.58.<n>2

Rack Control (where applicable)

192.168.58.10<m>

Rack Control (where applicable)

192.168.58.10<m>

Table 5-10: Description of setting values

Name

Description

System Con-

trol

Value range

Access right

Disabled,

Enabled

Configuration

TX Control

Disabled,

Enabled

Configuration

Set this check mark if this cassette of the R&S TCE900 is

to function as a system control unit. In this case, all

remote control interfaces and (if present) a R&S TDU900

display unit must be connected to this R&S TCE900. This

R&S TCE900 can also perform the function of the N+1

automatic system. In addition to functioning as a system

control unit, other functions can also be assigned to the

same R&S TCE900 depending on the modules it con-

tains.

Set this check mark if this cassette of the R&S TCE900

cassette is to function as a transmitter control unit. The

transmitter control unit contains, for example, the function

for monitoring the output power and an automatic exciter

switchover function (optional). In addition to functioning

as a transmitter control unit, other functions can also be

assigned to the same R&S TCE900 depending on the

modules it contains. This function must always be activa-

ted together with the "Exciter" function on the same

R&S TCE900.

Set this check mark if this R&S TCE900 cassette contains

at least one coder board and one RF board. With a

R&S TCE900 which is configured as an exciter, the "TX

Control" function must be activated at the same time,

unless the R&S TCE900 exciter is to be operated as a

standalone instrument. In addition to functioning as an

exciter, other functions can also be assigned to the same

R&S TCE900 depending on the modules it contains.

Set this check mark if this R&S TCE900 cassette contains

at least one cooling interface or one air cooling interface.

In addition to functioning as a cooling control unit, other

functions can also be assigned to the same R&S TCE900

depending on the modules it contains. The "Cooling Con-

trol" function must always be activated together with the

"Rack Control" function on the same R&S TCE900.

Exciter

Cooling Con-

trol

Disabled,

Enabled

Configuration

Disabled,

Enabled

Configuration

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

223

R&S®Tx9

Task View Description

Basic Settings

Value range

Access right

Disabled,

Enabled

Configuration

Name

Description

Rack Control

Set this check mark if this R&S TCE900 is to monitor rack

components (e.g. overvoltage protection) or door con-

tacts. A "TX Interface" module must be installed in the

R&S TCE900. With most system configurations, the Rack

Control function is together with the System Control func-

tion on the same R&S TCE900. The only exception are

multirack N+1 systems in which more than one Rack

Control are installed. With THx9, the "Rack Control" func-

tion must always be activated together with the "Cooling

Control" function on the same R&S TCE900.

With TMx9, the Rack Control function must be activated if

an air cooling interface is installed in the R&S TCE900

and the "Cooling" function is activated.

System Var-

iant

Indicates whether the system is a SingleTX, MultiTX or N

+1 system.

Single/

MultiTX, n+1

Configuration

The setting can be changed here if the "System Control"

function is active.

TX Number

Indicates the transmitter to which this R&S TCE900 is

assigned.

TX A1 to TX

A8 + TXB

Configuration

Exc A, Exc B Configuration

Off, 32/80,

9/12

Configuration

Exciter

ParIO

The setting can be changed here if the "TX Control" func-

tion is active.

Indicates whether this R&S TCE900 is to operate as

exciter A or exciter B. The displayed value must corre-

spond to the cabling of the two exciters at the exciter

switch. Exciter A is shown in the case of single drive

transmitters.

The setting can be changed here if the "Exciter" function

is active.

Indicates whether remote control has been activated by

means of parallel contacts. ParIO 32/80 corresponds to a

parallel remote control interface card with 32 inputs and

80 outputs. ParIO 9/12 corresponds to a parallel remote

control interface card with 9 inputs and 12 outputs.

Remote control can be connected to a R&S TCE900 with

the System Control function. In the case of N+1 systems,

it is also possible to connect remote control to a

R&S TCE900 with the TX Control function, but certain

restrictions will then apply.

The setting can be changed here if the "System Control"

or "TX Control" function is active.

Indicates which redundancy method is supported by this

transmitter.

●

Single Drive:

The transmitter contains one exciter.

Dual Drive:

The transmitter contains two exciters. If the active

exciter fails, an automatic switchover function

switches the system over to the standby exciter.

●

● Only available with some system variants:

Backup Drive:

The transmitter contains two exciters. If the active

exciter fails, an automatic switchover function

switches the system over to the standby exciter.

The setting can be changed here if the "TX Control" func-

tion is active.

Redundancy

Configuration

Single Drive,

Dual Drive,

Backup Drive

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

224

R&S®Tx9

Name

Description

Transmitters

Indicates how many transmitters the system contains.

The B transmitter of an N+1 system is not included here.

The setting can be changed here if the "System Control"

function is active.

Modulation

Indicates the modulation mode of the exciter. An appro-

priate software option must additionally be installed for

the displayed modulation mode.

Either the modulation modes for TV/DAB or those for FM/

FMHD are available.

The setting can be changed here if the "TX Control" or

"Exciter" function is active.

Task View Description

Basic Settings

Value range

Access right

1 to 8

Configuration

Configuration

DVB‑T2,

DVB‑T,

ISDB‑T,

ATSC, ATV,

DAB, FM,

FMHD

Rack Number

Indicates the rack in which the R&S TCE900 module is

installed. The left-hand rack is assigned the number 1.

1 to 18

Configuration

Amplifier

Mode

Broadband,

Doherty

Configuration

Amplifiers

1 to 24

Configuration

Amplifier

Type

Indicates the amplifier type used in the transmitter.

●

Configuration

The setting can be changed here if the "System Control",

"TX Control" or "Exciter" function is active.

Indicates whether the amplifiers are to be operated in

broadband or Doherty mode. To operate the amplifiers in

Doherty mode, the frequency ranges of the amplifiers

must be set to the transmit frequency. This display only

applies to amplifier types which support Doherty mode.

The setting can be changed here if the "TX Control" or

"Exciter" function is active.

Indicates the total number of amplifiers per output stage

of this transmitter. Whether the amplifiers are housed in

one or more racks is irrelevant. Up to 24 amplifiers per

output stage are supported (FM: up to 8 amplifiers).

The setting can be changed here if the "TX Control" func-

tion is active.

●

●

●

●

PHU901:

High‑power amplifier, UHF, liquid‑cooled.

PMU901:

Medium‑power amplifier, UHF, air‑cooled with Doh-

erty mode.

PHU902:

High‑power amplifier, UHF, liquid‑cooled with Doh-

erty mode.

PHV902:

High‑power amplifier, VHF, liquid‑cooled with Doh-

erty mode.

PMV901:

Medium‑power amplifier, VHF, air‑cooled with Doh-

erty mode.

The setting can be changed here if the "TX Control" or

"Exciter" function is active.

Indicates the position at which the R&S TCE900 is instal-

led in the respective rack. In the THU9, position 1 is the

left-hand slot; in the TMU9, position 1 is the top slot.

The setting can be changed here if the "System Control",

"TX Control" or "Exciter" function is active.

PHU901,

PMU901,

PHU902,

PHV902,

PMV901,

PHR901,

PMR901

Slot Number

1 to 12

Configuration

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

225

R&S®Tx9

Task View Description

Basic Settings

Value range

Access right

1 or 2

Configuration

Name

Description

Racks/Rack

Control

Indicates how many racks are monitored by this

R&S TCE900. Transmitters with more than 12 amplifiers

monitor 2 racks with one rack control. With all other trans-

mitters, this value must be set to 1.

The setting can be changed here if the "Rack Control"

function is active.

Cooling Type

Indicates the type of cooling system.

Liquid, Air

Configuration

The displayed value must be suitable for the amplifier

type. Further settings are made in the "Home" > "Cooling"

> "Task View" > "Setup Cooling" menu.

Racks/

System

Indicates the total number of racks contained in the sys-

tem.

1 to 18

Configuration

Racks/TX

1 to 4

Configuration

The setting can be changed here if the "System Control"

function is active.

Indicates the number of racks that the transmitter consists

of. This setting is only relevant for THU9 transmitters with

more than 12 amplifiers. In all other cases, the value 1

must be set here.

The setting can be changed here if the "TX Control" func-

tion is active.

Number of

Rack Controls

Indicates the total number of rack controls which are

active in the system.

1 to 9

Configuration

The setting can be changed here if the "Rack Control"

function is active.

Int. RF Sen-

sor

Indicates whether the internal RF test point of the ampli-

fier is to be used for measuring the transmit power.

Off, On

Configuration

Configuration

Indicates whether the selected combination of settings is

valid and nonconflicting.

OK, not Valid Read only

The setting is only relevant for "Amplifier Type =

PMU901". The value "On" should be set if the transmitter

consists of exactly one amplifier and no CAN bus test

point is installed in the transmitter.

The setting can be changed here if the "Rack Control"

function is active.

The setting can be changed here.

Reboot

Reboots this R&S TCE900. Changes to settings in this

and the other menu tabs of the Basic Config menu only

become effective after a reboot.

IP Address

(Local IP Set-

tings)

Used to set the IP address of the R&S TCE900 for inter-

nal communications with other R&S TCE900 units in this

system. When the system is supplied, the internal IP

addresses begin with 192.168.58. The last group of digits

differs according to the following rule:

●

●

System Control: 100

TX Control + Exciter: 11/12 (= TXA1, Exciter A/B) to

81/82 (= TXA8, Exciter A/B); 91/92 (= TXB, Exciter

A/B)

Rack Control (second rack): 101

●

The setting can be changed here.

Configuration

Configuration

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

226

R&S®Tx9

Task View Description

Parameters: Input Configuration

Name

Description

Value range

Access right

IP Address

(Remote IP

Settings)

Slot Config

Used to set the IP address of the R&S TCE900 system

control. The settings depend on the network infrastruc-

ture.

Used to determine which module is contained in each

installation slot of the R&S TCE900 unit. Basically, any

module can be inserted into any installation slot. The rack

cabling has, however, been optimized for installation of

the modules in the following slots:

●

●

Slot A (bottom left): RF board or TX interface

Slot B (top center): Cooling interface (CIF or ACIF)

or ATV interface

Slot C (bottom center): Reserved for receiver module

Slot CD (top right): Coder board or LAN switch

●

●

The setting can be changed here.

Coder Board,

RFBoard,

TXIf, Coolin-

gIf, LAN-

SwitchIf,

ATVIf, CIF,

ACIF

Configuration

5.2 Parameters: Input Configuration

GUI name

(external)

Input Source

Help text (English)

Value range

Value access

Here, you can configure the input interfaces used for two inputs, inde-

pendently of each other. To test the "seamless switching" function, it is

possible to select the same input interface for both inputs. The selec-

tion options of the data sources are determined by the installed Input

Interfaces and option keys.

variable

Maintenance

Multiplex Name

Here, you can assign any desired name for the multiplex contained in

this transport stream. This name is displayed in the transmitter over-

view and, for n+1 systems, in the automatic transmitter.

Maintenance

Mute (on Input

Fail)

Here, you can configure the operating behavior when the active input

fails. This parameter is available in MFN operating mode only.

●

No – In the operating mode, the output signal is not suppressed if

the active input fails. Null packets are output instead.

Yes - If the active input fails, the output signal is suppressed.

●

Input Fail Delay

Used to set a delay time which must elapse following an input signal

failure before the output signal is suppressed and a sum fault is gener-

ated.

Force Exciter

Changeover

Monitor Out

IP Stream

Here it can be determined whether switchover to another redundant

exciter is to take place if the input signal fails. This function is available

for all redundancy systems (dual drive, backup exciter and n+1).

Yes - In the "Yes" position, an exciter fault is signaled to the

●

higher‑level redundancy control unit which decides whether to

switch over to another exciter or transmitter.

No - In the "No" position, no switchover takes place.

●

Here, for measuring purposes, you can send any input signal to the TS

Monitor-Out jack (X22). The selection options of the data sources are

determined by the installed Input Interfaces and option keys.

Indicates whether a valid data stream is fed to the transmitter via the IP

feed. If an error is indicated, check the settings of the IP stream and the

Ethernet interface.

No, Yes

Maintenance

Maintenance

Yes, No

Maintenance

Maintenance

Query

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

227

Task View Description

Parameters: Input Configuration

TS LAN1

TS LAN2

Maintenance

Unicast

●

● Multicast

Maintenance

R&S®Tx9

GUI name

(external)

TS Stream

RJ45 Connector

Streaming Mode

Port

Protocol

Gross IP data

rate

TS State

Type

Gross TS Data-

rate

Help text (English)

Value range

Value access

Indicates whether a valid serial data stream is fed to the transmitter via

TS1/2 IN (X20/X21). If an error is displayed here, first check the setting

of the TS type (ASI/SMPTE).

Query

Multicast Address The function of this menu item varies depending on the selected

Maintenance

Here, define the physical network interface to which the logical IP

stream is bound. Normally, the TS LAN 1(X30) jack is coupled to IP

Stream 1 and TS LAN 2(X31) is coupled to IP Stream 2. This allows

you to use multiple redundant servers that can be selected automati-

cally using the automatic input signal switchover. However, it is also

possible to select multiple multicast streams via the same physical

Ethernet jack. In this case, too, the automatic input signal switchover

can toggle automatically between two data streams.

This configures the type of network streaming.

●

Unicast: The multiplex sends the suitable IP stream to the IP

address of the TV transmitter in a targeted manner.

● Multicast: The TV transmitter subscribes to a Multicast IP stream

that can be provided by the Multiplexer in the feed network to mul-

tiple transmitters at the same time.

streaming mode:

●

for Unicast: displays the local IP address of the selected input X30

or X31.

for Multicast: used to set the multicast address of the required

gateway server (data transmitter).

Used to set the port number under which the transport stream is expec-

ted.

Select the network protocol used here.

●

UDP (User Datagram Protocol) for easy connectionless communi-

cation.

RTP (Realtime Transport Protocol) for packet-oriented communi-

cations.

●

●

Maintenance

Maintenance

Read only

Read only

Read only

Read only

Packet Lock

Indicates that a signal has been detected at this input.

Packet Length

Indicates the dedicated packet length of the transport stream.

Shows the total data rate at the IP feed.

Indicates whether a valid serial data stream is fed to the transmitter via

the TS1/2 IN (X20/X21) jacks. If an error is displayed here, first check

the setting of the TS type (ASI/SMPTE).

Used to set the data format for the data streams at X20 and X21.

●

●

●

AUTO: Data format is detected automatically

ASI: Manual setting for an ASI transport stream

SMPTE: Manual setting for an SMPTE transport stream

Maintenance

Auto

ASI

SMPTE

Shows the total data rate at the TS feed.

Read only

●

●

●

●

●

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

228

R&S®Tx9

Task View Description

System Control

5.3 System Control

5.3.1 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

To operate the transmitter in SNMP mode, an appropriate software option must be

activated using an option key.

5.3.1.1 General

Simple network management protocol (SNMP) is used for monitoring and controlling

different devices in a network. A description of the device must be loaded in the central

unit ("manager"; management information base (MIB)), from which the transmitters are

monitored. A monitored device contains a program ("agent") that can answer queries

from the manager and execute commands. Furthermore, it is possible that the agent of

its own accord generates a message (called a notification, alarm or trap) and sends it

to the manager. In this way, the central unit can be informed of a fault. The MIBs

required for monitoring and controlling a transmitter are stored as a ZIP archive in

every R&S TCE900. From there, they can be downloaded with any web browser.

When the transmitter is put into operation, both the agent in the transmitter and the

manager must be configured. Additional steps may be necessary if the transmitter is

connected via routers, firewalls or similar devices, as they may block data packets.

5.3.1.2 Settings on Transmitter End

You can make settings yourself via the local R&S TDU900 display (if available), via the

web server or in part via SNMP. The Task View > System Control > SNMP menu con-

tains all the settings that are required for accessing a transmitter.

Changes to these settings are adopted immediately. The device does not need to be

restarted.

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

229

R&S®Tx9

Task View Description

System Control

Fig. 5-1: SNMP menu

The XX9 transmitter family supports the versions SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c. Alarms can

be sent as v1Traps, v2Traps or v2Informs. Several destinations for error messages

(trapsinks) and several communities can be set with read only authorization and read/

write authorization. SNMP is a protocol for remote control and is offered only at the

remote Ethernet interface (X2 – 1000 BaseT). The system or transmitter has to be set

to remote to execute SET commands.

5.3.1.3 Settings on Manager End

The basic SNMP settings (port, community) on the manager end and transmitter end

have must match. You typically define these settings for each IP address in your pro-

gram (e.g. MIB browser). The SNMP version is also set in the manager; the transmitter

then detects this automatically. Subsequently, SNMP communications should already

be functioning at a basic level.

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

230

R&S®Tx9

Task View Description

System Control

Fig. 5-2: SNMP manager settings

Being able to monitor and control a transmitter with SNMP requires the device's MIB

on the manager end and a program that can interpret the MIB. You can load all availa-

ble MIBs from any device using a web browser.

● Log in using the WebGUI and select the menu Task View > System Control >

Downloads > Download SNMP MIBs

● Save the mibs.zip file to your computer

● Load the following MIBs in the MIB browser:

– RS-COMMON-MIB

– RS-XX9-SMI-MIB and RS-XX9-TC-MIB

– RS-XX9-COMMON-MIB

– MIB of the standby concept, standard or option

A detailed description of the MIBs, the information that they contain and the associated

options is given below.

MIBs from Rohde & Schwarz and the Munich-based Broadcast Technology Institute

(IRT) are available. MIBs from IRT allow transmitters to be linked using SNMP irre-

spective of the manufacturer. They are, however, limited with respect to their function-

ality. Some particular features to keep in mind when using IRT MIBs are listed in the

document "SoftwareMiniSpecification – SNMP for XX9".

The MIBs have the naming convention RS-XX9-<TV/radio standard>-<function/

option>-MIB. Examples include: RS-XX9-DVBT2-MIB for DVB-T2 and RS-XX9-AIR-

COOLING-MIB for air cooling.

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

231

R&S®Tx9

Task View Description

System Control

Examples of MIBs and contents

MIB

Description

RS-COMMON-MIB

Contains general Rohde & Schwarz definitions

RS-XX9-SMI-MIB

Contains top-level definitions of other XX9 MIBs

RS-XX9-TC-MIB

Contains definitions for textual conventions used in other MIBs

RS-XX9-COMMON-MIB

Contains definitions that comply with all of the transmitters from the XX9 family

(e.g. configuration)

RF-XX9-TX-MIB

Contains definitions for single transmitters not dependent on the TV standard

RF-XX9-MTX-MIB

Contains definitions for MultiTx and N+1 systems

5.3.1.4 Which MIBs Must Be Used?

The device can be queried by SNMP in order to find out which MIBs have been imple-

mented. This information is contained in the table "sysORTable"

(OID .iso(1).org(3).dod(6).internet(1).mgmt(2).mib-2(1).system(1).sysORTable(9) of

the SNMPv2 MIB). There is a corresponding MIB for each type of modulation.

Fig. 5-3: sysORTable display

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

232

R&S®Tx9

Task View Description

System Control

MIB

Description

RS-COMMON-MIB

This MIB contains general Rohde & Schwarz definitions.

RS-XX9-AIR-COOLING-MIB

This MIB contains parameters for air-cooled transmitters.

RS-XX9-COMMON-MIB

Transmitter configuration

This MIB contains general data that supports every device:

●

● Option keys

●

●

●

Software update

SNMP configuration

Releasing a test notification

This information always applies to the device using SNMP.

RS-XX9-LIQUID-COOLING-MIB

RS-XX9-MTX-MIB

This MIB contains parameters for liquid-cooled transmitters, either

with internal Rohde & Schwarz cooling or with (external) station cool-

ing.

This MIB contains parameters independent of the type of modulation

for:

● MultiTx

N+1

●

RS-XX9-SMI-MIB

This MIB contains top-level definitions of other XX9 MIBs.

RS-XX9-TC-MIB

RS-XX9-TX-MIB

This MIB contains definitions for textual conventions used in other

MIBs.

This MIB contains parameters independent of the type of modulation

for:

●

●

●

Single drive standby concepts

Passive dual drive

Active dual output stage

This applies to all power classes in the medium- and high-power

range.

RS-XX9-ATSC-MIB

This MIB contains parameters for ATSC signal processing.

RS-XX9-ATV-MIB

This MIB contains parameters for ATV signal processing.

RS-XX9-DAB-MIB

This MIB contains parameters for DAB signal processing.

RS-XX9-DTMB-MIB

This MIB contains parameters for DTMB signal processing.

RS-XX9-DVBT-MIB

This MIB contains parameters for DVBT signal processing.

RS-XX9-DVBT2-MIB

This MIB contains parameters for DVBT2 signal processing.

RS-XX9-FM-MIB

This MIB contains parameters for FM signal processing.

RS-XX9-ISDBT-MIB

This MIB contains parameters for ISDBT signal processing.

5.3.1.5 Which OIDs from a MIB Must Be Used?

Different parameters are available depending on the system being queried. For exam-

ple, txExcAutoOperationMode (in RS-XX9-TX-MIB) returns the response NoSuch-

Name when you query a single transmitter, since it has no automatic exciter switch-

over. It is easy to find out which parameters are valid by checking the conformance

statements. In the example for automatic exciter switchover above, the OID txExcAu-

toOperationMode is contained in the txObjsExciterAutomatic object group.

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

233

R&S®Tx9

Task View Description

System Control

For N+1 systems this also means that unavailable parameters may receive the

response NoSuchName, e.g. parameters from the transmitter A8 if only a 4+1 system

is present.

Fig. 5-4: Groups display

5.3.1.6 Setting Alarms

Parameters that allow configuration of the transmitter alarms can be found under the

OID "commonSnmpConfiguration". For example, it is possible to switch off the IRT

alarms (factory default setting: on) and to switch on Rohde & Schwarz alarms (factory

default setting: off). The transmitter-specific alarms offer an extensive range of configu-

ration possibilities. In addition, it is also possible to assign a user-selectable priority

and to check the current status. Since the Rohde & Schwarz MIBs contain a large

number of alarms, three predefined groups for faults, warnings and information exist, to

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

234

R&S®Tx9

Task View Description

System Control

which all alarms are assigned. For each alarm, the respective alarm class is given in

the binding AlarmClass.

A possible and recommended configuration would therefore be to disable the IRT

alarms and to enable the Rohde & Schwarz alarms of the fault class:

● irtNotificationsAllOff: OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.216.2.1.3.3.0

● rsNotificationsAllFaultsOn; OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.216.2.1.3.6.0

The example shows alarm class fault (1) for the alarm "txSummaryFault" (transmitter

sum fault).

Alarms are always collected in the Notifications branch in the MIBs. They always have

at least three bindings.

● Alarm Class: Predefined, fixed alarm class

● Priority: User-selectable priority

● State: Current state of the alarm

"State" is defined in NotificationState in the MIB RS-XX9-TC-MIB:

undefined(1)

State is not available

off(2)

fault(3)

Alarm is inactive or not available

Alarm corresponds to an error

warning(4)

Alarm corresponds to a warning

ok(5)

Alarm does not correspond to either an error or a warning or alarm is OK

Matching the alarms, there are one or more notification tables in the MIBs on the

Objects branch. Information is displayed together there.

5.3.1.7 Testing the SNMP Communications

In the following example, a transmitter with the IP address 172.29.12.43 queries the

OID sendTestNotification (1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.216.2.1.3.1). The response from

the agent is "idle(1)". Using a further test, you can check whether the transmitter sends

an alarm message in the event of an error and whether this message reaches the

alarm destinations. To do so, set an OID sendTestNotification to the value of 2 (trig-

ger), which triggers a commonTest trap (1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.216.2.0.1000). This

alarm is sent to all receivers that have been entered for the alarms (trapsinks, see

above). This type of error message functions in a slightly different way than that used

for querying and setting values (default: UDP Port 161 for SET/GET and UDP Port 162

for alarms).

The following image shows that the testTrap has been received correctly by the

tce900-100100 device (serial number 100100).

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

235

R&S®Tx9

Task View Description

System Control

Fig. 5-5: testTrap display

5.3.1.8 Setting Alarms Using SNMP

As an alternative to a web browser, you can also configure trapsinks with SNMP as

well. The procedure is described in RFC 3413.

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

236

R&S®Tx9

Task View Description

System Control

Fig. 5-6: TargetTables display

There are three tables to be used, contained in SNMP-TARGET-MIB and SNMP-

NOTIFICATION-MIB: snmpNotifyTable, snmpTargetAddrTable and snmpTargetPar-

amsTable:

● snmpNotifyType: trap(1) or inform(2)

● snmpTargetAddrTDomain / snmpTargetAddrTAddress: Address snmpTarge-

tAddrTDomain: 1.3.6.1.6.1.1 (snmpUDPDomain), this makes snmpTargetAddrTAd-

dress six octets; the first four octets correspond to the IP address and the last two

to the UDP port

● snmpTargetAddrTimeout, snmpTargetAddrRetryCount: Additional settings for

inform

● snmpTargetParamsMPModel: 0 (SNMPv1) or 1 (SNMPv2c)

● snmpTargetParamsSecurityModel: Currently just 2 (SNMPv2c)

● nmpTargetParamsSecurityName: Example: public

● snmpTargetParamsSecurityLevel: Currently just noAuthNoPriv(1)

The SNMP agent uses the following default values:

snmpNotifyName

snmpNotifyTag trap inform

rsdef1

trap

snmpNotifyType trap(1) inform (2)

trap(1)

rsdef2

inform

inform (2)

snmpNotifyStorageType nonVolatile(3)

nonVolatile(3)

snmpNotifyRowStatus readOnly (5)

readOnly (5)

nonVolatile(3)

nonVolatile(3)

readOnly

readOnly(5)

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

237

R&S®Tx9

Task View Description

System Control

getAddrName

snmpTargetAddrTDomain

target1

3.6.1.6.1.1

to

target5

1.3.6.1.6.1.1

snmpTargetAddrTAddress

0x0101010100a2

0x0101010100a2

snmpTargetAddrStorageType

permanent(4)

permanent(4)

snmpTargetAddrRowStatus

notInService(2)

notInService(2)

snmpTargetAddrTimeout

snmpTargetAddrRetryCount

snmpTargetAddrTagList

1500

3

trap

snmpTargetAddrParams

param2

snmpTargetParamsName

param1

snmpTargetParamsMPModel

0

snmpTargetParamsSecurityModel 1

snmpTargetParamsSecurityName public

1500

3

trap

param2

param2

1

2

public

snmpTargetParamsSecurityLevel

nNoPriv(1)

noAuthNoPriv(1)

snmpTargetParamsStorageType

permanent(4)

snmpTargetParamsRowStatus

active(1)

permanent(4)

active(1)

5.3.1.9 Type plates - the ENTITY MIB

The ENTITY MIB contains information on type plates. The table commonEntPhysicalT-

able in RS-XX9-COMMON-MIB serves as an extension of this. It includes values such

as operating hour meters and the number of restarts.

The following figure shows an excerpt from the table entPhysicalTable of the ENTITY

MIB.

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

238

R&S®Tx9

Task View Description

System Control

Fig. 5-7: entPhysical display (excerpt)

The extension of the entPhysicalTable in RS-XX9-COMMON-MIB (commonEntPhysi-

calTable):

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

239

R&S®Tx9

Task View Description

Maintain Software

Fig. 5-8: commonEntPhysical display

5.4 Maintain Software

5.4.1 Software Update

The software of the R&S®TCE900 can be updated. Installing a new version will make

new features available and will improve the functionality of the transmitter. New soft-

ware versions are supplied as a file which can be run under MS Windows. Apart from

the instrument software, this file also contains the "R&S Software Distributor" tool

which allows the software to be installed on several R&S®TCE900 units at the same

time. The software supports all R&S®TCE900 modules within a transmitter system.

The R&S®TCE900 must be prepared for the software update before installation is star-

ted. To ensure that a R&S®TCE900 is found in the network by the R&S Software Dis-

tributor, the software update must be started in the "Task View" > "Maintain SW" >

"SW Update" menu of the respective R&S®TCE900. Alternatively, "Update Mode" can

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

240

R&S®Tx9

Task View Description

Maintain Software

be set to "Permanent" in this menu. This allows the software to be updated at any time

without preparation.

The software update can then be performed on a Windows PC which is connected to

the transmitter via the network.

● Deactivate the energy-saving option of the network card in the PC:

– Under Windows, call the Device Manager by selecting Start > Control Panel >

System > Hardware > Device Manager.

–

–

In the Device Manager, select the correct network adapter and double-click to

call the associated Properties window.

In the Properties window, select the Power Management tab and (if neces-

sary) deactivate the Allow computer to turn off this device to save power

option.

● On the PC, start the installation software. The start window of the R&S Software

Distributor appears.

● Confirm the default setting Remote Installation with Next.

The installable software updates are displayed. To obtain additional information

about an update, mark the update with the cursor and then click the Info button.

● Search for updatable devices in the network by clicking Next. After a few seconds

a list of the found devices is displayed.

● If no devices are found even though the network settings are correct , the settings

of the R&S Software Distributor must be checked under Options and corrected if

necessary.

– Enable VISA must be deactivated using the checkbox.

– Device Group must match the device group displayed in the Software Update

– Save the changed settings by clicking Save Options and then search again by

menu of the TCE.

clicking Rescan.

● In the Device List, select the device to be updated by marking the checkbox.

● Start the update by clicking Install.

● When the update is complete, a message is displayed in the info field at the bottom

left of the window. The TCE900 is rebooted automatically.

If the update stops prematurely (i.e. the message "Copying/Installing ... %" stops

before the 100 % mark is reached), abort the update by clicking Cancel and then

restart the R&S Software Distributor.

"SW Update" parameters

● Path: Task View (Home) > Maintain SW > SW Update

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

241

R&S®Tx9

Name

Description

Update Status

(Software Update)

Task View Description

Maintain Software

Value range

Access right

Stopped, Started Read only

Update Mode

(Software Update)

Indicates how the software of the TCE can be updated.

● Manual:

Manual, Perma-

nent

Maintenance

Indicates whether the R&S®TCE900 is ready for the device software

update.

●

Stopped:

The R&S®TCE900 cannot be found in the network by the Soft-

ware Distributor. It is not possible to update the software.

Started:

●

The R&S®TCE900 is listed in the update list of the R&S Software Dis-

tributor and the software can be updated.

The R&S®TCE900 can be found by the Software Distributor for

approx. 90 seconds after the "Start Update" button is pressed.

Permanent:

●

The R&S®TCE900 can be found by the Software Distributor at any

time. The software can be updated at any time without the

R&S®TCE900 needing to be prepared for a software update.

The setting can be changed here.

SW Version (Soft-

ware Update)

Shows the software version currently installed on the TCE. The first

number of the displayed SW version must be identical on all

R&S®TCE900 units of a system to ensure that the system operates

correctly.

Read only

Device Name

(Software Update)

Shows the device name under which this R&S®TCE900 appears in

the list of the Software Distributor.

Up to 20 charac-

ters

Maintenance

The setting can be changed here.

Start Update

(Software Update)

Starts the enable phase of a software update if "Update Mode" is set

to "Manual".

Maintenance

The enable phase is active for approx. 90 seconds. During this time,

the R&S®TCE900 can be found in the network by the Software Dis-

tributor.

Device Group

(Software Update)

Shows the device group. The displayed device group must be the

same as the device group set in the Software Distributor so that this

R&S®TCE900 is displayed in the list of devices found by the Software

Distributor.

DEFAULT

Read only

Reboot (Software

Maintenance)

Reboots the R&S®TCE900.

Maintenance

-

-

-

5.4.2 Backup/Restore

This function is used to make a complete backup of the currently installed software ver-

sion as well as all settings of the R&S®TCE900. This backup is created in the file sys-

tem of the R&S®TCE900 and can then either be downloaded to an external storage

medium or restored at a later time.

Backups of the same R&S®TCE900 and also of other R&S®TCE900 units can be

uploaded from an external storage medium and then restored.

If a backup is made before the software of the R&S®TCE900 is updated, it is then pos-

sible to revert to the old software version after the software has been updated by

restoring the old version from the backup.

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

242

R&S®Tx9

Task View Description

Maintain Software

In order to download a backup to an external storage medium or to upload a backup

from an external storage medium, there must be a direct network connection between

the R&S®TCE900 and a PC. This function is not available for R&S®TCE900 units

which can be reached only indirectly via a TCE900 SysCtrl.

"Backup/Restore" parameters

● Path:Task View (Home) > Maintain SW > Backup/Restore

Name

Description

Value range

Access right

Backup State

(Backup/Restore)

Indicates the action which has just been performed.

●

Read only

Ready, Backup/

Check/Restore/

Download/

Upload in Pro-

gress

●

●

●

●

●

Ready

The backup/restore functions can be started.

Backup in Progress

A backup has been started and will then be stored in the internal

file system of the R&S®TCE900.

Check in Progress

The backup uploaded to the R&S®TCE900 is being checked.

Restore in Progress

The backup stored in the internal file system is being restored on

the R&S®TCE900.

Download in Progress

The backup stored in the R&S®TCE900 is being copied to an

external storage medium.

Upload in Progress

A backup is being copied from an external storage medium to the

TCE900.

Start Backup

(Backup/Restore)

Starts the creation of a backup. The backup is stored in the internal file

system of the R&S®TCE900 and contains the current program version

as well as all setting values of the R&S®TCE900. The creation of a

backup causes the R&S®TCE900 to reboot.

Start Restore

(Backup/Restore)

Restores the program version as well as all settings of the

R&S®TCE900 from the backup which was stored in the file system of

the R&S®TCE900.Restoring a backup causes the TCE to reboot.

Download File

(Backup/Restore)

Copies the backup stored in the file system of the R&S®TCE900 to an

external storage medium. This function is only available if the

R&S®TCE900 is operated via a web browser.

Upload File

(Backup/Restore)

Copies a backup from an external storage medium to the

R&S®TCE900. This function is only available in the case of operation

via a web browser.

-

-

-

-

Maintenance

Maintenance

Maintenance

Maintenance

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

243

R&S®Tx9

Task View Description

Options

Name

Description

File State (File

Info)

Indicates the status of the backup stored on the R&S®TCE900.

●

Value range

Access right

-

Read only

●

●

●

●

●

●

Available Backup OK

The backup is OK.

No Backup Available

No backup has yet been made on or uploaded to the

R&S®TCE900.

Invalid Backup

The backup is faulty. The backup cannot be used.

Invalid Device

The backup was not made on a R&S®TCE900. It is not compati-

ble with this device. None of the files from this backup can be

restored on this R&S®TCE900.

Invalid Checksum

The check routine performed on the backup returned a checksum

error. The backup cannot be used in this case.

Not Compatible

The backup loaded from an external storage medium is not com-

patible with the R&S®TCE900. The backup cannot be used in

this case.

Invalid Software Version

To be able to operate, the R&S®TCE900 requires a more recent

software version than that contained in the backup.

Shows the name of the transmitter from which the backup originates.

Read only

Tx Name (File

Info)

Name (File Info)

Shows the name of the device from which the backup originates. If the

device name is not TCE900, the backup cannot be restored. The Inva-

lid Device fault is displayed in this case.

Part Number (File

Info)

Shows the part number of the R&S®TCE900 from which the backup

originates. The backup can only be restored if the displayed part num-

ber is identical to the part number of the R&S®TCE900. The Not

Compatible fault will otherwise be displayed.

Date Time (File

Info)

Indicates when the backup was made.

Serial Number

(File Info)

Shows the serial number of the instrument from which the backup was

made.

SW Version (File

Info)

Shows the software version which the backup contains.

-

-

-

-

-

-

Read only

Read only

Read only

Read only

Read only

5.5 Options

Under "Options" it is possible to activate additional features on a transmitter. The fea-

tures requested when a transmitter was ordered are activated at the factory before the

transmitter is delivered. Additional features can be purchased at any time from your

local Rohde & Schwarz sales partner.

Options are stored on a SIM card inside the R&S®TCE900 and are always valid for the

R&S®TCE900 in which the SIM card is installed. Options can be transferred to another

R&S®TCE900 by swapping the SIM card.

The Task View (Home) > Options > Status menu provides an overview of the available

or installed options.

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

244

R&S®Tx9

Task View Description

Options

In addition to permanent options, there are also temporary options. These options

deactivate automatically after a certain period of time. The period of validity of tempo-

rary options is shown in the Task View (Home) > Options > Details menu.

Features are enabled by installing a valid activation key in the Task View (Home) >

Options > Manage Keys menu.

"Manage Keys" parameters

● Path:Task View (Home) > Options > Manage Keys

Name

Description

Value range

Access right

Used to enter an activation key.

30 characters

Maintenance

Option Key

(Install/Deinstall)

Message (Install/

Deinstall)

●

●

●

Please enter a key

Prompt to enter a key.

Key OK

The key has been entered successfully (the display changes back

to "Please enter a key" after a few moments).

Invalid format

The entered key was invalid.

Please enter a

key, Key OK,

Invalid format

Read only

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

245

R&S®Tx9

Task View Description

Options

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

246

R&S®Tx9

Operating the Device Manager

Basic Settings

6 Operating the Device Manager

Using the Device Manager, the device type plates of all TCE900 units and the type

plates of the modules they contain can be polled.

The type plates contain information about the current software version of programma-

ble modules and all necessary information for spare parts procurement.

The Device Manager is started using the "Device Manager" button on the system,

transmitter or exciter level.

6.1 Basic Settings

The structure of the transmitter system is configured in the "Basic Setup" menu. Each

R&S TCE900 is assigned its logical function together with the other R&S TCE900

units, the physical installation position of the individual R&S TCE900 units is set and

the distribution of transmitters and R&S TCE900 units in the racks is described.

The basic settings are made for each R&S TCE900 in the system and must be entered

in the specified sequence:

● Hardware equipment ("Boards" menu tab)

The hardware modules which each R&S TCE900 contains and at which position

these modules are inserted in the R&S TCE900 base unit must be configured for

each R&S TCE900.

● Definition of the logical function

The task that each R&S TCE900 is to fulfill in the system must be defined.

● Integration of the R&S TCE900 in the transmitter system

Depending on their function, some R&S TCE900 units require additional informa-

tion regarding:

–

system variant (MultiTX, N+1)

–

–

transmitter variant (Redundancy, Modulation, Amplifier Type)

assignment to a transmitter (TX Number, Exciter A/B)

● Physical structure of the transmitter system

Depending on their function, some R&S TCE900 units require additional informa-

tion regarding:

–

total number of transmitter racks

–

number of racks per transmitter

● Physical installation location of the R&S TCE900 units

Each R&S TCE900 must be assigned the following:

–

number of the rack in which the R&S TCE900 is installed

–

number of the installation slot within a rack

● Assignment of transmitters to racks ("Racks" menu tab)

Each R&S TCE900 with the "Rack Control" function must be assigned those trans-

mitters which are installed in the racks that the "Rack Control" function monitors.

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

247

R&S®Tx9

Operating the Device Manager

Basic Settings

Changes to the basic settings only become effective when the R&S TCE900 has been

restarted.

In the tables below, "?" means that it must be taken into consideration whether an air

cooling interface (ACIF) or a TX interface is installed. See the detailed description of

the "Cooling Control" and "Rack Control" parameters in the table "Description of set-

ting values".

Assignment of logical functions

Table 6-1: "Functions" for SingleTX systems (for TMU9 and TMV9 only)

Transmitter type

TX Control

Exciter

System

Control

Cooling

Control

Rack Con-

trol

Table 6-2: "Functions" for MultiTX systems (<n> = 1 to 8)

Transmitter type

TX Control

Exciter

System

Control

Cooling Con-

trol

Rack Con-

trol

Single drive

Exciter

Backup drive

Exciter A

Exciter B

Dual drive

System Control

Exciter A

Exciter B

Single drive

System Control

Exciter (TX <n>)

Dual drive

System Control

Exciter A (TX <n>)

Exciter B (TX <n>)

Single drive

System Control

Exciter (TX A<n>, TX B)

X

X

-

X

-

-

X

-

X

-

-

X

-

X

X

X

-

X

X

-

X

-

X

X

-

X

X

X

X

-

X

X

-

X

-

X

X

-

X

?

?

-

?

-

-

?

-

?

-

-

?

-

?

?

-

?

-

-

X

-

X

-

-

X

-

Table 6-3: "Functions" for N+1 systems (<n> = 1 to 8; TXB: <n> = 9)

Transmitter type

TX Control

Exciter

System

Control

Cooling

Control

Rack Con-

trol

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

248

R&S®Tx9

Operating the Device Manager

Basic Settings

Transmitter type

TX Control

Exciter

System

Control

Cooling

Control

Rack Con-

trol

Rack Control (where

applicable)

Dual drive

System Control

Exciter A (TX A<n>, TX

B)

Exciter B (TX A<n>, TX

B)

Rack Control (where

applicable)

X

-

-

-

-

-

-

X

X

-

-

-

X

X

-

?

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Backup drive

Backup drive

Dual drive

Dual drive

Dual drive

Dual drive

X

X

-

-

X

1

1

1

1

-

-

-

-

-

<n>

<n>

Table 6-4: "Setup" for SingleTX systems (for TMU9 and TMV9 only)

Transmitter type

System Variant

Exciter

Redundancy No. of

TX

Number

Transmit-

ters

SingleTX/MultiTX

A1

Single drive

SingleTX/MultiTX

System Control

SingleTX/MultiTX

Single drive

Exciter

Backup drive

Exciter A

Exciter B

Dual drive

Exciter A

Exciter B

Single drive

Exciter (TX <n>)

Dual drive

Exciter A (TX <n>)

Exciter B (TX <n>)

-

-

-

-

-

-

A

A

B

-

A

B

-

A

-

A

B

A1

A1

-

A1

A1

TX

Number

-

-

A<n>

A<n>

Table 6-5: "Setup" for MultiTX systems (<n> = 1 to 8)

Transmitter type

System Variant

Exciter

Redundancy No. of

Transmit-

ters

System Control

SingleTX/MultiTX

A<n>

Single drive

System Control

SingleTX/MultiTX

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

249

R&S®Tx9

Operating the Device Manager

Basic Settings

Table 6-6: "Setup" for N+1 systems (<n> = 1 to 8; TXB <n> = 9)

Transmitter type

System Variant

Exciter

Redundancy No. of

TX

Number

Transmit-

ters

System Control

N+1 TX

<n>

Exciter (TX A<n>, TX B)

A<n>

Single drive

Single drive

Rack Control (where appli-

cable)

Dual drive

Exciter A (TX A<n>, TX B)

Exciter B (TX A<n>, TX B)

Rack Control (where appli-

cable)

-

-

-

-

-

System Control

N+1 TX

-

-

-

-

-

-

A

-

A

B

-

-

-

-

A<n>

A<n>

Dual drive

Dual drive

-

-

-

-

<n>

Table 6-7: IP addresses for SingleTX systems (for TMU9 and TMV9 only)

Transmitter type

Ethernet Local

Single drive

Exciter

Backup drive

Exciter A

Exciter B

Dual drive

System Control

Exciter A

Exciter B

Transmitter type

Single drive

System Control

Exciter (TX <n>)

Dual drive

System Control

Exciter A (TX <n>)

Exciter B (TX <n>)

192.168.58.100

192.168.58.11

192.168.58.12

192.168.58.100

192.168.58.11

192.168.58.12

Ethernet Local

192.168.58.100

192.168.58.<n>1

192.168.58.100

192.168.58.<n>1

192.168.58.<n>2

Table 6-8: IP addresses for MultiTX systems (<n> = 1 to 8)

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

250

R&S®Tx9

Operating the Device Manager

Basic Settings

Table 6-9: IP addresses for N+1 systems (<n> = 1 to 8; TXB <n> = 9; <m> = 2 to 9, No. of Rack Con-

trols)

Transmitter type

Single drive

System Control

Exciter (TX A<n>, TX B)

Dual drive

System Control

Exciter A (TX A<n>, TX B)

Exciter B (TX A<n>, TX B)

Ethernet Local

192.168.58.100

192.168.58.<n>1

192.168.58.100

192.168.58.<n>1

192.168.58.<n>2

Rack Control (where applicable)

192.168.58.10<m>

Rack Control (where applicable)

192.168.58.10<m>

Table 6-10: Description of setting values

Name

Description

System Con-

trol

Value range

Access right

Disabled,

Enabled

Configuration

TX Control

Disabled,

Enabled

Configuration

Set this check mark if this cassette of the R&S TCE900 is

to function as a system control unit. In this case, all

remote control interfaces and (if present) a R&S TDU900

display unit must be connected to this R&S TCE900. This

R&S TCE900 can also perform the function of the N+1

automatic system. In addition to functioning as a system

control unit, other functions can also be assigned to the

same R&S TCE900 depending on the modules it con-

tains.

Set this check mark if this cassette of the R&S TCE900

cassette is to function as a transmitter control unit. The

transmitter control unit contains, for example, the function

for monitoring the output power and an automatic exciter

switchover function (optional). In addition to functioning

as a transmitter control unit, other functions can also be

assigned to the same R&S TCE900 depending on the

modules it contains. This function must always be activa-

ted together with the "Exciter" function on the same

R&S TCE900.

Set this check mark if this R&S TCE900 cassette contains

at least one coder board and one RF board. With a

R&S TCE900 which is configured as an exciter, the "TX

Control" function must be activated at the same time,

unless the R&S TCE900 exciter is to be operated as a

standalone instrument. In addition to functioning as an

exciter, other functions can also be assigned to the same

R&S TCE900 depending on the modules it contains.

Set this check mark if this R&S TCE900 cassette contains

at least one cooling interface or one air cooling interface.

In addition to functioning as a cooling control unit, other

functions can also be assigned to the same R&S TCE900

depending on the modules it contains. The "Cooling Con-

trol" function must always be activated together with the

"Rack Control" function on the same R&S TCE900.

Exciter

Cooling Con-

trol

Disabled,

Enabled

Configuration

Disabled,

Enabled

Configuration

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

251

R&S®Tx9

Operating the Device Manager

Basic Settings

Value range

Access right

Disabled,

Enabled

Configuration

Name

Description

Rack Control

Set this check mark if this R&S TCE900 is to monitor rack

components (e.g. overvoltage protection) or door con-

tacts. A "TX Interface" module must be installed in the

R&S TCE900. With most system configurations, the Rack

Control function is together with the System Control func-

tion on the same R&S TCE900. The only exception are

multirack N+1 systems in which more than one Rack

Control are installed. With THx9, the "Rack Control" func-

tion must always be activated together with the "Cooling

Control" function on the same R&S TCE900.

With TMx9, the Rack Control function must be activated if

an air cooling interface is installed in the R&S TCE900

and the "Cooling" function is activated.

System Var-

iant

Indicates whether the system is a SingleTX, MultiTX or N

+1 system.

Single/

MultiTX, n+1

Configuration

The setting can be changed here if the "System Control"

function is active.

TX Number

Indicates the transmitter to which this R&S TCE900 is

assigned.

TX A1 to TX

A8 + TXB

Configuration

Exc A, Exc B Configuration

Off, 32/80,

9/12

Configuration

Exciter

ParIO

The setting can be changed here if the "TX Control" func-

tion is active.

Indicates whether this R&S TCE900 is to operate as

exciter A or exciter B. The displayed value must corre-

spond to the cabling of the two exciters at the exciter

switch. Exciter A is shown in the case of single drive

transmitters.

The setting can be changed here if the "Exciter" function

is active.

Indicates whether remote control has been activated by

means of parallel contacts. ParIO 32/80 corresponds to a

parallel remote control interface card with 32 inputs and

80 outputs. ParIO 9/12 corresponds to a parallel remote

control interface card with 9 inputs and 12 outputs.

Remote control can be connected to a R&S TCE900 with

the System Control function. In the case of N+1 systems,

it is also possible to connect remote control to a

R&S TCE900 with the TX Control function, but certain

restrictions will then apply.

The setting can be changed here if the "System Control"

or "TX Control" function is active.

Indicates which redundancy method is supported by this

transmitter.

●

Single Drive:

The transmitter contains one exciter.

Dual Drive:

The transmitter contains two exciters. If the active

exciter fails, an automatic switchover function

switches the system over to the standby exciter.

●

● Only available with some system variants:

Backup Drive:

The transmitter contains two exciters. If the active

exciter fails, an automatic switchover function

switches the system over to the standby exciter.

The setting can be changed here if the "TX Control" func-

tion is active.

Redundancy

Configuration

Single Drive,

Dual Drive,

Backup Drive

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

252

R&S®Tx9

Operating the Device Manager

Basic Settings

Name

Description

Transmitters

Indicates how many transmitters the system contains.

The B transmitter of an N+1 system is not included here.

The setting can be changed here if the "System Control"

function is active.

Modulation

Indicates the modulation mode of the exciter. An appro-

priate software option must additionally be installed for

the displayed modulation mode.

Either the modulation modes for TV/DAB or those for FM/

FMHD are available.

The setting can be changed here if the "TX Control" or

"Exciter" function is active.

Value range

Access right

1 to 8

Configuration

Configuration

DVB‑T2,

DVB‑T,

ISDB‑T,

ATSC, ATV,

DAB, FM,

FMHD

Rack Number

Indicates the rack in which the R&S TCE900 module is

installed. The left-hand rack is assigned the number 1.

1 to 18

Configuration

Amplifier

Mode

Broadband,

Doherty

Configuration

Amplifiers

1 to 24

Configuration

Amplifier

Type

Indicates the amplifier type used in the transmitter.

●

Configuration

The setting can be changed here if the "System Control",

"TX Control" or "Exciter" function is active.

Indicates whether the amplifiers are to be operated in

broadband or Doherty mode. To operate the amplifiers in

Doherty mode, the frequency ranges of the amplifiers

must be set to the transmit frequency. This display only

applies to amplifier types which support Doherty mode.

The setting can be changed here if the "TX Control" or

"Exciter" function is active.

Indicates the total number of amplifiers per output stage

of this transmitter. Whether the amplifiers are housed in

one or more racks is irrelevant. Up to 24 amplifiers per

output stage are supported (FM: up to 8 amplifiers).

The setting can be changed here if the "TX Control" func-

tion is active.

●

●

●

●

PHU901:

High‑power amplifier, UHF, liquid‑cooled.

PMU901:

Medium‑power amplifier, UHF, air‑cooled with Doh-

erty mode.

PHU902:

High‑power amplifier, UHF, liquid‑cooled with Doh-

erty mode.

PHV902:

High‑power amplifier, VHF, liquid‑cooled with Doh-

erty mode.

PMV901:

Medium‑power amplifier, VHF, air‑cooled with Doh-

erty mode.

The setting can be changed here if the "TX Control" or

"Exciter" function is active.

Indicates the position at which the R&S TCE900 is instal-

led in the respective rack. In the THU9, position 1 is the

left-hand slot; in the TMU9, position 1 is the top slot.

The setting can be changed here if the "System Control",

"TX Control" or "Exciter" function is active.

PHU901,

PMU901,

PHU902,

PHV902,

PMV901,

PHR901,

PMR901

Slot Number

1 to 12

Configuration

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

253

R&S®Tx9

Operating the Device Manager

Basic Settings

Value range

Access right

1 or 2

Configuration

Name

Description

Racks/Rack

Control

Indicates how many racks are monitored by this

R&S TCE900. Transmitters with more than 12 amplifiers

monitor 2 racks with one rack control. With all other trans-

mitters, this value must be set to 1.

The setting can be changed here if the "Rack Control"

function is active.

Cooling Type

Indicates the type of cooling system.

Liquid, Air

Configuration

The displayed value must be suitable for the amplifier

type. Further settings are made in the "Home" > "Cooling"

> "Task View" > "Setup Cooling" menu.

Racks/

System

Indicates the total number of racks contained in the sys-

tem.

1 to 18

Configuration

Racks/TX

1 to 4

Configuration

The setting can be changed here if the "System Control"

function is active.

Indicates the number of racks that the transmitter consists

of. This setting is only relevant for THU9 transmitters with

more than 12 amplifiers. In all other cases, the value 1

must be set here.

The setting can be changed here if the "TX Control" func-

tion is active.

Number of

Rack Controls

Indicates the total number of rack controls which are

active in the system.

1 to 9

Configuration

The setting can be changed here if the "Rack Control"

function is active.

Int. RF Sen-

sor

Indicates whether the internal RF test point of the ampli-

fier is to be used for measuring the transmit power.

Off, On

Configuration

Configuration

Indicates whether the selected combination of settings is

valid and nonconflicting.

OK, not Valid Read only

The setting is only relevant for "Amplifier Type =

PMU901". The value "On" should be set if the transmitter

consists of exactly one amplifier and no CAN bus test

point is installed in the transmitter.

The setting can be changed here if the "Rack Control"

function is active.

The setting can be changed here.

Reboot

Reboots this R&S TCE900. Changes to settings in this

and the other menu tabs of the Basic Config menu only

become effective after a reboot.

IP Address

(Local IP Set-

tings)

Used to set the IP address of the R&S TCE900 for inter-

nal communications with other R&S TCE900 units in this

system. When the system is supplied, the internal IP

addresses begin with 192.168.58. The last group of digits

differs according to the following rule:

●

●

System Control: 100

TX Control + Exciter: 11/12 (= TXA1, Exciter A/B) to

81/82 (= TXA8, Exciter A/B); 91/92 (= TXB, Exciter

A/B)

Rack Control (second rack): 101

●

The setting can be changed here.

Configuration

Configuration

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

254

R&S®Tx9

Operating the Device Manager

Basic Settings

Name

Description

Value range

Access right

IP Address

(Remote IP

Settings)

Slot Config

Used to set the IP address of the R&S TCE900 system

control. The settings depend on the network infrastruc-

ture.

Used to determine which module is contained in each

installation slot of the R&S TCE900 unit. Basically, any

module can be inserted into any installation slot. The rack

cabling has, however, been optimized for installation of

the modules in the following slots:

●

●

Slot A (bottom left): RF board or TX interface

Slot B (top center): Cooling interface (CIF or ACIF)

or ATV interface

Slot C (bottom center): Reserved for receiver module

Slot CD (top right): Coder board or LAN switch

●

●

The setting can be changed here.

Coder Board,

RFBoard,

TXIf, Coolin-

gIf, LAN-

SwitchIf,

ATVIf, CIF,

ACIF

Configuration

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

255

R&S®Tx9

Operating the Device Manager

Basic Settings

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

256

R&S®Tx9

User Administration

Creating New User Profiles

7 User Administration

The user administration facility is available in conjunction with browser-based opera-

tion. The settings that you enter in user administration are also valid for opening menus

in local operation. You can use the user administration facility to perform the following

tasks.

● Create new user profiles

● Change user profiles (users and access rights)

● Delete user profiles

● Close active sessions

The "Superuser" ID with the factory‑set password 1234 gives you extensive user

administration rights.

7.1 Creating New User Profiles

Proceed as follows to create a new user profile:

1. Log on as Superuser via the web interface.

User name: Superuser

Password: 1234

The processing options and a list of existing users are displayed.

2. Select the Add new user option.

3. Enter a user name and password and the desired permissions for this user.

The password must be at least 6 characters long.

4. Click "Add user" if the settings are correct.

Click "Reset" if the settings are not correct, and enter the settings again.

7.2 Changing User Profiles (Users and Access Rights)

Proceed as follows to modify an existing user profile:

1. Log on as Superuser via the web interface.

User name: Superuser

Password: 1234

The processing options and a list of existing users are displayed.

2. From the list of existing users, select the user to be modified from the Select col-

umn.

3. Select the Change selected user option.

4. Change the user's profile according to your requirements.

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

257

R&S®Tx9

User Administration

Deleting User Profiles

5. Click "Change user" if the settings are correct.

Click "Reset" if the settings are not correct, and enter the settings again.

For the default users, you can change the passwords only; you cannot change access

rights.

7.3 Deleting User Profiles

Proceed as follows to delete a user profile:

1. Log on as Superuser via the web interface.

User name: Superuser

Password: 1234

The processing options and a list of existing users are displayed.

2. From the list of existing users, select the user to be deleted from the Select col-

umn.

3. Select the Delete selected user option.

4. The profile is removed from the user list.

7.4 Closing Active Sessions

To obtain information about existing sessions and end active sessions, follow this pro-

cedure.

1. Log on as Superuser via the web interface.

User name: Superuser

Password: 1234

The processing options and a list of existing users are displayed.

2. Select the Show session list option.

A list with information about the active sessions is displayed.

3. From the list of existing sessions, select the session to be closed from the Select

column.

4. Select the Delete selected session option.

The selected session is closed.

5. Select the Option Show user list option.

The list of existing users is displayed again.

Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 07

258